Home

Avaya Communication Manager Installation and Upgrades S8100

1. O AA A A A ae OO O OO O OO O OO O OO O OO I O O0 O O O OO OO O OO O O O O OO O 8 4 crdpadp KLC 050901 Figure notes 1 IP Media Processor adapter 3 Processor Interface cable slot 2 2 259A adapter for C LAN 4 Tie wrap anchor point Cable a 2 cabinet G600 system NOTE See Cable a 3 cabinet G600 system on page 98 for a 3 cabinet configuration 1 Remove the bottom panel and fan assembly from Cabinet B port cabinet Remove the fan assembly from Cabinet A processor cabinet Remove the right TDM LAN bus terminator from Cabinet A and install it on the left TDM LAN bus pin field on Cabinet B See Figure 37 Shift TDM LAN bus terminator from Cabinet A to Cabinet B on page 95 A WARNING Be sure to install each TDM LAN bus terminator with the arrow on its back pointing upward 94 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Cable a G600 system
2. ckdm464f KLC 051399 1 TN464GP 2 Option switch 4 24 32 channel selector 24CH shown 75 120 Ohm selector 120 Ohms shown EE Sie 610 9065850 58100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 283 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts See Table 40 Lead and color designations on page 284 for typical lead designations The circuit packs and auxiliary equipment are classified as shown in the following tables Table 40 Lead and color designations 1 of 2 Cross connect Amphenol pin Color pin Backplane pin 1 W BL 26 102 2 BL W 01 002 3 W O 27 103 4 O W 02 003 5 W G 28 104 6 G W 03 004 7 W BR 29 105 8 BR W 04 005 9 W SL 30 106 10 SL W 05 006 11 R BL 31 107 12 BL R 06 007 13 R O 32 108 14 O R 07 008 15 R G 33 109 16 G R 08 009 17 R BR 34 110 18 BR R 09 010 19 R SL 35 111 20 SL R 10 O11 21 BK BL 36 112 22 BL BK 11 012 23 BK O 37 113 24 O BK 12 013 1 of 2 284 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Cable
3. scdpff03 KLC 082002 Table 7 Circuit pack installation order loading 1 of 2 Function Apparatus code Load G600 from Notes Processor TN2314 Slots 1 and 2 Call Classifier Tone TN744E Slot 3 Detector Announcement TN750C Any slot Speech Synthesizer TN725B Any slot Control C LAN TN799DP Left 10 2 58100 Installation Upgrades 105 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Table 7 Circuit pack installation order loading 2 of 2 Function Apparatus code Load G600 from Notes Media Processor TN2302 Left DS1 E1 ISDN PRI TN464GP TN767E Left Maximum of 7 Total number TN2242 TN2464 of ISDN PRI and ISDN BRI circuit packs must not exceed 7 ISDN BRI Trunk TN2185 Left Maximum of 4 CO Trunk TN747B TN465C Left TN2199 TN2147C TN2138 TN438B DID Trunk TN753 TN2139 Left TN2146 TN436B TN459B Tie Trunk TN760E TN458 Left TN497 TN2140B Auxiliary Trunk TN417 Left Modem Pool TN758 Left Data Line TN726 Right Digital Line TN754C TN2181 Right TN2224 B Analog Line TN746B TN2135 Right TN467 TN2144 TN2149 TN2180 TN2183 TN2215 TN468B TN791 TN793 TN2793 TN2214 Hybrid Line TN762B Right ME
4. eL E a U O pcdm6cmc 091499 Figure notes 1 Cabinet s AC power cord 2 Surge protected AC power distribution unit 120 VAC systems optional 379 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Figure 90 Routing two CMC1s AC power cords to power distribution unit JM EHE mar jm I Fy 5l a NN XLI css f J mHE a IET I E 0 0 Cc 5 e C_J 9 Ce tC BELLI Ke T UUUU UUUUU UUUUU UUUUU UUUUU UUUU I Figure notes 1 Cabinet s AC power cord 2 Surge protected AC power distribution unit 120 VAC systems optional Note The power cord routing for a 3 cabinet configuration follows the same pattern as the routing for the 2 cabinet configuration shown here 380 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install
5. m al ooo 2 N C5 A a Figure notes 1 51061 5 3 650A power unit 2 51056 10 4 Forflash disk PCMCIA Table 63 Circuit pack installation order loading 1 of 2 Function Apparatus code Load CMC1 from Notes Processor TN2314 Slot 1 and 2 Call Classifier Tone TN744B Slot 3 Detector Announcement TN750C Any slot Speech Synthesizer TN725B Any slot Control C LAN TN799DP Lower right 1 of 2 392 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Table 63 Circuit pack installation order loading 2 of 2 Function Apparatus code Load CMC1 from Notes Media Processor TN2302 Lower right DS1 E1 ISDN PRI TN464GP Lower right Maximum of 7 Total number TN767E TN2242 of ISDN PRI and ISDN BRI TN2464 circuit packs must not exceed 7 ISDN BRI Trunk TN2185 Lower right Maximum of 4 CO Trunk TN747B TN465C Lower right TN2199 TN2147C TN2138 TN438B DID Trunk TN753 TN2139 Lower right TN2146 TN436B TN459B Tie Trunk TN760E TN458 Lower right TN497 TN2140B Auxiliary Trun
6. 2 042999 Pin 1 orange white Cross connect field 25 pair cable N A Processor Interface cable AUX connector 10 G600 or CMC1 128 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Emergency transfer and auxiliary power NOTE Install and cable a G600 cabinet Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections Only 1 emergency transfer power panel and 1 auxiliary power connection are provided per system Connect emergency transfer power and auxiliary power as shown in Table 16 Emergency transfer and auxiliary power on page 129 Auxiliary power includes power to an attendant console or adjunct device Table 16 Emergency transfer and auxiliary power Power type Color AUX connector Emergency Transfer Black Blue XFER48 Pin 36 Blue Black Ground Pin 46 Adjunct 48 VDC Brown Yellow Yellow Brown ACC48A Pin 19 Ground Pin 44 Telephone pin designations Table 17 Port circuit pack and telephone pin designations on page 129 provides pack and pin designations Table 17 Port circuit pack and telephone pin designations Pin on 4 wire 302C1 2 wire 302C1 8510T BRI with Analog Z3A1 amp Z3A2 modular 8400 series 8400 series 603E adjunct speaker station ADU data plug 603E 9403 9434 9403 9410 9434 phone modem module 1 TXT TXT 2 TXR
7. TEN 96 244 cm 0 5 om ed H 1 ca P O P Q gt 6 9 i E B d E P 9 P 9 n9 G e ue nn Lk a LO A 137cm eo b 5 gt Ic d 29 1 2 75 c Po E 5 12 7 cm Floor indmins9 KLC 083002 Figure notes 1 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws 3 2 sheet of plywood 2 12 x 1 inch safety screw 1 Securely tighten the shoulder screws and safety screws 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 369 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Install left and right panels wall mount Figure 84 Left and right panel installation indmins3 KLC 082002 Figure notes 1 Left panel 2 Right panel 1 Align the cutouts in the panels with the cabinet s hinges Drill a 1 8 inch 3 mm pilot hole into the wall and secure the panels with the 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws Proceed to Check AC power and ground for on page 371 370 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Check AC power and ground for CMC1 A W
8. 3 ON down Enable result codes 4 OFF up Displays keyboard commands local echo 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades 149 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Set neon voltage to prevent ring ping Table 23 Switch settings for US Robotics external modem 2 of 2 Switch Setting Function 5 OFF up Sets auto answer 6 OFF up CD Carrier Detect override modem sends CD signal on connect drops CD on disconnect 7 OFF up Power on and ATZ reset software defaults loads Y or Y1 configuration from NVRAM 8 ON down AT Attention command set recognition enables recognition smart mode 2 of 2 The modem is preconfigured to operate correctly See Modem s configuration and administration on page 276 for procedures on how to verify that the correct defaults are set how to configure the modem and how to test the modem Set neon voltage to preventring ping NOTE There is no need to set neon voltage on a G600 NOTE If the ringing option is set to 50 Hz neon voltage is not available If 25 Hz is selected the maximum voltage is 120 volts See Set ringing option for on page 399 NOTE Set the control to OFF if there are no neon message waiting lamps or if LED message lamps are used See Figure 69 Setting the neon voltage on page 151 150 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Complet
9. O 7 O O Figure notes ESD ground jack 650A power supply TN2314 Processor circuit pack TN744E Call Classifier Detector A U N E 5 6 7 8 scdpff02 KLC 071902 TN2302 Media Processor TN799DP C LAN Accessory compartment Fiber optic pass through 76 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Unpack and inspect Table 3 Comcodes for equipment used with G600 on page 77 lists the comcodes for equipment used with the G600 If an item is marked with an x in the Optional column and depending on the site s configuration the item may be unnecessary Table 3 Comcodes for equipment used with G600 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Comcode Description Optional 848627204 Door 848627147 Bottom panel 700017932 Mounting kit screws 700019292 Time division multiplexing local area network TDM LAN bus cable
10. User Limit Permissions Maximum Allowed C Allow Users 4 Enter a share name for example Laptop CD ROM 5 Select Maximum allowed for the User limit and click OK on the New Share and Properties windows The CD ROM drive is now shared The following procedures describe how to connect to the CD ROM drive from 58100 server 1 Establish a connection from the laptop to the 8100 server a the laptop open Internet Explorer and enter 192 11 13 6 the IP address of the 8100 server in the IE address window b Click Administer System and login using lucent3 for the login ID and password C Click the Continue button when the Notice screen appears 8100 Installation and Upgrades 161 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an 58100 system Physical connections 162 2 Click Login to 192 under Remote Control Terminal Services If an error message appears click OK Click the Connect button leave the Server window blank Click OK if an error message appears cC Login using lucent3 for the login ID and password You should now be at the 8100 Windows desktop Connect back to the laptop s CD ROM drive a On the 58100 desktop click Start Run and type in the path to the laptop s CD ROM 192 11 13 5 lt laptop s CD ROM share name gt where lt laptop s CD ROM share name gt is the name you assigned to the laptop s CD ROM drive when you shared it in
11. The TN799DP C LAN circuit pack is now installed in the G600 CMC carrier and connected to the IP network Communication Manger Avaya offers several IP solutions for customers 2 of which are Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator and the IP Media Processor For information about the Avaya R300 refer to Getting Started with the Avaya R300 Remote Office 555 233 769 and MAX 3000 Installation and Basic Configuration Guide 555 233 768 Communication Manager operates both as an IP gateway and gatekeeper As a gateway it converts voice traffic to data transmission over IP networks As a gatekeeper it provides IP endpoints with secure access to the S8100 G600 CMC 1 system This connection lets users take advantage of every application on the system including voice mail computer telephone integration call center wireless and call control features such as conferencing call forward transfer hold speed dial and multiple line appearances The software supports Distributed Communications System DCS and Q Signaling QSIG protocols over IP networks to operations across multiple sites Communication Manager can be managed through the server s existing system administration tools and can take advantage of call routing and cost accounting self diagnostics toll fraud security protection and remote access applications It enables IP telephones to communicate with analog digital and ISDN phones on the network and supports the H 323 pro
12. onfigure Trap Destinations onfigure Community Strings a Start Stop the Subagent Home Administer System User Services Download Software 2 Click Configure Trap Destinations The following page displays Configure Trap Destinations u Configure Community Strings a Start Stop the Subagent xl Home LS Help Administer System Configure Trap Destinations on AVAYAS8100 action trap destination specify an IP address choose SNMP version User Services C list current entries Download C addan entry Input the IP address vi Software C delete an entry ciearaut submit 214 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer SNMP To list every current trap destination choose the list current entries option and click the Submit button The following page displays a Configure Trap Destinations a Configure Community Strings a Start Stop the Subagent Home The current trap destinations are shown in the following table Administer Trap Destinations SNMP Versions User Services 127 0 0 1 snmpv1 127 0 0 1 snmpv2c Download 135 9 77 129 snmpv2c Software back AVAYA 4 Click Back to return to the Configure Trap Destinations page 5 Toaddan IP address to which traps are sent a Choose the add an entry option b Enter the IP address in the Input the IP address field Specify the SNMP version by clickin
13. 4 the user name and password NOTE The Avaya Services representative uses the logins lucent1 Iucent2 or lucent3 and either the LAC password NT password or the ASG challenge The customer uses an appropriate password to log in such as NTadmin S8100 Installation and Upgrades 211 April 2004 System initialization Download Avaya Site Administration The following page displays NOTICE By use of this system you accept the terms and conditions of the license agreements for all third party software included with this Home product Failure to comply with these agreements could result in legal action by the third party vendor s Administer System This product is designed for the use of authorized Avaya Inc products only Use of this system for any other third party applications is strictly prohibited and will result in the nullification of Avaya Inc warranty and post warranty obligations User Services Download Software This system is restricted to authorized users for legitimate business purposes Unauthorized access is a criminal violation of the law Copyright c 1992 Avaya Inc Unpublished amp Not for Publication Don t show this message again AVAYA 5 After reading the page click Continue A page similar to the following displays System Administration a MultiVantage on 135 b The first two links will work only Home Administer System User Services a Intuity AUDIX on
14. Alarm input type Color AUX connector Major UPS White Blue AP2 Pin 27 Blue White Ground Pin 2 Minor White Orange AP2 Pin 26 Orange White Ground Pin 1 Alarm output The system provides a relay contact closure that can operate a customer provided alarm such as a light or bell The customer provides the circuitry and power source The alarm device must not exceed a rating of more than 30 VAC RMS or 60 VDC at 0 75 Amps To connect alarm output 1 Connectthe external alarm output See Table 15 Alarm output at AUX connector on page 128 2 Typechange system parameters maintenance and press ENTER 3 Changethe CPE Alarm Activation Level field to the desired alarm level and press ENTER S8100 Installation and Upgrades 127 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections Table 15 Alarm output at AUX connector Alarm output type Color AUX connector EXTALMA Violet Green EXTALMB Green Violet Pin 48 Pin 23 UPS alarm connection Figure 56 UPS connection to G600 or CMC1 D Figure notes Avaya UPS Z3A2 alarm adapter RJ45 D8W cable 103A or modular jack Un amp UU N m Pin 26 white orange ET B Len ST d
15. If a timeout reply displays check cabling or review the previous setup steps Also verify that the 58100 is operating normally and referencing the LEDs on the TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate See Table 53 TN2314 circuit pack s LED states on page 338 Connect S8100 system to laptop s CD ROM drive laptop running WINDOWS 2000 To copy software from the laptop s CD ROM drive to the S8100 server you need to share the CD drive and establish a connection from the server to the CD drive 1 160 On the laptop double click My Computer S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections 2 Right click the CD ROM drive icon and select Sharing The following dialog displays Compact Disc D Properties i21 x General Hardware Sharing You can share this folder among other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder C Do not share this folder Share name D m Comment User limit Maximum allowed C Allow H Users To set permissions for how users access Permissions folder over the network click Permissions To configure settings for Offline access to Cachin this shared folder click Caching New Share 3 When the dialog displays select Share this folder and click the New Share button The New Share dialog appears New Share 2l x Share Name Comment
16. 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Set up customer logins Windows logins for customers Table 50 Web access rights officeadmin and officeuser access 2 of 3 Directory Use Login group Permissions c LucentWeb admin audix html INTUITY AUDIX anonymous none networking HTML pages officeuser none officeadmin read administrators full control lucent full control c LucentWeb admin audix cgi INTUITY AUDIX anonymous none networking cgi scripts 7 officeuser none officeadmin execute administrators full control lucent full control c LucentWeb admin user html Pages for non anonymous none administrator users e g download officeuser read officeadmin full control administrators read lucent full control c LucentWeb admin user cgi cgi scripts for non anonymous none administrator users e g 7 dosmload officeuser execute officeadmin execute administrators full control lucent full control cALucentWebNadminMhtml Platform HTML pages anonymous none officeuser none officeadmin read administrators read lucent full control 2 of 3 303 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Set up customer logins Windows logins for customers Table 50 Web access rights officeadmin and officeuser access 3 of 3 Directory Use Login group Permissions c LucentWeb admin cgi platform cgi scripts anonymo
17. Enable customer logins on page 187 e Administer 8100 on page 188 Call accounting on page 199 Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization on page 199 e INTUITY AUDIX administration on page 208 Download Avaya Site Administration on page 211 Administer SNMP on page 213 Schedule backups on page 219 This chapter describes administration procedures using the SAT interface Normally this interface uses the function keys F1 F10 on your SAT terminal or PC to perform SAT functions However if you are running Windows 2000 on your PC and are using the W2KTT terminal emulation you need to use Esc key sequences to perform these functions instead of the function keys The following table shows the escape key sequence for each action S8100 Installation and Upgrades 173 April 2004 System initialization Connectivity and access to the S8100 system Action Esc Sequence Help Esch Cancel Esc x Submit Esce Clear Field Escc Prev Field Escfp Next Field Esc N Previous Page Esc p Next Page Escn Next Form Esc fn Go to Page Escdp Edit vec Escf6 Refresh Escr Update Form Escuf Logout Esc lower case L Connectivity and access to the S8100 system The procedures in this chapter assume that you have followed the steps in Chapter 2 Connectivity and access to an 58100 system to Connect a lapto
18. Use a small comcode 846300994 screwdriver to pry top cover off 108 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Each column of sneak fuse panels requires approximately 8 inches 20 cm of horizontal wall space Connector cables connect the network interface to the sneak fuse panel Also use 157B connecting blocks equipped with SCP 110 protectors for sneak current protection NOTE Sneak current protectors with a rating of 350 mA at 600 V must be UL listed for United States installations or CSA certified for Canadian installations The panel contains 2 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 sneak fuses and 2 spares Use the SCP 110 protectors with 110 type hardware and on the 507B sneak fuse panel The SCP 110 protectors can be ordered separately and installed on the 157B connecting block Fifty protectors are required per block 1 Install the 507B near the network interface or patch panels with locally obtained 12 x 34 inch screws or equivalent Table 8 Sneak fuse connector pinout on page 109 is a pinout of the cable wiring and associated fuse numbers Table 8 Sneak fuse connector pinout1 of 2 Connector Pin Pair Fuse Numbers Number 26 1 1 27 2 2 28 3 3 29 4 4 30 5 5 31 6 6 32 7 7 33 8 8 34 9 9 35 10 10 36 11 11 37 12 12 38 13
19. change system parameter limits 224 LAC 345 LAC bash 343 commercial AC power 86 371 companding 195 companding modes 194 concrete encased ground 87 372 configuring Avaya Site Administration 267 customer s LAN 163 servers DHCP and TFTP 175 switches 267 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Index D connecting AC power 86 371 laptop computer 154 management terminal 113 power cords 92 378 415 telephones 113 connection icon creating 164 connections keyboard 163 LAN 163 modem 163 monitor 163 mouse 163 connectivity and access 8100 153 copy protection 279 country codes listed 193 setting 193 country options setting 193 194 coupled bonding conductor 90 91 92 376 378 creating DEFINITY ONE connection icon 164 customer s access 299 LAN configuring 163 order checking 73 357 CWY1 announcements 254 D D1 bash commands dibackup 318 didisable snmp 192 dienable snmp 192 distat 187 date and time 8100 remote dial in 189 8100 using CLI 189 8100 using terminal server 188 setting 188 DC power signaling leads 281 defragmenting using Diskeeper 329 deleting nonadministered remote users 237 DHCP server configuring 175 digital networking adding remote machines 230 administering networking channels 225 changing local machine information 226 changing local machine profiles 226 completing remote machine profiles 233 completing the Digital Ma
20. 18 Leave the domain entry blank and click OK After a connection is established a dialog similar to the following displays Connection Established 2 x You are connected to Estonia To geconnect oven louble cli dial up icon in the status area ES of the taskbar 1 2 45 You can also double click the connection icon in the Dial Up Networking folder T Do not show this dialog box in the future More Details This indicates that the laptop is connected to the S8100 system The dial up connection is established Once the dial up connection is established the caller must use 1 of 3 access methods See Access methods on page 165 Access methods Access the 58100 system through the following methods e Via a Telnet session on page 166 e Via a web browser session on page 167 Remotely using Avaya Site Administration on page 170 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 165 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Access methods Via a Telnet session Use this access method to Register S8100 system with INADS Activate license files e Execute GAS commands from a bash shell e Access 58100 system SAT session e Set up the IP address for 58100 system using setip command See Connect to SAT session via Telnet on page 310 for more information about connecting via Telnet NOTE The IP address differs depending on the type of physical connection est
21. Password m Help Add Change Delete Cancel Rename 3 Complete the fields in this window using the information provided in Table 31 Field definitions Digital Machine Administration window on page 231 Table 31 Field definitions Digital Machine Administration window 1 of 2 Field Valid input Procedure Description Machine 1 10 alphanumeric Enter the unique name of the remote machine Name d h Each remote machine s name must be unique not only to other guidelines at right remote machines but to every machine on the network including fax call delivery machines and the local AUDIX TCP IP Numeric address The IP address of the remote machine Address string in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn 1of2 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 231 April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information 232 Table 31 Field definitions Digital Machine Administration window 2 of 2 Field Valid input Procedure Description Message 24 hour clock time Start Time Enter the starting time for a message Transmission in the format hh mm transmission period to the remote system such as 00 01 for 1 Schedule minute after midnight End Time Enter the ending time for a message transmission period to the remote system such as 23 59 for 1 minute before midnight Interval Enter the interval at which the local AUDIX system will call this
22. Terminology Communication Manager replaces MultiVantage software to refer to the application that provides call control and telephony features e System is a general term that encompasses every reference to the Avaya Media Server or Gateway with Communication Manager e 8100 system is used as an abbreviation for either the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 Media Gateway or the Avaya 58100 Media Server with the Avaya CMC1 Media Gateway e Avaya 58100 Media Server is abbreviated as 8100 server e Media Gateway is abbreviated as CMC e 5600 Media Gateway is abbreviated as G600 e Refer to Technical Monthly Reference Guide for Circuit Pack Vintages and Change Notices for current information about usable vintages of a specific circuit pack s code including its suffix Typography This section describes the typographical conventions for commands keys user input system output and field names Commands Commands are in bold type Example Type change switch time zone and press Enter Command variables are in bold italic type when they are part of what you must type and in plain italic type when they are not part of what you must type Example Type ch machine name where machine name is the name of the call delivery machine 64 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 About this book Related documents Command options are in bold type inside square brackets Example At the DOS promp
23. b Press Enter and type exit to exit the LAC window Closethe LAC window Note Do not close the LAC window until you have issued the exit command 10 SDT Open Internet Explorer on the S8100 s desktop and log in using lucent3 Note This step could be done by closing the S8100 s desktop and using the laptop s IE session but then you would need to set up a new S8100 desktop session for the subsequent steps 11 SDT IE Backup everything to the PCMCIA card or to a network location Note If the medium you are backing up to runs out of space a message will appear noting the files that were not backed up In this case find a different backup location or PCMCIA card with enough capacity and rerun the entire backup Click Administer System b Login with lucent3 Click Backup amp Restore under System Maintenance d Click Immediate Backup e Under Choose Items for Immediate Backup select everything that is installed Note If the S8100 s internal AUDIX is being used you must do two backups First select the AUDIX translations names amp messages radio button in addition to MultiVantage announcements and Multi Vantage translations When the backup finishes return to the Immediate Backup screen and select only the AUDIX announcements radio button and send this backup to the same or a different location f Set Destination to PCMCIA or click O
24. disabled lucent officeadmin officeuser 2 Power Users Users browse vm sa To be administered 2 To be administered Ad WARNING The logins in the Lucent group of Table 48 Windows 2000 logins on page 300 are for the exclusive use of Avaya Services personnel These logins are established and updated automatically by Lucent software DO NOT ALTER THESE LOGINS IN ANY MANNER To do so may render the system unserviceable and may require a partial or complete reinstallation of the software by Avaya personnel Windows login types for customers Administrator login e NTadmin This is a standard Windows administrator account used to administer network parameters and similar functions 300 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Set up customer logins Windows logins for customers INTUITY AUDIX logins browse This login is used in the Voice Messaging application See the INTUITY AUDIX documentation or Table 49 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins for sa vm and browse on page 301 for a list of commands accessible to the browse login This login is disabled from the factory It must be enabled and a password chosen before it can be used See Set up login accounts on page 304 vm This login is used in the Voice Messaging application See the INTUITY AUDIX documentation or Table 49 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins for sa vm and browse on page 301 for a list of commands accessible to the vm
25. Administer System Continue User Services Download Software 4 Click Continue to return to the Immediate backup screen 5 Select items to back up and select Backup 324 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface View scheduled backups To view scheduled backups 1 Click Scheduled Backups The following screen displays a Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Home Current list of scheduled backup jobs y Data Set Destination Days Time Administer DEFINITY announcements pemcia Th 600 System AUDIX announcements Weak pesi See ee Jlunisat2 backup Th 8 00 x Barvicoll AuDIX announcements Download Software Add new schedule Z edit X delete This feature is currently enabled enable B disable From this screen you can add edit or delete scheduled backups For information about adding a scheduled backup see Add a scheduled backup on page 219 Access backup information To review previous backups click Last scheduled backup results The following screen displays 1 Immediate Backup 1 Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Home Results of last scheduled backup Administer Destination System E Items backed up File Size Services Download Time finished Software 8100 Installation and Upgrades 325 April 2004 Mi
26. Home 1 Immediate Backup a Scheduled Backups a Restore Backup in progress Administer System Cancel backup User View backup progress Services Download Software a Last scheduled backup results a Contents of backup location 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface View backup progress To view backup progress click View Backup Progress The following screen displays a Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Home Backup in progress Administer Cancel backup System User Backup in progress please wait Thu Mar 02 10 12 23 2000 Services Download Software For dest pemcia check that card is plugged in and sane Check permissions on the pcmcia drive e For a destination that is not a pcmcia drive check that the f drive is mapped to the network Check permissions on mapped network drive f drive Back up to a LAN address NOTE When backing up to a LAN address the address is to a shared drive that is installed on a non S8100 machine To back up data to a LAN address 1 Click Other locations a Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location Restore Home Choose items for immediate backup MultiVantage announcements Warning Before Administer MultiVantage translation f
27. To connect the power cords 1 Ensure the AC load center s circuit breakers are OFF 2 Connect the cabinet to the UPS or to an unswitched or always on electrical outlet Cable a G600 system NOTE TDM LAN bus terminators are factory installed on single G600 units See Figure 35 Processor cabinet s TDM LAN bus terminators on page 93 92 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Cable a G600 system Figure 35 Processor cabinet s TDM LAN bus terminators e i visi cadptdm1 102600 Figure notes 1 TDM LAN bus terminators on the left and right TDM LAN bus pin fields Install Processor Interface cable 1 Connectthe Processor Interface cable to the slot 2 connector behind the processor cabinet See Figure 36 G600 cable connections on page 94 2 Install the IP Media Processor adapter and 259A C LAN adapter on the appropriate connectors behind the processor cabinet 3 Install connector retainers 4 Secure cables with tie wraps for strain relief S8100 Installation and Upgrades 93 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Cable a G600 system Figure 36 G600 cable connections
28. does not operate normally when following the operating instructions Using the 1152A1 PDU The 1152A1 PDU is used to power the 46xx series of IP telephones in addition to providing a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection Generation 1 Avaya IP telephones can receive power from the 1152A1 via an in line adapter This adapter provides the resistive signature so that the 1152A1 allows power to flow to the telephone The generation 2 telephones do not need an adapter The 1152A1 PDU has 24 10 100 Base T ports each can supply up to 16 8 Watts using the internal power supply and operates on a 100 to 240 Volt AC 60 50 Hertz power source The 1152A1 PDU is 1 high and fits in most standard 19 inch racks It can also be mounted on a shelf Refer to the user s guide that comes with the unit for complete installation instructions Connect the 1152A1 PDU v CAUTION The 1152A1 PDU has no ON OFF switch To connect or disconnect power to the 1152A1 PDU simply insert or remove the power cable from the AC power receptacle behind the 1152A1 PDU 1 Pluga power cord into the power socket behind the 1152A1 power distribution unit 2 Plugthe other end of the power cord into the power receptacle The 1152A1 PDU powers up and the internal fans begin operating The 1152A1 PDU then runs through its Power On Self Test POST which takes less than 10 seconds During the test every port on the unit is disabled and the LEDs light up For more information ab
29. 12 13 14 15 16 17 182 Connect the PC laptop to the RJ45 jack on the front panel NOTE For details of this procedure see Connect the laptop to 58100 system on page 154 On the PC laptop click Start Run and type telnet 192 11 13 6 then click OK Login using lucent3 default password is also lucent3 Enter bash at the LAC prompt Enter ftpserv to start the FTP server Minimize the Telnet window Click Start Run and type cmd or command for Windows 95 to open a DOS window Change directory to the storage location of the password license and install script files If these files not in the same directory move them so they are At the DOS prompt enter ftp A 192 11 13 6 This FTP command executes an anonymous login to the correct location for transferring the password and license files Enter bin to sets up the binary transfer type Type set to I displays The installation script is used only if the customer has a maintenance agreement with Avaya If so enter put filename where filename is the name of the installation script s file for example S8100D lH installscript sh to transfer the installation script s file Enter put password bin to transfer the password file from your laptop to the system Enter put licensefile lic to transfer the license file from your laptop to the system Enter bye to close the FTP session Close the DOS window Maximize the Telnet window Enter exit
30. NOTE For Windows NT and Windows 2000 be sure that NETBUI is installed on the Protocols tab under Properties Otherwise the computer will not be recognized by the system This will affect mapping a drive for doing upgrades If you connect to the AVAYA network you may have to disable NETBUI after you are finished working on the system S8100 Installation and Upgrades 313 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Installing INTUITY languages other than English NOTE For Windows NT and Windows 2000 follow the above procedure however the laptop my not ask to be rebooted for settings to take effect as in step 8 above This should be done in any case For Windows 2000 there have been some changes 1 WN 10 314 Right click My Network Places and select Properties This opens the Network and Dial up Connection window Right click the Local Area Connection and select Properties In the Connect Using window select the General tab Click Internet Protocol TCP IP in the lower portion of the window Click Properties which is now selectable If there is an IP address in the next window write it and any other information down These will be needed later NOTE If the following IP address does not have a dot in it click it Change the Address to 192 11 13 5 and the Subnet Mask to 255 255 255 252 NOTE If there is anything in the DNS the system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take e
31. site Back Finish Cancel 2 Within this wizard Type an available letter for a logical drive followed by a colon for example Q b Type the laptop s IP address that is 192 11 13 5 and the shared folder s name for example D or Laptop CD ROM in the following format 192 11 13 5 d or 192 11 13 5 Laptop CD ROM Click Connect using a different user name to access the Connect As dialog Within this dialog type Guest as the user name b guest123 as the password Click OK to close the dialog d Click the Finish button to close the wizard The S8100 can access the laptop s shared folder as shown in the following figure EIS 7 1515 Edit ES Tools lenk Qsearch PyFolders ES GS A Eee _ address ae aA eao vua datal cab datal hdr DefinityOn Instaling bmp MVi 3 526 5 1 D A Setup la ls setup ene a a Modified 1 12 1999 7 42 AM lang dat layout bin os isi README ICO Size 72 0 KB get seem Attributes Read only Readme txt 9 ins Js Type apan JUS oe EM amps 7 356 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check customer s order J Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Primarily to assist hardware additions and maintenance activities this appendix describes procedures for installing and cabling a
32. terminate Called from a bash shell on 58100 to terminate applications versiondiff Compares Windows 2000 executables against version entered at the command line vilog Merges and displays the various log files in the system 3 of 3 LAC commands Table 57 LAC commands Command Description AUDIX Connects to INTUITY AUDIX SAT bash Invokes the bash shell The bash shell has useful commands for administration and installation multivantage Connects to SAT cmd Brings up a DOS prompt exit Exits the bash shell loadlicense Installs the license file loadpwd Sets passwords for Windows 2000 Administrator and Guest logins admin user S8100 Installation and Upgrades 345 April 2004 GAS commands in bash setip command setip command Use the setip command from a LAC bash shell to set certain Windows 2000 specific settings To get to a bash shell 1 Telnet to the 58100 over any interface 2 Login Enter bash at the LAC prompt Once you are in a LAC bash shell you can run setip NOTE Setip settings require a reboot before taking effect Set every necessary parameter before issuing the reboot command Display current settings To display current settings run setip with no parameters Setip allows setting the customer s LAN address along with subnet mask gateway DNS and WINS settings It also allows setting the machine name and the RAS IP addresses Set the machine name in Windows To set the machine name 1 Ina b
33. zl OE H H H HOH HORE E a U E e C 5 in Oooo UUUUU UUUUU UUUUU UOUUU UUUU cadmgrd2 083002 Figure notes 1 6AWG 40 16 mm cabinet ground 4 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to coupled wire bonding conductor CBC 2 Single point ground block 5 6AWG 40 16 mm ground wire from single point ground block to the AC load 3 AC load center s single point ground E center s single point ground 376 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Figure 88 Typical 2 cabinet CMC1 grounding T lt e lt oe g gt C n n s ee E se poel gt gt e
34. 12 Inthe Type of Dial Up Server drop down menu select PPP Windows 2000 95 NT 3 5 Internet 13 Under Allowed network protocols only TCP IP should be checked 14 Click OK when finished 15 Access the system by double clicking the connection icon 16 X On the Connect screen enter the correct User name and Password 17 Click Connect 18 When the connection is established a screen appears Click the Continue box NOTE A login window bay appear saying that the connection was successful S8100 Installation and Upgrades 171 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Logins for the S8100 Logins for the 58100 Avaya personnel logins These are the 8100 logins for Avaya personnel See Enable customer logins on page 187 for further information about logins Logins to enter the Logins to enter Logins to enter INTUITY system Communication Manager AUDIX lucent dinit atsc lucent2 dinads acraft lucent3 dcraft acraft e Each row of logins has the same password For example the lucent1 dinit and atsc logins all have the same password The lucent logins are used for web browser Windows 95 and Windows 2000 Terminal Server access Every login works for Telnet access The d and a logins columns 2 and 3 are used for Avaya Site Administration access Avaya business partner and dealer logins These are the 58100 logins for Avaya business partners and dealers See Enab
35. 39 BK BR TTK4 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 4 14 BR BK RTK4 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 4 40 BK S TLC4 Tip PBX Line Port 4 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones Table 21 Pin assignments for 25 pair connector on 808A 2 of 2 Pin Color Designation Connector Description 15 S BK RLC4 Ring PBX Line Port 4 41 Y BL TST4 Tip Emergency Terminal 4 16 BL Y RST4 Ring Emergency Terminal 4 42 Y O TTCS Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 5 17 O Y 5 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 5 43 Y G TTK5 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 5 18 G Y RTK5 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 5 44 Y BR TLCS Tip PBX Line Port 5 19 BR Y RLC5 Ring PBX Line Port 5 45 Y S TST5 Tip Emergency Terminal 5 20 S Y RST5 Ring Emergency Terminal 5 46 V BL COMI Common 1 Relay Contact 21 BL V NOI Normally Open 1 Contact 47 V O NC2 Normally Closed 2 Contact 22 O V NCI Normally Closed 1 Contact 48 2 Common 2 Relay Contact 23 G V NO2 Normally Open 2 Contact 49 V BR 24 BR V 50 V S GRD Ground From PBX 25 S V 48PX 48V from Alarm Panel AUX Cable 2 of 2 9 Check the system for emergency transfer operation as follows 10 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Place the test switch switch 12 in the ACTIVATED position b Ensure that the power LED is off C Verify there is CO dial
36. C Miscellaneous procedures The following sections provide miscellaneous procedures used in the 58100 installation process Setting the name of the switch on page 309 e Connect to SAT session via Telnet on page 310 Installing INTUITY languages other than English on page 313 Backup and Restore Perform backup on page 316 Backup via the web interface on page 319 From the backup and restore main menu you can on page 321 Perform immediate backup on page 322 View backup progress on page 323 Back up to a LAN address on page 323 View scheduled backups on page 325 Access backup information on page 325 Perform restore on page 327 Enable disable embedded messaging on page 328 e Access Diskeeper software to defragment the disk on page 329 Setting the name of the switch Setting the Windows name To set the machine name in a bash shell type setip name machineName Limit the machine name to 10 characters Setip will allow you to enter more characters however INTUITY AUDIX only displays the first 10 characters of the machine name in its administration window Ex setip name mysite After setting the machine name the setip command displays both the old and new settings Reboot the 8100 Enter reboot nice from a console bash shell S8100 Installation and Upgrades 309 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Connect to SAT session via Telnet Updating INTUITY AUDIX
37. Double click DHCP server From the Startup type drop down menu select Automatic amp WwW If you want to start the server immediately click Start or If you do not want to start the server immediately click OK and close every intermediate window Servers that you selected a Startup Type of Automatic for will turn on every time you reboot the system For information about administering DHCP see Chapter 4 in 4600 Series IP Telephone LAN Administrator 5 Guide 555 233 507 8100 Installation and Upgrades 175 April 2004 System initialization Preliminary tasks TFTP server A TFTP server is needed for downloading firmware to IP phones Customers can use the TFTP server provided with the 58100 system or use TFTP server already on their network Enable the TFTP server To enable the TFTP server on 8100 1 From a Terminal Server session click Start Programs If you receive error messages when starting a Terminal Server session click OK for each error message Double click Administrative Tools Double click Services Double click TFTP server From the Startup type drop down menu select Automatic If you want to start the server immediately click Start or If you do not want to start the server immediately click OK and close every intermediate window Servers that you selected a Startup Type of Automatic for will turn on every time you reboot the system Preliminary tas
38. MS Windows XP ME Processor RAM Pentium 32 MB Pentium 64 MB Pentium 300 MHz 64 MB Pentium 3 600 MHz 256 MB Graphics adapter SVGA with minimum screen resolution of 800 x 600 Diskette drive 3 1 44 MB floppy disk drive CD ROM CD ROM drive required to install Avaya Site Administration from CD Available hard disk space At least 100 MB free hard disk space This requirement depends on the size and number of configuration data sets Printer port Standard PC or network printer port is required for connecting to a printer to produce station button labels Network adapter Required for network access to the Avaya Media Server AUDIX and other network connected systems Free serial ports One free 9600 bps serial port for connecting to each serial device We recommend that PCs have at least a 16550 16550A UART simulator capable of 56 kbps DTE speed connections The USB and internal modems should emulate this hardware A second serial port is required for a simultaneous serial connection to AUDIX 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Configure Avaya Site Administration You can download Avaya Site Administration to your computer from the Avaya Site Administration software CD Place the Avaya Site Administration software CD in the CD ROM drive and follow the installation instructions in the Install Wiz
39. NN oT d ca sca T eO E x 2 gt 5 i i Q he i eef D Ty os ea Ca J Figure notes 1 6AWG 40 16 mm cabinet ground wire 2 6AWG 40 16 mm ground wire to next cabinet 3 Single point ground block d BEBE BRE Sy E E BL E O0 B B 4 AC load center s single point ground 5 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to coupled bonding conductor CBC 6 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire from single point ground block to the AC load center s single point ground 58100 Installation April 2004 and Upgrades 377 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Install coupled bonding conductor The coupled bonding conductor CBC provides mutual inductance coupling between the CBC and the telephone cables exposed to lightning The conductor can be a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire tie wrapped to the exposed cables a metal cable shield around the exposed cables or 6 spare pairs from the exposed cable For a high rise building connect the CBC to an approved building ground on each floor To provide the coupled bonding protection 1 Connect one end of the conductor to a telephone cable building entrance protector ground that is connected to an approved ground 2 Route the conductor next to the exposed t
40. Security is enhanced by providing a logoff notification screen to a system administrator at log off while either the facility test call or remote access features are still administered The administrator can be required to acknowledge the notification before completing the logoff process Logoff notification is administered on the Login Administration screen Super user Avaya delivers the S8100 G600 CMC 1 solution to the customer with 1 customer super user login password defined The customer administers additional login passwords as needed The super user login has full customer permissions and can customize any login created Login permissions for a specified login can be set by the super user to block any object that may compromise switch security Up to 40 administration or maintenance objects commands can be blocked for a specified login ID Administer login command permissions Users with super user permissions can set the permissions of logins they create by performing a change permissions login name command This causes the Login Permissions form to display The Login Permissions form allows the user to control access to various categories of commands for a given login It also permits restricting access to objects forms on an individual basis for up to 40 objects Restricting an object means that no commands may be performed on that object by that login add change remove etc The three main categories of commands are
41. TN2185 B ISDN BRI 4 Wire S T TE Interface Trunk Side Yes TN2199 Central Office Trunk Yes TN2207 DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel and E1 32 Channel Yes TN2224 B Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Yes TN2242 TTC Japanese 2Mbit Trunk Yes TN2302 IP Media Processor Yes TN2305 Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Trunk Yes TN2464 DS1 Interface 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Yes TN2793 B Analog Line 24 Port Yes 3 of 3 102 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Disallowed circuit packs Table 6 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 103 lists the circuit packs that cannot be used with G600 Table 6 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules 1 of 2 Apparatus code Name Allowed 982LS Current Limiter No CFYIB Current Limiter No No ED 1E546 INTUITY AUDIX R3 System No TN566 TN567 ED 1E546 CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAT No TN2208 over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 TN2170 J58890M 1 CallVisor ASAI Call Visor PC LAN over the DEFINITY No TN801 LAN Gateway Release 2 0 TN419B Tone Clock No TN420B C Tone Detector No TN568 INTUITY AUDIX Slim No TN570B C Expansion Interface No TN572 Switch Node Clock No TN573B Switch Node Interface No TN574 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel No TN577 P
42. TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk Yes TN725B Speech Synthesizer Yes TN726B Data Line Yes TN735 Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET Line Yes TN742 Analog Line Yes TN744E Call Classifier Detector Yes TN746B Analog Line Yes TN747 B Central Office Trunk Yes TN750C Announcement Yes TN753 B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN754 B C Digital Line 4 Wire DCP Yes TN758 Pooled Modem Yes TN760B C D E Tie Trunk Yes TN762 B Hybrid Line Yes TN763B C D Auxiliary Trunk Yes TN767B C D E DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel Yes TN769 Analog Line Yes TN771 D Maintenance Test Yes 2 of 3 8100 Installation and Upgrades 101 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Table 5 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules 3 of 3 Apparatus code Name Allowed TN789 Radio Controller Yes TN791 Analog Line Yes TN793 Analog Line 24 Port 2 Wire Yes TN2314 Processor Yes TN799DP Control LAN C LAN Yes TN802 B Internet Protocol IP Trunk Yes TN2135 Analog Line Yes TN2136 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Yes TN2138 Central Office Trunk Yes TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN2140B Tie Trunk Hungary Italy Yes TN2144 Analog Line Yes TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN2147C Central Office Trunk Yes TN2149 Analog Line Yes TN2180 Analog Line Yes TN2181 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Yes TN2183 Analog Line Yes TN2184 DIOD Trunk Yes
43. These commands are grouped into three command categories Each of the three command categories has a group of command subcategories listed under them and each command subcategory has a list of command objects that the commands acts on A super user can set a user s permissions to restrict or block access to any command in these categories These categories are displayed on the Command Permissions Categories form The three main categories are Common commands Display administrative and maintenance data System measurements Administration commands Administer stations Administer trunks Additional restrictions Administer features Administer permissions Maintenance commands Maintain stations Maintain trunks Maintain systems Maintain switch circuit packs Maintain process circuit packs 8100 Installation and Upgrades 307 April 2004 Set up customer logins Communication Manager logins for customers Password expiration If your password has expired the following message displays Login telmgr Password Your Password has expired enter a new one Reenter Current Password New Password Reenter New Password wy If your password is within 7 days of the expiration date the following message displays WARNING Your password will expire in days 308 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Setting the name of the switch
44. When the 3 type protector is already installed a separate sneak current protector is required The multipair protector units and the off premises cabling must be locally engineered Connectorized multipair protector units female 25 pair connector are recommended Table 18 Analog line circuit protectors on page 139 shows the recommended protectors 138 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install off premises station wiring Table 18 Analog line circuit protectors Primary Primary with heat coil Sneak current protectors 3B1A carbon 4B1C carbon 220029 Fuse 3B1E W wide gap gas tube 4B1E W wide gap gas tube SCP 1 3C1S solid state 4CIS solid state 1 The3 type protectors should only be used if they are already part of the existing protection system A sneak current protector is always required when a 3 type primary protector is used An analog out of building 500 2500 or 7100 series telephone connected to an Analog Line circuit pack should be near enough that its maximum loop resistance does not exceed 1300 Ohms The following voice terminals cannot be installed in an exposed environment e 7300 series voice terminals connected to TN762 Hybrid Line circuit packs e Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET sets connected to TN735 MET Line circuit packs Analog telephones connected to TN746 Analog Line circuit packs See Table 3 Comcod
45. and use it for the rest of this procedure 11 Atthe BASH prompt enter ftpserv to start the FTP service 12 Openanother CMD Command window on your laptop For details refer to Step 8 13 Enter ftp A IP Address to open an FTP session with the 58100 14 Atthe ftp prompt transfer the diskcheck file to the S8100 Enter bin to set up a binary transfer b Type mput diskcheck and then type y to execute the transfer 15 When the transfer finishes enter bye to exit the FTP service 16 Access the S8100 s diskcheck utility At your laptop reopen toggle back to the other CMD window Enter cd d lucentpub ftproot b Enter pwd to verify the S8100 s current directory 17 Enter diskcheck to verify whether the hard drive needs to be replaced If so the utility returns a message similar to REPLACE 2 IBM DJSA 220 Once the new drive is acquired continue with Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive on page 31 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 403 April 2004 Identify a hard disk for PCN1413b 404 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Glossary Glossary A AAR See Automatic Alternate Routing AAR on page 405 AC 1 Alternating current 2 See analog Access Security Gateway ASG A feature built into the Lucent Access Control LAC module that authenticates and protects logins to the LAC administer To access and change parameters associated with the services or features of a system analog The
46. cabinet 19 Carefully replace the hard drive on the Processor Note Hard drives are always installed in the top slot of board with the new hard drive the drive bay 20 Re install the Processor board into the platform and power up the system 21 Wait approximately 5 minutes then reconnect to Repeat steps through 5 the S8100 s desktop and open a bash shell 22 BS Verify the software s version Type swversion Ensure that the Release number and MultiVantage version number are as expected 23 SDT On the S8100 s desktop double click the The time display is in the tool tray at the lower right of time display and set the time time zone date the desktop and Daylight Savings 24 SDT Disable modem compression a Click Start Settings gt Control Panel b Double click Phone and Modem Options Click the Modems tab d Select the installed modem and click Properties e Click the Advanced tab f Click Change the Default Preferences g Inthe Compression drop down list select Disabled h Close each dialog by clicking OK and close the Control Panel window 25 SDT Open a bash shell window Click Start Run bash 34 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Step Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Details 26 BS Administer the customer s parameters that you wrote down in Step 15 using the setip command setip name lt args gt setip cust lt
47. n econdary dial Tene n finaleg Ringing Cadence 1 Set Layar 1 timor Ti to 30 seconde n finaleg Line Tranemieeicn 1 64 84xx Display Character Set Roman Houlor Tene Aftor Busy Disconnect on No nsuer by Call n TONE DETECTION PARAKETERS Tene Dotoction Mede 6 Intordigit Pause short Page 1 of 23 The default United States companding mode is Mu Law If the country uses A Law companding proceed to the next step 2 Enter A Law and click Enter NOTE Other items eventually need to be entered on this screen but this is sufficient to turn the red alarm LEDs off The country codes are set as needed according to the following fields 1 Digital Loss Plan 2 Analog Ringing Cadence 3 Analog Line Transmission 4 See Table 26 Country Codes on page 193 Table 26 Country Codes Country Code Country Code USA 1 France 12 Australia 2 Germany 13 Japan 3 Czechoslovakia 14 Italy 4 Russia 15 The Netherlands 5 Argentina 16 Singapore 6 Greece 17 Mexico 7 China 18 Belgium 8 Hong Kong 19 Saudi Arabia 9 Thailand 20 United Kingdom 10 Macedonia 21 Spain 11 Brazil 22 8100 Installation and Upgrades 193 April 2004 System initialization Check system s status Check system s status The system s status may suggest problem areas Refer to Maintenance for Avaya MultiVantage and DEFINITY Server CSI 555 233 119 To access system s status gt Nme
48. respectively of Avaya Inc Every other trademark is the property of its respective owner Security alert and safety labels Observe every caution warning and danger statement to help prevent loss of service equipment damage personal injury and security problems This book uses the following security alert and safety labels AX SECURITY ALERT A security alert calls attention to a situation that can increase the potential for unauthorized use of a telecommunications system 0 CAUTION A caution statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to software loss of data or an interruption in service A WARNING A warning statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to hardware or equipment 66 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 About this book Safety precautions A WARNING An ESD warning calls attention to a situation that can result in ESD damage to electronic components Av DANGER A danger statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to personnel Safety precautions When performing maintenance or translation procedures on the system users must observe certain precautions Observe every caution warning and danger admonishment to prevent loss of service possible equipment damage and possible personal injury In addition the following precautions regarding electromagnetic interference EMI and static electricity must be observed Electromagnetic
49. the account is NOT disabled Click OK 6 Rightclick Guest again and click Set Password In the new password field type Guest 123 In the Confirm password field type Guest 123 again and then click OK Click OK in the confirmation window 7 Close the Computer Management window 8100 Installation and Upgrades 11 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step 5 Telnet to the TN2314 On your laptop 1 Click Start gt Run 2 Inthe Open field type telnet 192 11 13 6 as shown in the following example Figure 2 Run window Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Cancel Browse 3 Click OK 4 A telnet window opens You receive the ASG challenge Login to the 8100 using lucent3 and the ASG challenge response 5 The LAC prompt displays in the telnet window Step 6 Open a SAT window 1 To open a SAT window type mv at the LAC prompt in the telnet window 2 W2KTT for the terminal type and press the Enter key Step 7 Verify the station length 1 Inthe SAT window type List Station 2 Record the station length if it is different than the normal 4 digits Step 8 Verify the emergency number and no license incoming call number 1 Inthe SAT window type display system parameters features 2 Onpage4orS record the emergency numbers and the no license incoming call number as they appear 3 Cancel ou
50. 13 39 14 14 40 15 15 41 16 16 42 17 17 1 of2 8100 Installation and Upgrades 109 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Table 8 Sneak fuse connector pinout2 of 2 Connector Pin Pair Fuse Numbers Number 43 18 18 44 19 19 45 20 20 46 21 21 47 22 22 48 23 23 49 34 24 50 25 25 2 of 2 110 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Set ringing option for G600 Set ringing option for G600 Figure 44 Selection of ringing option evdpring KLC 050801 Figure notes 1 Attachment lever 2 Ringing option switch and setting label NOTE Look at the label on the side of the power supply to see how to set the switch S8100 Installation and Upgrades 111 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Set ringing option for G600 Figure 45 TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate uu f Do Not Remove When In Use Transfer On Auto Off In Use O 9 Maj Alarm Min Alarm Clock Service Access Emergency Complete Shutdown ES Do Not Remove Board Unitl Shutdown Is Complete ckdf2314 LJK 090501 Figure notes 1 PCMCIA slots 5 PCMCIA in use LED 2 RedLED 6 Emergency Transfer switch 3 Green LED 7 Shutdown comple
51. 39 5 TXR 2 amp 2 3 14 TXR5 PXT lt lt lt _____ gt 40 PXT5 PXR 6 gt gt 15 PXR5 74 8 lt lt 302cwire RPY 012098 Figure notes 1 302Cl attendant console 3 48 VDC from adjunct power 2 4 wire Digital Line circuit pack 4 Ground from adjunct power Connect adjunct power The400B2 adapter is convenient for connecting local 48 VDC power to a modular plug See Figure 47 400B2 adapter connecting to a modular plug on page 114 Figure 47 400B2 adapter connecting to a modular plug 1749428 RPY 012098 Figure notes 1 Surface mounted information outlet 4 Totelephone 2 Toindividual power unit such as 5 Destination service access 1151B or 1151B2 point DS AP power cord 3 400B2 adapter Adjunct power can be provided from the equipment room or equipment closet with 1145B power unit The AUX connector J1 on the Processor Interface cable can provide power for 1 attendant console Adjunct power can be provided locally at the telephone or console by the 1151B or 1151B2 power supply S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Station wiring examples This section shows the wiring connections for the various types of stations See Figure 48 Typical station wiring connections on page 115 Table 9 Wiring color code on page 116 and Table 10 S
52. Add Bridged Appearance e Add User Remove User Change User Browse Unused Ports Browse Dial Ranges Browse Stations Find Unused Extensions Print Button Labels Create New Template e Use a template Generate Call Accounting Data Export Data Import Data Monitor Trunks Find and Replace e Graphically Enhanced DEFINITY Interface a graphically enhanced command line interface GEDI provides a Windows style interface to traditional SAT screens with features such as point and click selection and drop down boxes listing available field values Terminal emulation that provides an interface with the same look and functionality as a traditional SAT S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration overview e Verify change INTUITY AUDIX administration setup Net User Password Net User Activate Web Browser Verify dial plan and extension length Verify node number if networking A Windows application that communicates directly with Communication Manager and the INTUITY AUDIX system via a connection through LAN TCP IP Technicians connect to the 58100 using a PCMCIA cable to the TN2314 Analog modem Dial in through RMATS port Direct serial connection RS232 cable Asynchronous Data Unit ADU and so on Avaya Site Administration version 1 5 contains additional features Fault and Performance Management Features Trunk Analyze
53. B Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Category B only No TN2215 Analog Line 16 Port 2 Wire Category B only No TN2238 ATM Trunk Interface multimode No TN2301 Survivable Remote Logic Switch No TN2306 ATM Interface single mode No TN2308 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk No 2 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Circuit pack installation A WARNING When handling circuit packs or any components of a CMC1 always wear an authorized wrist ground strap Connect the strap to the ground connector provided on the system s cabinet Circuit pack slot loading Every circuit pack slot in the CMC1 is a universal slot Any slot can contain any type of port circuit pack with the following exceptions for Cabinet A 1 Install the TN2314 Processor circuit pack in slot 2 See Figure 95 CMC1 cabinet and slot numbering on page 392 2 Install the required TN744E Call Classifier Tone Detector circuit pack in slot 3 Load a port circuit pack in every other slot See Table 63 Circuit pack installation order loading on page 392 for the recommended circuit pack layout S8100 Installation and Upgrades 391 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Figure 95 CMC1 cabinet and slot numbering
54. C LAN circuit pack up to 8 N S8100 Installation and Upgrades 245 April 2004 Hardware additions Add C LAN functionality 246 Type change ip interfaces and press Enter a ESAE cue ip interfaces Page 1 6 IP INTERFACES Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Address Rgn C LAN 01A09 TN799 clan al 255 255 255 0 192 158 10 21 1 C LAN 01B03 TN799 10 255 255 255 0 135 9 1671701 255 255 255 2092003200 2555255942557 255 255 255 259320 95 25 0 25972553255 25542554255 25572597255 25595 2595 295 25572557255 2553259 250 e o o e o e o 5 O O O0 o0 000 Occ dO NOTE Do not change the Enabled field to y until all of the information in the row is completed Fill in a row for each TN799DP circuit pack installed Use the same node name assigned on the Node Names screen You can press Help in the Node Name field to display every valid node name Use the gateway address for the router connected to the hub not the hub Type y in the Enabled field for each completed row Type change IP services and press Enter Do not change the Enabled field to y until all of the information in the row is completed Fill in the following fields e Service Type xxx e Local Node slot location of the TN799DP Local Port any open port generally 9001 or higher Remote Node a specific PC node
55. CMC1 cabinet to physically connect and access 8100 Media Server with Media Gateways NOTE A CMC is a wall or table mounted cabinet whereas G600 is a 19 rack mounted cabinet For information about installing a G600 cabinet see Chapter 1 Install and cable a G600 cabinet NOTE The physical installation of a CMCI cabinet is similar to a ProLogix cabinet The cabling is also similar except for the Processor Interface cable multileg cable Do not access applications such as Communication Manager until installation and cabling of the cabinet are finished Your configuration can consist of an 58100 Media Server with 1 2 or 3 CMCI Media Gateways This appendix is organized as follows Check customer s order on page 357 Correct shipping errors on page 358 Unpack and inspect on page 358 Install an 58100 with a CMC1 system cabinet on page 362 Check AC power and ground for CMC1 on page 371 Cable CMC1 system on page 381 Install CMC1 main distribution frame MDF and external modem on page 384 Install equipment room hardware for on page 386 Set ringing option for on page 399 NOTE After installing and cabling an 8100 with a CMC1 see Section II Install telephones and make auxiliary connections on page 113 of Chapter 1 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check customer s order 1 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to
56. Common commands Administration commands Optional maintenance commands 306 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Set up customer logins Communication Manager logins for customers Each category of commands has sub categories that when set to y allow access to objects associated with that sub category If the category is set to n the user is not be able to add remove or change commands on objects under that sub category If the display category is y the login will list or display the object in most cases If the super user wants to restrict access to every command associated with an individual object in a subcategory the Additional Restrictions field is set to y This causes 2 additional pages to be added to the permissions form Scroll these pages and press Help Individual objects will be displayed in alphabetical order Enter the object that you want to restrict access to into the fields and submit the form Up to 40 objects may be restricted A restricted login cannot access any of the commands associated with that login Note that permissions cannot be changed for the login and you cannot create Additional Restrictions without full super user permissions Communication Manager commands for user login Communication Manager commands refer to the set of commands that execute under Communication Manager running on the 58100 Media Server and which can be accessed through a SAT session or the Avaya Site Administration application
57. D8W cords Wire the 104 block with the white orange pair transposed with white green pair between the jacks The 3Com 3CXFES575BT NIC needed to access TN2314 is always to be left on site in the correct slot If everything is connected properly and the laptop is up and running there will be a green LED lit on the NIC plugged into the TN2314 If there is no LED recheck the connections Verify the CD can be read by the laptop s CD ROM Laptop configuration for Windows 95 98 NT 1 Right click Network Neighborhood and select Properties 2 Underthe Configuration tab click TCP IP Ethernet NIC NOTE The services laptop uses a Zircom card 3 Click Properties 4 Select the IP Address tab 5 Record the IP Address and Subnet Mask if any These will be needed later 6 Change the IP Address to 192 11 13 5 and the Subnet Mask to 255 255 255 252 then click OK 7 Click OK in the Network window 8 When the system says to click OK for the settings to take effect do so 9 Click Start Settings and select Control Panel 10 Double click Display 11 Select the Screen Saver tab and set the screen saver to None until the upgrade finishes v CAUTION If the laptop s screen saver is not disabled and times out during the upgrade the Terminal Server session will drop The technician will have to wait approximately 5 minutes to re establish the connection The upgrade will continue without any ill effects even though the session has dropped
58. Log into the system Enter status system all cabinets Press Enter Verify that the screen displays the service state of in for every appropriate area Set up your system You are now ready to follow procedures to start your system including Setting up dial plans feature access codes FACs and extension ranges Adding extensions for users Setting up special features Setting up routing Assigning and changing users See Configure Avaya Site Administration on page 7 10 to set up Avaya Site Administration For more information see Avaya Communication Manager Little Instruction Book for Basic Administration 555 233 756 Avaya Communication Manager Little Instruction Book for Advanced Administration 555 233 757 Avaya Communication Manager Little Instruction Book for Basic Diagnostics 555 233 758 Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Set country options 194 Some country options need to be set to turn off the red alarm LEDs 1 At the SAT or DSA window type change system parameters country options and press Enter A screen similar to the following illustration displays on the terminal The cursor is set on the Companding Mode field NOTE Be sure that there are no active AUDIX calls when you change the companding mode If there are active AUDIX calls those calls will suddenly have a very loud audio stream The best way to ensure that there are no active AUDIX calls is to busy
59. Management Share CDR data The following steps are for sharing the CDR data This is set up via Terminal Server TM or the PC console to access the system desktop 1 NA C Right click the My Computer icon on the desktop Select Explore Click the in front of the D drive Click the in front of LucentData Right click the CDR folder and select Sharing Click Shared As leave the share name as cdr Click OK Map a shared CDR directory At the call accounting client s platform 1 Using Windows Explorer access Tools Map Network Drive and note the next available drive letter listed under drive 2 Enterthe machine name of the S8100 server platform and the shared CDR directory in the following example format NDEFONEXCDR then click OK 3 Enter User name and Password click OK 4 the left pane of the Explorer window to verify that a mapped entry such as CDR on Def is visible 5 Click that entry to check for cas in files if the S8100 is processing calls NOTE Any problems mapping this drive or accessing the shared CDR directory after mapping indicates a network connectivity or administration problem and must be resolved before proceeding S8100 Installation and Upgrades 197 April 2004 System initialization Setup call detail recording CDR Set call collection interface 1 Access the call accounting main menu and select Configuration Call Collection Interface 2 Select the Colle
60. Network dialog displays Click the Configuration tab Click the File and Print Sharing button and select the I want to be able to give others access to my files box Choose Client for Microsoft Networks from the Primary Network Logon list Click the Identification tab and enter the computer name and workgroup Click the Access Control tab and check the appropriate boxes so that this dialog matches its earlier settings Click the Configuration tab e Ifa dialog appears notifying you that the security provider could not be found click Yes Ifthe Authenticator type dialog appears select Windows 2000 Domain and click OK Double click the modified component in the Network Components list This should be the TCP IP Xircom CreditCard Ethernet Adapter 10 100 The TCP IP Properties dialog displays Enter the original IP address and subnet mask Click the DNS Configuration tab to enable DNS Enter the appropriate information Click the WINS Configuration tab to enable WINS Enter the appropriate information Click the Gateway tab if a gateway was used and enter the appropriate information Click OK to close the TCP IP dialog Click Yes to restart your computer When rebooted the laptop returns to its original settings S8100 Installation and Upgrades 159 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections Configure the laptop laptop running WINDOWS 2000 Set up the network PCMCIA interface to commun
61. PORT 1 E amp M EaM E amp M 1758183 RBP 050896 Table 38 TN760E option switch settings and administration Installation situation dun E EM PLX Prot Unprot Administered Circumstance To System Far end switch switch port Collocated Communication E amp M E amp M E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Manager Type 1 Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Inter Building Communication Protected Protected E amp M Protected Type 1 Manager Type 1 Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Plus Protection Unit Collocated Net Integrated E amp M Any PBX E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Type 1 Standard 282 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Cable pinouts Set TN464GP T1 E1 s options Set TN464GP T1 E1 s options The TN464GP DS1 E1 interface T1 E1 circuit pack interfaces between a 24 or 32 channel Central Office ISDN or tie trunk and the TDM bus Set the switches on the circuit pack to select bit rate and impedance match See Table 39 Option switch settings on TN464GP on page 283 and Figure 74 Option settings on TN464GP on page 283 If the top switch setting is set to 32 Channel set the lower switch setting to either 120 Ohm or 75 Ohm Table 39 Option switch settings on TN464GP 120 Ohms Twisted pair 75 Ohms Coaxial requiring 888B adapter 32 Channel 2 048 Mbps 24 Channel 1 544 Mbps Figure 74 Option settings on TN464GP Figure notes
62. RELAY PWR terminals Install the emergency transfer panel To install an 808A emergency transfer panel 1 Install the transfer panel on any mounting frame in either a vertical or horizontal position The housing has ears for screw mounting and cutouts for snap mounting the unit in an 89 type mounting bracket NOTE Install the panel so it can be accessed only by authorized personnel The location must meet standard environmental considerations such as temperature and humidity 2 Verify that dial tone is present at each trunk circuit S8100 Installation and Upgrades 141 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones 142 Figure 65 808A emergency transfer panel Figure notes 1 808A emergency transfer panel 2 Circuit start selection switches EMERGENCY TRANSFER PANEL TRUNK TEST SWITCHES CIRCUIT TRUNK OPTION BOTH SWITCHES MUST BE THROWN TO ACTIVATE 4 TRUNK OPTION TRANSFER TEST SWITCH NORMAL ACTIVATED OPERATION lt _ TRUNK IDENTIFICATION TRUNK LOC led808a LJK 040896 3 Trunk identification label 4 25 pair male connector S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones Locate the circuit start selection switches the 1 10 2 pos
63. RFA web site s authentication login 2 SAP order number with RTUs 3 System ID 4 Module ID 5 Serial number of the TN2314 processor 6 Switch telephone number or IP address 7 Access to the RFA Information page for these items if not already installed on your PC S8100 Installation and Upgrades 179 April 2004 System initialization Obtain the installation script file 8 Adobe Acrobat Reader application installed on your PC to read FET documentation 9 Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher installed on your laptop PC 10 Intranet access to your designated RFA portal See the following URL list Go to the RFA web site The Remote Feature Activation RFA web site automates some of the installation procedures including generating license and password files 1 Atyourlaptop PC browser go to the RFA web site http www avaya com services rfa 2 Using your SSO log into the RFA web site 3 Follow the links to the RFA Information page 4 Complete the information necessary to create and deliver license and password files Obtain the installation script file NOTE An installation script is needed only if the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya You can download an installation script from the Automatic Registration tool s ART s web site Direct channels For a direct channel inside or outside the US go to http spiexpl eng avaya com 8000 cgi bin ART ARTSstart cgi and follow these steps NOTE If you do n
64. Restore to open the main backup menu The following page displays s Immediate Backup Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Home Protect Your Valuable Translations Administer Avaya recommends that you read and understand the following before using the System Backup program User Services Schedule your translation backups to more than one destination A different destination for each day of the week is ideal For example create one schedule to backup your translations to PCMCIA disk and another schedule to backup to a remote hard disk drive Download Software Backup a complete set of translations onto a separate PCMCIA disk Store this disk in a safe place 8100 Installation and Upgrades 219 April 2004 System initialization Schedule backups 220 2 Click Scheduled Backups The following page displays Home Administer System User Services Download Software a o T z Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Current list of scheduled backup jobs Data Set Destination Days Time MultiVantage translation files pcmcia Su M T W Th F S 300 X C amp dd new schedule 4 edt X delete This feature is currently enabled B enable BI disable AVAYA E From this page you add edit or delete scheduled backups On the C
65. Robotics external modem is the recommended external modem CMC1 systems operate with this modem set to factory default settings NOTE You may use a locally obtained type approved external modem 33 6 kbps or higher and V 34 protocol Contact your Avaya representative for more information A WARNING If you use a modem other than the US Robotics modem it must be configured in Windows 1 Use the hardware provided with the modem See Figure 94 Typical bottom mounted MDF and modem cable routing on page 385 If top mounting MDFs mount the external modem to the plywood in a location which allows the standard connection to the modem cable 2 Routethe modem cable P2 from the Processor Interface cable through the cable trough and to the modem S8100 Installation and Upgrades 385 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Connectthe cable to the modem See Appendix A Cable pinouts for the pinout of the modem cable 4 Plug the modem power cord into an electrical outlet and turn on the modem Modem s configuration and administration on page 276 describes information about modem setup administration settings and testing Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 for more information Cross connect the cabinet to the MDF 1 Cross connect the port circuit
66. S8100 server via the web Open Internet Explorer on the laptop and enter interface 192 11 13 6 in the URL address bar to connect to the processor 5 LT IE Open the S8100 s desktop Click Administer System and log in using Note Terminal server client and terminal lucent3 S Mm i and A domain is services Active X must be installed on the i et licenses laptop The easiest way to do this is to upgrade your Windows 95 laptop s browser to Internet b Select Login to 192 under Remote Control Explorer 5 5 Terminal Services Ifa VBScript error message appears click OK Click the Connect button leave the Server field blank e VBScript message appears click OK you can resize the Terminal Services screen to full size by pressing ctlr alt Pause A log in window will open f Login using lucent3 After logging in the S8100 s Windows 2000 desktop is displayed 6 SDT Open a bash shell window Click Start Run bash 7 BS Open a LAC window Execute telnet 127 1 and log in using lucent3 32 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Step Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Details 8 LAC Open a SAT window and execute save translations Type multivantage to open a SAT window The terminal type is W2KTT 9 LAC Return to the bash window a Type logoff to log out of the SAT window
67. TN767B TN746 B TN2793 connect TN769 TN754 TN760D TN763B TN464GP TN2183 TN2224 B pin TN2147 TN726 TN2209 TN762 B TN763C TN735 TN2207 TN2215 TN2214 1 TA TA Tl TA 5 T 1 TA 2 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 R 1 3 TXT 1 T1 1 TXT 1 SZ 1 BT 1 C_ENAB T 2 T 2 4 TXR 1 R1 1 TXR 1 SZ1 1 BR 1 R 2 R 2 5 PXT 1 E 1 PXT 1 S 1 LT 1 C_SYNC T 3 T 3 6 PXR 1 M 1 PXR 1 51 1 LR 1 R 3 R 3 7 T 2 T 2 T T2 T2 C2D DATA T 4 4 8 R 2 R 2 R 2 R 2 R 2 RDATA R4 R 4 9 TXT 2 T1 2 TXT 2 SZ 2 BT 2 TDATA T 5 10 TXR 2 R1 2 TXR 2 SZ1 2 BR 2 TRSYSNC R 5 11 PXT 2 E 2 PXT 2 5 2 LU GRD T 6 12 PXR 2 M 2 PXR 2 1 2 LR 2 SCLK R 6 13 T3 T 3 T 3 T 3 T 3 T 7 14 R 3 R 3 R 3 R 3 R 3 R 7 15 TXT 3 T1 3 TXT 3 SZ3 BT 3 T 8 1of3 288 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Table 42 Lead designations for port circuit packs 2 of 3 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts TN742 B TN747B TN760 B TN793 Cross TN753 TN760C TN763 TN767B TN746 B TN2793 connect TN769 TN754 TN760D TN763B TN464GP 2183 2224 2147 726 TN2209 TN762 B TN763C TN735 TN2207 TN2215 TN2214 16 TXR 3 R1 3 TXR 3 SZ1 3 BR 3 PAHER R 8 17 PXT 3 E 3 PXT 3 S 3 LES T 5 T 9 18 PXR 3 M 3 PXR 3 1 3 LR 3 C_48V R 5 R 9 19 T 4 4 4 4 4 T 6 T 10 20 R4 R4 R4 R4 R4 R 6 R 10 21 TXT 4 T1 4 TXT 4 SZA 4 C_P2SCLK T 7 T 11 22 TXR 4 R1 4 TXR 4 SZ1 4 BR 4 LI RX R 7 R 11 23 PX
68. The prefix is required only when one or more of the remote users share the same extension numbers as the local users the extension ranges of the two systems overlap If there are no overlapping extension numbers a prefix is not needed Public network access code When addressing a message to a remote user the local user enters the remote user s number as if placing a call to that user Location code This method simplifies addressing messages by requiring only an alphanumeric code in front of the extension number Location codes are shorter and often easier to remember 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information Table 32 Field definitions remote machine profile screen page 1 2 of 2 Field Valid input Description Start Ext A 3 to10 digit string Enter the starting extensions for the ranges of telephone numbers used on the local system Designate a block of switch extensions that can be used at the local system when assigning users For example if your system uses extensions between 2000 and 3000 enter 2000 in the Start Ext field Up to 10 different ranges can be specified to pinpoint the exact set of extension blocks used by the local system The length of the start and end extension must agree with the Extension Length field For a 5 digit extension the default is 00000 to 99999 End Ext A 3 t
69. This chapter is organized as follows Replace a TN795 Processor circuit pack on page 239 Replace the TN2314 Processor circuit pack on page 240 Replace the hard disk on page 240 Download firmware to port circuit packs on page 241 Replace a TN795 Processor circuit pack This section shows the basic steps to follow when replacing a TN795 circuit pack with a TN2314 circuit pack The TN2314 replaced the TN795 with release 10 These steps assume the technician will connect a laptop directly to the Service Access jack on the faceplate of the TN2314 Inventory existing features on the pre R10 switch and obtain a license file If the valid license file does not already exist on the system or your laptop the license file must be obtained using Remote Feature Activation RFA If you are an approved RFA user you can obtain and install the license file To become an approved RFA user you must attend RFA training Before obtaining a new license file you must inventory the existing features and capacities of the TN795 using the Feature Extraction tool FET The FET must be downloaded to your PC by going to one of the Remote Feature Activation RFA web sites indicated in Go to the RFA web site on page 180 FET will provide you with an encrypted switch configuration file that must be used on the RFA web site to create a license file See License file password file and installation script overview on page 178 for information
70. Upgrades April 2004 Index Index Symbols Symbols Law companding 195 Numerics 120A2 integrated channel service unit 119 25 pair cable pinout 143 26B1 selector console 123 3 and 4 pair modularity 119 302C1 attendant consoles 113 367A adapter 134 A AC load center 86 371 power checking 86 371 ground wiring 89 374 supply 86 371 voltage test 86 371 access methods 165 Telnet session 166 Web browser 167 adapter BR851 B 133 adding circuit packs 243 257 C LAN functionality 244 CO trunk 250 code calling access 253 DID trunk 250 051 service interruption 252 FX trunk 250 ISDN PRI 256 PCOL trunk 250 remote machines 230 speech synthesis 253 switch configuration 267 tie trunk 251 TN2464BP 248 TN464GP 248 translations 195 voice mail item 268 WATS trunk 250 address setting RAS IP 347 adjunct power connection 120 providing 114 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 administering AUDIX 208 customer s LAN parameters 177 DEFINITY for AUDIX initialization 199 digital networking 221 modem 276 no license emergency number 185 8100 188 SNMP 213 telephone features 196 alarm checking 186 connections 127 input 127 origination disable procedure 276 output 127 relay contact 127 resolve 187 alarmstat bash command 187 A Law companding 195 announcements CWY1 254 moving 254 multiple integrated recorded announcements 253 TN750C cir
71. a TN2314 239 resets reset system 3 334 reset system 5 334 RFA overview 178 ringing preventing ring ping 150 setting ringing option 111 399 routing power cords 92 378 415 S 8100 accessing 165 connectivity and access 153 installation 72 shutdown restart 331 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 safety precautions 66 SAT session connecting via Telnet 310 scheduling backups 219 Diskeeper defragmentation 329 security measurements forced password aging 306 logoff notification 306 selector consoles 26B1 123 setip bash command 166 178 309 346 347 348 setting bit rate 283 carrier address ID 79 362 country specific call progress tones 190 date and time 188 line impedance 283 RAS IP address 347 ringing option 111 399 switch name 309 settings displaying current settings 346 LAN DNS WINS 347 shipping errors correcting 73 358 shutdown bash command 332 signaling leads DC power 281 single point ground block 89 374 grounds 89 374 site requirements 72 slot loading of circuit packs 105 391 slot numbering 105 392 sneak current fuse panels 108 395 fuses 109 396 protection 108 395 sneak fuse connector pinout 109 396 SNMP administering 213 community string configuration 216 disable 192 enable 192 starting and stopping 217 trap destination configuration 214 software copy protection mechanisms 279 recovery 333 serial number serialnumber
72. a result must be reactivated The SAT display and circuit pack LEDs indicate the progress of the recovery process S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 333 Recovery Communication Manager software reset recovery Reset System 1 Communication Manager warm start This recovery takes about 60 seconds All software is reset e Every stable phone call remains up e In progress calls are dropped e No new calls can be made during this time Reset System 2 Communication Manager cold start The following are reset e software e TDM bus Every port circuit pack Every telephone session is dropped Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 60 seconds Reset System 3 Communication Manager reboot This is the same as the following Reset System 4 This command is retained for consistency with other Avaya products Reset System 4 Communication Manager reboot Emergency Transfer is invoked in this reset e System processes are reloaded from hard disk into memory Every port circuit pack is reset Every telephone session is dropped Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 60 seconds Reset System 5 system reboot This is the same as Reset System 4 see above 334 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor LED boot sequence E LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor This chapter provides information about the LED boot sequenc
73. about obtaining and installing license files NOTE With Release 10 and later the init lucent1 login no longer has the capability to change the customer options offer option or special applications forms S8100 Installation and Upgrades 239 April 2004 Upgrade and repair procedures Replace the TN2314 Processor circuit pack Replacing a TN795 with a TN2314 NOTE If you have any additional login accounts and passwords or software that is not Communication Manager loaded on the system you will have to reconstruct or reload this information on the new TN2314 or it will be lost Write down any information you need from the old system that will enable you to add it to the new system Follow the steps in the Job Aid Replacing an 8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 on page 38 to replace the TN795 with the TN2314 Processor circuit pack Replace the TN2314 Processor circuit pack This section outlines the procedures to replace an existing TN2314 Processor circuit pack NOTE If the TN2314 circuit pack is replaced for repair a new license file must be obtained and installed Communication Manager INTUITY AUDIX and SNMP will not start if the license file does not match the new TN2314 s serial number Ensure that the new circuit pack has solved the problem before you access RFA to update the license file See License file password file and installation script overview on page 178 and subsequent sections for
74. and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Table 28 Initial administration tasks 2 of 2 View the Feature Options window Task Description Screens windows or commands Set automatic deletion of nonadministered remote users See Reset automatic deletion of nonadministered remote users on page 237 Sets the system to delete nonadministered remote users automatically System Parameters Features screen View remote extensions See View remote extensions on page 238 Check that remote users were added to the local database List Remote Extensions screen Record remote machine names Record the names of remote systems so that local users hear voiced confirmations when addressing messages to users on those remote systems Use the telephone to perform this task 2 of 2 View the Feature Options window View the Feature Options window to see the purchased options for digital networking This window is display only and can be changed only by Avaya certified personnel To display the Feature Options window 1 Start at the AUDIX Command Prompt screen which displays as follows enter command S8100 Installation and Upgrades 223 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change number of administered remote users 2 Atthe enter command prompt enter list configuration The List Configuration screen displays hessuille Active Alarms Login
75. are required Sneak CS A certified or must comply with local safety standards S8100 Installation and Upgrades 394 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Sneak current protectors must have a maximum rating of 350 mA and a minimum voltage rating of 600V or as required by local regulations The following devices protect the system from over voltages Analog trunks use the 507B sneak protector or equivalent Over voltage protection is normally provided by the local telephone company Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over voltage and sneak current protection or equivalent Carbon block with heat coil for UL code 4B1C Gas tube with heat coil for UL code 4B1E W Solid state with heat coil for UL code 4C1S e DCP and ISDN BRI terminals use the solid state 4C3S 75 with heat coil protector or equivalent e DSI TI circuits require isolation from exposed facilities This isolation may be provided by a channel service unit CSU T1 or other equipment that provides equivalent protection Install sneak fuse panels Sneak current protection is required between the incoming RJ21X or RJ2GX network interface and the system for both trunk and off premises circuit packs The model 507B sneak current fuse panel or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection See Figure 97 Model 507B sneak fuse panel on page 395 Figure 97 Mod
76. args gt setip dns lt args gt setip winsz args setip ras lt args gt Replace each lt args gt with the corresponding parameter you recorded in Step 15 27 BS Administer the product ID and OSS parameters using the productid and oss commands productid multivantage product id lt arg gt productid audix product id lt arg gt oss lt telno gt lt retries gt retry interval Replace each lt arg gt with the corresponding parameter you recorded from Step 15 For the OSS command enter the lt telno gt lt retries gt and lt retry_interval gt parameters separated by spaces do not enter commas 28 BS Telnet into the LAC window from the bash Execute telnet 127 1 and log in using lucent3 29 LAC Install the new license and password file from the LAC window using the lucent3 login ID For details see Chapter 3 in Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya 88100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and the Avaya Media Gateways 555 233 146 30 LAC Exit the LAC window and bash shell and close the telnet window b Type exit to close the bash window 31 SDT Open Internet Explorer on the S8100 s a Double click the IE icon on the S8100 s desktop desktop and log in b Click Administer System Login using lucent3 d Click Continue on the Notice page 32 SDT IE Restore the translations and other Click Administer System
77. bank on the 8 port patch panel NOTE The patch panels do not have to be mounted in the same rack as the cabinet They can be mounted in phone closets as appropriate S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install G600 patch panels and external modem Figure 40 Typical G600 s patch panel and modem installation OO0000000 LILILICILILILILIL ILI 000000000 00000000000 0000000000 000000000 0005000000 OO0000000000 Q00000000000 OO0000000000 OOOO000000 0000000 00000000000 00000000000 O00000000000 OO0000000000 OO0000000000 QOOO00000000 QOOO00000000 OOOOUU000000 OOOOO00000 0000000 0000000 00000000 000000000 QOOOOO000000 QOOOO00000000 OOOOOOD00000 OODO00000000 OOOO00000000 O00000000000 O00000000000 OO00000000 0000000 oo gQ ooooooo0oo0o0ooooooooooooooooo L L w 1 cadppat LJK 102700 B Figure notes 1 Circuit packs amphenol connectors 4 P2termination of Processor Interface cable and B25A cables attached to modem 2 Processor Interface cable 5 24 port patch panels External modem purchased separately 8 port patch panel Install the external modem The US Robotics external modem is the recommended external modem G600 systems operate with this modem set to fact
78. be terminated on the following pairs 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 or 22 the 1 pair of any 3 pair group 5 Connect the ST leads from the terminal in Step 4 to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field 8100 Installation and Upgrades 147 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Connect modem to telephone network Trunk auxiliary field telephone used for emergency transfer and as normal extension 1 Connect a pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block to the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal 2 Connect CO trunk leads from the purple field to the TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to the TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk 4 Connect telephone leads from the purple analog line board row connecting block to the LC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each telephone 5 Connect ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the ST terminal appearance in the purple trunk auxiliary field 6 Connect the ST leads from the terminal in Step 5 to the assigned terminal in the blue or white station distribution field Telephone installation 1 Connect the telephone to the information outlet 2 Install patch cords jumper wires between the
79. cabinets 1 Mountthe ground block as shown in Figure 86 Ground block installation to right CMC1 panel on page 375 374 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Figure 86 Ground block installation to right CMC1 panel S Q 9 5s o T bs ei d p 2 eL J 9 CN m indmingb KLC 083002 Figure notes 1 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws 2 Single point ground block Connect the cable as shown in Figure 87 Typical single cabinet CMC1 grounding on page 376 for a single cabinet or Figure 88 Typical 2 cabinet CMC1 grounding on page 377 for a 2 cabinet CMC1 Grounding 3 cabinet configuration is similar to grounding the 2 cabinet configuration 375 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Figure 87 Typical single cabinet CMC1 grounding Oooo 900000000
80. cabinets cabling 71 357 cross connecting to MDF 386 cross connecting to MDF 100 floor mounting 364 installing 71 357 366 numbering 105 392 plywood backing installing 365 power switches 88 single cabinet installation 365 two horizontally mounted cabinets 365 two vertically mounted cabinets 365 wall mounting 364 416 cables 25 pair pinout 143 diagrams 113 284 292 295 to 297 pinouts 281 cabling the cabinet 71 357 call accounting 199 call detail recording CDR mapping shared directory 197 setting call collection interface 198 setting up 196 sharing data 197 verifying call record collection 198 call progress tones setting up country specific 190 carrier address ID setting 79 362 CD ROM mapping 58100 to laptop s CD ROM 158 sharing laptop s CD ROM drive 158 change INTUITY AUDIX commands change machine 226 change system parameter limits 224 changing system parameters country options 194 channel service units CSUs 119 checking AC power 86 371 alarms 186 customer s order 73 357 system s status 187 194 circuit modules 100 disallowed 103 389 circuit packs 100 386 adding 243 257 allowed 100 for CMC1 386 for G600 100 disallowed 103 389 for CMC1 389 for G600 103 downloading firmware 241 installation 105 391 LEDs 339 pin designations 295 to 297 slot loading 105 391 status LEDs 340 TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 wire S Interface 291 TN2224 Digital Line 288 294 TN
81. ccc 3 CALLING PERMISSION Enter to grant permission to call specified COR 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 of acc ac c ac c cc ccc 7 Ensure that every field is set to y so there are no restrictions NOTE Pay attention to toll fraud issues 8 Press F1 to cancel the command Change the dial plan To change the dial plan 1 change dialplan analysis The Dial Plan Analysis Table screen displays f hanes dialplan analysis DIAL PLAN ANALYSIS TABLE Dialed Total Call Dialed Total Call String Length Type String Length Type 0 1 attd 3 4 ext 4 4 ext 5 6 ext 7 3 dac 8 1 fac 3 fac Page Dialed Total String Length Type 1 of 11 Percent Full 20 Ju 202 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization 2 For example to define 3000 3999 as an extension range type 3inthe Dialed String column b inthe same row type 4 in the Total Length column type extinthe Call column For example to specify that the range 700 799 is to be used for dial access codes a type 7inthe Dialed String column b inthe same row type in the Total Length column type dac in the Call Type column 4 Submit the form to save your changes Add AUDIX ports Stations are added by entering a change machine command with the starting
82. confirm that all equipment is included 2 Report missing equipment to an Avaya representative Check the system adjuncts and report any damage according to local shipping instructions S8100 Installation and Upgrades 357 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Correct shipping errors Correct shipping errors 1 Red tag any defective or over shipped equipment and return it according to instructions from National Parts 2 Direct any short shipped reports to National Parts Contact the appropriate location for specific instructions For a streamlined implementation call 1 800 772 5409 Unpack and inspect Ay DANGER Use lifting precautions A fully loaded CMC1 weighs 58 Ibs 26 3 kg If the doors power unit and circuit packs are removed the CMC1 unit weighs only 29 Ibs 13 1 kg 1 Verify the equipment received See Figure 77 Equipment packed with a single on page 359 Actual equipment may vary in appearance and may ship in separate packages Equipment comcodes are listed in Table 59 Comcodes for equipment used with CMC1 on page 360 2 Before mounting the cabinet remove the CMC1 cabinet s doors by opening and then lifting them straight up and off the hinge pins 358 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Unpack and inspect Figure 77 Equipment packed with a single CMC1 22 Be gh T d 0
83. determine the serial number If not the system s software may need to be updated before proceeding further Determine the serial number 1 From the BASH prompt type serialnumber and press Enter The serial number is read and displayed Ensure that the serial number matches the label on the front of the circuit pack If it does not match use the serial number you obtained from step 1 NOTE The serial number obtained in step 1 is the firmware embedded number and must be used NOTE The license file must contain a serial number that matches the serial number on your processor board If it does not you must obtain and install an new license file For instructions on how to do this go to http www avaya com services rfa Set up customer s LAN parameters This procedure administers the following customer provided parameters Computer Name Machine Name IP address subnet mask and default gateway for the LAN connection via the Ethernet jack on the Processor Interface cable Splitter Cable DNS IP addresses WINS IP address Vv CAUTION The 58100 is preconfigured to be a member of a local Workgroup and should not be made a member of a customer s Windows domain If this is done connectivity with Avaya Services will not operate correctly because user account authentication will no longer be done by the S8100 To check for proper workgroup membership on the S8100 Windows desktop right click the My Computer icon th
84. e Individual 1151B or 1151B2 power supply e MSP 1 power supply e 258A type adapters Bulk power supplies such as the 1145A1 Install attendant console optional 122 To install the optional AC 1 Position the attendant console in the desired location and connect the modular cord to the information outlet 2 Install labels according to assignments on the Attendant Console and Display Module forms 3 Install a Digital Line circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if required 4 Administer the console forms in Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Hard wire bridging A WARNING Bridging or paralleling these endpoints can cause electrical damage to the consoles or cause the circuit pack to remove power from the consoles Analog type hard wire bridging is not allowed for 4 wire only DCP endpoints because hard wire bridging provides no way of combining the digital output of 2 bridged DCP sets Also a bridged endpoint causes the added load to degrade the DCP signal Dual wiring of 2 wire and 4 wire endpoints Do not simultaneously wire a 2 wire and 4 wire endpoint to the same equipment location in an MDF even though they connect to different colored wire pairs The system uses separate circuit packs to interface 2 and 4 wire endpoints and none are capable of interfacing both S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and oth
85. error appears again click OK Login again with the login and password from step 4 of this section 8 The TN2314 desktop appears on your laptop 24 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Figure 19 TN2314 desktop window gt Qe 2 setip tet 9 Scroll down until you see the time at the bottom of the right hand side as indicated by the arrow in figure 19 Click on the time A CAUTION It is important that you change the timezone first before changing the time gt NOTE Make sure you are looking at the time on the TN2314 desktop and NOT the time on your laptop 10 Change the timezone and then change the time 8100 Installation and Upgrades 25 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the S8100 with a CD Re administer the Customer logins and passwords You will need the customer s logins and passwords that you obtained before you started the update procedure 1 Onthe TN2314 desktop right click My Computer 2 Click Manage The following window opens Figure 20 Computer Management window Res oe eo me re Tree System Tools Su Storage BR Services and Applications Computer Management Local H System Tools Event Viewer System Information 44 Performance Logs and Alerts 8 1 Shared Folders E Device Manager H Local Users and Groups E eu Storage Disk Manag
86. files are created using SAP order information and or current customer configuration information Without a license file the switch does not provide normal call processing Without a valid license installed or a mismatched license 1 system generates a major alarm 2 Depending upon the nature of the error a 6 day countdown timer starts but call processing continues unchanged 3 Ifthe countdown timer expires the switch runs in Administration Mode only and call processing capability is limited to incoming and outgoing calls only to preadministered numbers NOTE Starting with Release 10 the init login cannot change the customer options offer option or special applications forms For customers with a maintenance contract the installation script installs the following customer related parameters 1 RAS IP address 2 product IDs definity and audix 3 alarm destination number and 4 alarm origination The installation script file can be created and downloaded using the Automatic Registration tool ART on the ART web site For upgrades from pre R10 software the Feature Extraction tool must be run before the license file is created S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Obtain the license and password files Using the Feature Extraction tool for upgrades from pre R10 only Use the Feature Extraction tool FET to capture inventory the customer options and other data from pre R10 DEFINIT
87. forms detail the addition of INTUITY AUDIX subscribers Enable the INTUITY AUDIX forms via Avaya Site Administration or Telnet 1 Start at the INTUITY AUDIX command prompt 2 Enter the command Add Subscriber and the extension number that the new subscriber will use 208 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization INTUITY AUDIX administration Enter the data for the subscriber on page 1 of the Add Subscriber form as detailed in Table 27 Field definitions for Add Subscriber screen page 1 on page 209 The Add Subscriber form page 1 displays monroe Press ENTER enter command Active add subscriber 2600 Name Jones John Extension 2600 COS class01 Switch Number Community ID Secondary Ext Account Code Email Address to execute or press CANCEL to abort add subscriber 2600 Alarms Logins 1 Page 1 of 2 SUBSCRIBER Locked n Password Miscellaneous 1 Miscellaneous 2 Miscellaneous 3 Miscellaneous 4 Covering Extension Broadcast Mailbox Table 27 Field definitions for Add Subscriber screen page 1 Field Valid input Description Name Subscriber s Name This is the name of the subscriber In the example above Jones John Extension Extension number This is the extension number assigned on Communication Manager for the subscriber Password Can be alpha or numeric Subscriber s password Input a temporary
88. from the bash Execute telnet 127 1 and logon using lucent3 41 LAC Open a SAT window Type multivantage to open a SAT window The terminal type is W2KTT 42 SAT Verify that there is no translation corruption If there are corrupted translations a message will appear when the SAT window opens 43 SAT Verify that no major or minor alarms are present Run display alarms 44 SAT Verify outgoing alarm reports link to INADS Run test inads link 45 SAT Verify no license emergency numbers Type change system parameters features See Administer No License Emergency Numbers in Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and the Avaya CMC1 Media Gateways 555 233 146 46 SAT Save translations Run save trans 47 SAT Logoff SAT and exit LAC a Typelogoff and respond with y to close the SAT session b Type bash to go to the bash shell 48 BS Verify Intuity alarms Type logsend tTST 49 BS Verify GAM alarms Type wrntevent GAM 0 9991 Note This causes a Major GAM alarm After the system has called out enter cleargamalarm all at the BASH prompt to retire the alarm This alarm also generates a Maestro case that the INADS group will need to close 50 BS Close the bash windows 36 Type exit to close the bash window b Type exit to close the LAC window 8100 Installation and U
89. ground block to the approved building ground Note The grounding requirements for the 3 cabinet in a 3 cabinet configuration are the same as for the 1 and 2 cabinet requirements S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 91 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Cable a G600 system Install coupled bonding conductor The coupled bonding conductor CBC provides mutual inductance coupling between the CBC and the telephone cables exposed to lightning The conductor can be a 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire tie wrapped to the exposed cables a metal cable shield around the exposed cables or 6 spare pairs from the exposed cable For a high rise building connect the CBC to an approved building ground on each floor To provide the coupled bonding protection 1 Connect one end of the conductor to a telephone cable building entrance protector ground that is connected to an approved ground 2 Route the conductor next to the exposed telephone cables being protected until it reaches the cross connect nearest to the telephone system Position the unexposed telephone cables at least 12 inches 30 5 cm away from exposed telephone cables whenever possible 4 Terminate the other end to the single point ground block provided for the telephone system Connect the power cords WARNING The AC power cord may connect to a properly rated power distribution unit individual AC power receptacles or to a UPS A rack mounted UPS is recommended
90. hard disk for PCN1413b identify a hard disk for PCN1413b This appendix provides the steps to identify the correct hard disks to be replaced under PCN1413b NOTE Follow either Steps 1 3 of this procedure for an S8100 s installation or the entire procedure except Step 3 for routine maintenance operations If an S8100 s hard drive appears unreliable identify whether the hard drive should be replaced 1 Peel away the label on the hard drive to find its model number 2 Ifthethe hard drive s model number matches the one shown in the following figure IC25N020ATCS04 0 This model has been identified as unreliable as an S8100 drive and should be replaced under PCN1413b 3 If you are installing a new S8100 then either Contact the TSO for a case number authorizing the DOA hard drive s replacement Foran Avaya installation inform the project manager that the hard drive needs to be replaced and once the new drive is acquired continue with Replacing an 8100 Media Server s hard drive on page 31 If not continue with Step 4 4 Fora repair or a preventative maintenance activity then access the http support avaya com website to download the diskcheck file 5 Once at the Avaya Support website access the diskcheck file s specific web page by Clicking the Software and Firmware Downloads link b Under the heading Enterprise Class IP Solutions clicking the S8100 Media Server link Clicking
91. if SRA SSG device is installed Optional INADS port number Optional SAP or DOSS order number Click the Continue Install Script for 58 00 Products button Occasionally the install script creation process will fail at this point due to network congestion and an error message appears If this occurs repeat steps 1 10 A congratulations page appears when the install script is successfully created Click the Download button Select Save to save the script file Select the directory on your computer in which to save the installation script You should save the script file with the default filename which is typically installscript sh unless there is a reason to change it such as needing to distinguish between multiple script files Indirect channels For an indirect channel inside or outside the US call your support organization for information about how to obtain an installation script file 8100 Installation and Upgrades 181 April 2004 System initialization Install the password file license file and installation scripts Install the password file license file and installation scripts To install the license password and install script files you must first copy them to the 88100 server s d LucentPub ftproot directory Copy files to the server To copy the license password and installation script files to the server use FTP Follow these steps 1 oc Ui NY 10 11
92. immediate Reboots the system without waiting for the applications to shut down causing possible loss of voice messages that are being recorded and every call to drop restartcause Displays the restart causes for system for technician TSC serialnumber Reads and displays the serial number of the circuit pack setip Sets the IP address subnet mask and default gateway of the LAN interface to the customer s LAN out the splitter cable Turns on RAS Reboot is required for this to take effect 2 of 3 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 GAS commands in bash LAC commands Table 56 Bash commands for Avaya logins 3 of 3 Command Description shutdown Shuts down all Every Avaya 58100 application system Every Avaya 58100 application and Windows 2000 appname AUDIX for example shutdown Audix camp on optional INTUITY AUDIX feature Notifies users of an impending system shutdown and waits for users to end their sessions before shutting down start Called from a bash shell on 8100 to start an application through Watchdog statapp Displays the status of every application group running on the system Displays the current status of each application Applications states are Up Down or Partially Up Displays every process associated with an application regardless of its state swversion Lists the version of software running on 58100
93. interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency RF energy Electromagnetic fields radiating from the switch may cause noise in the customer s equipment If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction book radio interference may result A WARNING To maintain the EMI integrity of the system maintenance personnel must ensure that every cabinet panel cover and so forth is firmly secured before leaving the customer s premises Customer s safety responsibilities The customer has the responsibility to provide a properly installed standard 19 rack adequate AC power approved grounding and sufficient ventilation For more information see Site requirements on page 72 Antistatic protection A WARNING When handling circuit packs or any components of an 58100 always wear an antistatic wrist ground strap Connect the strap to the ESD ground jack or an approved ground such as an unpainted metal surface on the 8100 8100 Installation and Upgrades 67 April 2004 About this book Avaya Product Documentation web page Control circuit packs versus power A WARNING When the system s power is on the 58100 server TN2314 can be removed only after the TN2314 s shutdown procedure has completed A WARNING The control circuit packs with white labels cannot be removed or installed when the system s power is on The port circuit packs with gray labels older versio
94. local area network TDM LAN bus cable horizontal 407772870 Time division multiplexing local area network TDM LAN bus cable vertical 601929763 Processor Interface cable multileg cable TN2314 108549494 TN2314 Processor circuit pack 848320800 Hard disk programmed 407633999 US Robotics Sportster external modem x 601929920 Software CDs 408166783 PCMCIA flash card for backup 105631527 Time division multiplexing local area network TDM LAN bus terminator AHF110 H600 487 14 inch 35 5 cm 6 AWG 40 16 mm green ground wire 407676691 120 VAC power distribution unit 145D 6 AC x 107949364 650A power supply 848477634 LAN cross over cable RJ45 12 foot 405362641 120 V AC power cord 106278062 Apparatus blank circuit pack blank 158P 106606536 Integrated channel service unit ICSU 120A2 x 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Unpack and inspect Table 59 Comcodes for equipment used with CMC1 2 of 2 Description Optional 107988867 DS1 loop back jack Only 700A x 848477634 Cross over cable x 107152969 75 Ohm DS1 coaxial adapter 888B x 403613003 157B connecting block sneak current protectors x 406948976 6SCP 110 protector x 107435091 507B sneak current fuse panel x 407216316 220029 sneak current fuse x 104307327 C6C cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin male to 15 pin male 1
95. logoff the SAT window and return to the LAC prompt 39 Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step Details 11 LT IE Connect to the TN795 processor with Internet Explorer Open Internet Explorer on the laptop type 192 11 13 6 in the URL address bar and press Enter 12 LT IE Backup everything to the PCMCIA Click Administer System card or to a network location b Login with lucent3 Notes TE the medium backing up to Click Backup amp Restore under System Maintenance runs out of space a message will appear noting the files that were not backed up In d Click Immediate Backup this case find a different backup location or e Under Choose Items for Immediate Backup select PCMCIA card with enough capacity and everything that is installed rerun the entire backup Mae Note If the 8100 s internal AUDIX is being used you must do two backups First select the AUDIX translations names amp messages radio button in addition to MultiVantage announcements and Multi Vantage translations When the backup finishes return to the Immediate Backup screen and select only the AUDIX announcements radio button and send this backup to the same or a different location f Set Destination to PCMCIA or click Other Location to send the backup to a network location g Cl
96. maximum extent possible under law Cancel 21 Click Next then click No to the question about the Readme file 22 Ifyou see the following Severe error Figure 15 Sever error window Severe x Unable to shut the Cornerstone logger down Please shut it down and try the install program again Exiting 1 Click OK 2 Double click Setup exe again 23 Transferring Files window opens Allow the 8100 update to complete 20 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 24 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD When the wizard completes you may get one of the following If you get an error message that says that an update of Internet Explorer 6 0 needs to be installed 1 Click OK The 58100 reboots gt NOTE You do not have to update Internet Explorer to 6 0 at this time Continue with the update If you get a pop up that says the setup is complete 1 Click OK 2 Start a telnet session by clicking Start gt Run 3 Inthe Open field type bash 4 Atthe bash prompt type reboot nice If you get a pop up that asks if you want to cancel or end now 1 Click end now The S8100 reboots Step 15 Execute the swversion command 1 Open a telnet window on your laptop Click Start gt Run In the Open field type telnet 192 11 13 6 and then click OK Login using lucent 3 login At the LAC prompt type bash From the bash prompt type swversion Confirm that the softwa
97. modem on page 149 Connect modem to telephone network on page 148 Set neon voltage to prevent ring ping on page 150 Complete installation on page 151 View LEDs to determine power and fan alarm state on page 152 Section S8100 with a G600 installation This section covers procedures for installing the 58100 server with the G600 Media Gateway Site requirements 72 A G600 mounts in a standard 19 inch 48 cm data rack that has been properly preinstalled and secured per local code and the EIA 310 or equivalent standards The customer is responsible for providing the rack and having it installed and secured prior to G600 installation This also applies to providing AC power to the rack and approved grounding Technicians who are trained to install G600s do not typically have the tools or proper training to install data racks If floor mounted single cabinet only the technician is responsible for installing the cabinet per local code The G600 cabinet s dimensions are 12 inches 7 high x 22 inches deep x 19 inches wide The G600 cabinet can be mounted at its midpoint by removing the mounting brackets and remounting them at a medial position Installation requires 1 foot 30 cm of clearance in the rear and 18 inches 45 cm of clearance in the front which is consistent with the EIA 310 data rack standards In a 2 or 3 cabinet configuration the dimensions of the TDM LAN cable require that one cabinet b
98. must also be set to y on the local Machine Profile screen Set to y only after testing the network end to end during initial administration Updates y yes Enter y if the local system will send updated database Out n no information to the remote system the Updates In field must also be set to y on the local Machine Profile screen Set to y only after testing the network end to end during initial administration Network y yes If you are conducting an acceptance test enter n Turnaround n no After the acceptance tests enter y if a network connection that originated from this remote system is allowed to turn around after the remote system has sent all of its network data to the local system The local system may then return update information voice mail and status on the same connection This feature reduces toll charges and increases the efficiency of the system in networks with more than 10 machines The Network Turnaround field must be set to y on the local Machine Profile screen for this feature to work between the local system and the remote system 6 Press F3 Enter to save the information The cursor returns to the command line and the system displays the following message Command Successfully Completed 7 Press F3 Cancel to return to the command line 8 Enter exit or another administrative command at the enter command prompt S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital ne
99. number of administered remote users as gt the number of mailboxes on every remote system System Parameters Limits screen Administer network channels normally done by the technician at the time of installation See Administer networking channels on page 225 Enable the channels to create a communication link between the ACCX card and the switch or the LAN card and the LAN Networking Channel Administration window Change the local machine See Change local machine s information on page 226 Define local machine information for digital networking Machine Profile screen Local Machine Administration window Add a remote machine or change a remote machine normally done by the technician at the time of installation See Add a remote machine on page 230 On the local machine define information about each remote machine including the machine name password connection type and dial string Digital Machine Administration window Machine Profile screen Administer the AUDIX system on the remote machines On each remote machine define information about the local machine Remote Machine Profile screen of the remote machine Perform a full remote update See Perform a full remote update on page 237 Manually run a remote update for each remote machine to bring the network up to date immediately get remote update command 10 2 222 58100 Installation
100. or remove something across an entire switch Import Data Copy and paste data from a spreadsheet to a grid in Avaya Site Administration Export Data Save switch data to an external file Use Template Add objects such as a phone to a switch using an existing template Create New Template Create a template to use when adding objects to the switch Add Bridged Appearance Create a bridged call appearance on a phone Generate Call Accounting Select call accounting data and save it as an external file Browse Dial Ranges View the dialing ranges specified by a switch s dial plan Find Unused Extension Search a switch for the next available extension after a specified extension Browse Unused Ports View a list of unused ports on a switch S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Avaya Site Administration How Avaya Site Administration works Browse Stations View a selected or complete list of stations on a switch Monitor Trunks Tell Avaya Site Administration to periodically check for out of service trunks and notify the user Start Emulation Access a switch or INTUITY AUDIX via terminal emulation Add Switch Set up a connection from Avaya Site Administration to an 8100 G600 CMC1 Add Voice Mail System Set up a connection from Avaya Site Administration to an INTUITY AUDIX system Print Button Labels Clicking the Tree tab on the left pane displays the Avaya Site Administration browser tree Th
101. password and instruct the new subscriber to change their password when they log into INTUITY AUDIX COS 1 500 to class11 Class of service contains features that an INTUITY AUDIX subscriber could be enabled to use Set up the Class of Service on the system before adding subscribers 4 Press to save the information When adding subscribers to INTUITY AUDIX the preferred method is to first set up a Class of Service COS for a group of INTUITY AUDIX subscribers Using this method the data is filled in for you on page 2 of the Add Subscriber form The following is an example of page 2 of the Add Subscriber form S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 209 System initialization INTUITY AUDIX administration TheAdd Subscriber Form page 2 displays monroe Active Alarms add subscriber 2600 Addressing Format extension System Multilingual is OFF Call Answer Language Choice n PERMISSIONS Type call answer Priority Messages y IMAPI Message Transfer y Call Answer Message seconds End of Message Warning Time Maximum Mailing Lists 25 Mailbox Size seconds Maximum 1200 Press ENTER to execute or press CANCEL enter command add subscriber 2600 Total to SUBSCRIBER CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Login Announcement Set System Call Answer Primary Annc Set System Call Answer Secondary Annc Set System Announcement Control n Broadcast Fax Creation INCOMING MA
102. plywood to the right of the 27 sheet S8100 Installation and Upgrades 365 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Install wall mounted cabinet Figure 80 Left panel used as mounting template 54 137 cm 5 12 7 cm indmpnl3 KLC 110397 To mount a cabinet on a wall Place the template on the wall with the top surface level Mark 2 1 8 inch 0 3 cm pilot holes to locate the mounting holes Remove the template from the wall Drill the 2 pilot holes Thread 2 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws partially into the holes amp WN Set the cabinet onto the wall and align the slots with the shoulder screws See Figure 81 Typical wall mounted installation on page 367 Slide the cabinet to the left to hold it in place Tighten the screws securely 366 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Figure 81 Typical wall mounted installation 9 ral E Cc 4 9 ES BN Figure notes 1 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws 2 12 1 inch safety screw 7 Drill 2 lower mounting holes using the cabinet as a template 8 Thread the 2 lower screws and tighten A WARNING Ensure that the right bottom safety screw is in place and tight 8100 I
103. providing 48 VDC at 80 mA maximum The power LED should be ON Check wiring connections Verify that there is dial tone on every emergency transfer set S8100 Installation and Upgrades 143 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones 144 Table 21 Pin assignments for 25 pair connector on 808A 1 of 2 Pin Color Designation Connector Description 26 W BL TTCI Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 1 1 BL W RTCI Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 1 27 W O Tip CO Trunk Circuit 1 2 O W Ring CO Trunk Circuit 1 28 W G TLCI Tip PBX Line Port 1 3 G W RLCI Ring PBX Line Port 1 29 W BR TSTI Tip Emergency Terminal 1 4 BR W RSTI Ring Emergency Terminal 1 30 W S TTC2 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 2 5 S W RTC2 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 2 31 R BL TTK2 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 2 6 BL R RTK2 Ring CO Trunk Circuit 2 32 R O TLC2 Tip PBX Line Port 2 7 O R RLC2 Ring PBX Line Port 2 33 R G TST2 Tip Emergency Terminal 2 8 G R RST2 Ring Emergency Terminal 2 34 R BR TTC3 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 3 9 BR R RTC3 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 3 35 R S TTK3 Tip CO Trunk Circuit 3 10 S R RTK3 Ring CO Line Port 3 36 BK BL TLC3 Tip PBX Line Port 3 11 BL BK RLC3 Ring PBX Line Port 3 37 BK O TST3 Tip Emergency Terminal 3 12 O BK RST3 Ring Emergency Terminal 3 38 BK G TTC4 Tip PBX Trunk Circuit 4 13 G BK RTC4 Ring PBX Trunk Circuit 4
104. refer to the AUDIX Administration PDF files on the Documentation CD and DEFINITY ONE Communications System AUDIX Administration Command Line Quick Reference Card 555 233 737 INTUITY AUDIX commands Commands available to change system settings and subscriber information in the INTUITY AUDIX application are executable from the INTUITY AUDIX command prompt You can access the INTUITY AUDIX command prompt from the Avaya Site Administration or Telnet interface To view a list of commands press F6 or press the choices tab The following INTUITY AUDIX screen displays monroe Active Alarms none Logins 1 to enter new administrative records audit validate system data change to modify existing administrative records copy to copy announcements and fragments display to display administrative records and maintenance logs exit to exit from AUDIX administration and maintenance get to request remote updates help to display available types of help list to produce reports logoff to log off the system print to send the command output to the attached printer remove to remove administrative records reset to restart or shutdown the Messaging Core test to test alarm origination or outcall toggle to toggle the function key settings trace turn on amis trace enter command Adding an INTUITY AUDIX subscriber After completing the machine level translations subscribers must be added to the 58100 system The following
105. remote system such as 00 05 for every 5 minutes The AUDIX system checks the queue at this interval and calls the remote system if something is in the queue for this remote system Stagger start times and intervals for each remote system so the local AUDIX system does not try to call every remote system at the same time Password 5 to 10 digit Enter the password exactly as it is administered on the remote alphanumeric system characters Send yes Select yes if the remote machine will accept multimedia Multimedia no messages such as fax and text messages Messages Select no if the remote machine will not accept multimedia messages Machine See description at Enter the machine type Type right To see a list of valid machine types click the drop down arrow and select the appropriate machine type from the available types 2 of 2 4 When you finish entering information for a remote machine click Save The system adds the information and displays a confirmation message 5 Add another remote machine if necessary S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information Complete the Machine Profile screen for the remote machine via AUDIX Use the Machine Profile screen to enter networking information required for each remote machine such as address ranges and remote update information To enter networking information o
106. specify the laptop s Share Name for example Laptop CD ROM NOTE The following figure shows the CD ROM s default share name D 354 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Map CD ROM for an S8100 upgrade Connect to and access the 58100 M 1_3_526_5_1 D Properties General Hardware Sharing Web Sharing You share this folder among other users on pour To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder C Do not share this folder Comment User limit Maximum allowed Allow a Users To set permissions for how users access this Pennisi folder over the network click Permissions emissors To configure settings for Offline access to amp this shared folder click Caching Cancel Apply 4 Click the Apply button to enable your changes 5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog 6 At the My Computer window verify that the CD ROM device is now marked with a hand Connect to and access the S8100 Prepare to access the S8100 s desktop 1 Ifthisis an R9 5 58100 system use pcAnywhere to access the S8100 s Windows desktop If not R10 use Remote Desktop Client NOTE Whereas Remote Desktop Client is a free application pcAnywhere is not and must be preinstalled on your laptop NOTE Avaya does not support the Remote Desktop Client application 2 Ifnecessary download the current Remote Desktop Client from the following Microsoft link http
107. system check the AC power in the equipment room using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent To check AC power 1 Measure the AC voltage between the hot and neutral sides of the receptacle Depending on the AC power source verify that the meter reads 90 to 132 VAC or 180 to 264 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 3 Measure the voltage between the neutral and ground sides of the receptacle 4 Verify that the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 5 When finished set the AC main circuit breakers to OFF S8100 Installation and Upgrades 371 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Approved grounds 372 An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance protector entrance cable shield or single point ground of electronic telephony equipment If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises the grounds must be bonded together as required in Section 250 81 of the National Electrical Code Grounded Building Steel The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded by of the following grounds acceptable metallic water pipe concrete encased ground or a ground ring Acceptable Water Pipe A metal underground water pipe at least inch 1 3 cm in diameter in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet 3 m The pipe must be electrica
108. systems commands and tasks you can administer with Avaya Site Administration as well as icons for accessing task wizards Button Label Printing BLP for producing station labels for users phones You can print custom button labels on any laser printer and can preview each label before printing Schedule Viewer used for scheduling tasks and monitoring their progress You can schedule a command to execute at any time in the future History Log which provides a history of events that Avaya Site Administration has initiated The History tab displays feedback from a switch or voice mail system about tasks that Avaya Site Administration has run or attempted to run The History Tab helps users identify and correct errors 8100 Installation and Upgrades 259 April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration overview 260 Four modes of operation e Task shortcuts which provide tree based access to Communication Manager switch commands letting you quickly and easily find the necessary commands for command administration activities Avaya Site Administration command folders include e Abbreviated Dialing Call Center Coverage e Groups e Network Parameters e Station Status e System e Task wizards which provide shortcuts to common switch and voice mail administration activities via an intuitive point and click interface to help you quickly and easily perform the task These wizards include e
109. the INADS port on other Communication Manager servers and needs to be configured using the oss bash command The steps are as follows 1 Telnet 58100 from the laptop 2 Goto the bash shell from LAC by typing bash Use the oss command to set the alarm callout destination The format is oss 18005353573 3 3 The 1 parameter is the phone number of the alarm callout destination the gnd parameter is the number of retries and the gu parameter is the retry count 4 alarmorig on to turn on alarm origination 5 Typereboot immediate to have the changes take effect NOTE Alarming will fail if Step 5 is not performed Administer no license emergency numbers Without a valid license installed or a mismatched license 1 system generates a major alarm 2 Depending upon the nature of the error a countdown timer starts but call processing continues unchanged 3 Ifthe countdown timer expires the switch runs in Administration Mode only and call processing capability is limited to incoming and outgoing calls only to preadministered numbers S8100 Installation and Upgrades 185 April 2004 System initialization Test alarm call out To administer these numbers follow these steps 1 At the SAT type change system parameters features and press RETURN The Feature Related System Parameters screen displays change system parameters features Page 4 of 12 A FEATURE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS SYSTEM
110. the Yes radio button In the Select Components window check Message Manager and optionally FAX If you selected FAX the enter FAX Information window appears If you know the Message Server ID and Mailbox Extension enter them in the space provided If you don t know these you can enter them later Click Next in the Ready to Install window The installation will take a few minutes During the installation a DOS command window may appear temporarily When the installation finishes you will be given the option to restart your computer Click OK 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Troubleshooting Install wizard s error messages Troubleshooting This chapter provides information about troubleshooting installation problems for S8100 Problem types can Be new and never worked through before e Occur after installation e Occur after installation has worked The following sections apply Install wizard s error messages on page 273 e Platform s troubleshooting commands on page 275 e Modem s configuration and administration on page 276 Install wizard s error messages Error messages can occur with the 8100 Install wizard The following table list these error messages and their possible explanations and remedies Error message Possible explanation remedy Unable to set the registry default root to LOCAL MACHINE The registry key LOCAL MACHIN
111. the approved ground is inside a dedicated equipment room then these connections must be made by a qualified electrician Floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high rise building that are suitably connected to the riser closet s ground terminal and to the cabinet s single point ground terminal Approved floor grounds may include Building steel The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the floor Metallic water pipes Power feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor A grounding point specifically provided in the building for the purpose S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Uninterruptible power supply A recommended uninterruptible power supply UPS may be used for power holdover The type of UPS depends on the holdover requirements Total holdover capacity varies depending on the UPS The UPS must provide surge protection for the CMC1 cabinet v CAUTION The major alarm contacts should only be connected to a UPS that can indicate its backup power status For most non Avaya UPSs you should not use the major external device leads Using these leads for anything else could cause an SPE download 1 Connectthe UPS to an electrical outlet capable of handling the power requirements of the cabinets 100 VAC 4 5 Amps b 120 VAC 3 8 Amps 200 VAC 2 3 Amps d 220 to 240 VAC 2 0 A
112. the customer s specific network See the system network administrator to ensure that proper permissions are set up for the file and directory More information about these products including installation and training offers can be found on the Avaya Support web site under Products and Services Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization Check the dial plan The dial plan tells the system how to interpret dialed digits and how many digits to expect for certain calls For example if a 9 is dialed to access an outside line the dial plan tells the system to find an external trunk for a dialed string beginning with 9 To check the dial plan 1 Atthe SAT or Avaya Site Administration window enter disp dialplan analysis The Dial Plan Analysis Table form displays Make note of the extension lengths for the ext Call Types The number of digits can only be changed through the web interface 2 Press F1 to cancel the command S8100 Installation and Upgrades 199 April 2004 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization Enter display dialplan parameters The Dial Plan Parameters form displays which should have the correct local node number display dialplan parameters DIAL PLAN PARAMETERS Local Node Number 1 ETA Node Number ETA Routing Pattern UDP Extension Search Order local extensions first 6 Digit Extension Display Format xx xx xx 7 Digit Extension Dis
113. the dialog assign the Username this is the login and the Password NOTE Full Name and Description are optional The Options check boxes are the customer s choice but it is recommended that User Cannot Change Password and Password Never Expires should be the only ones checked Click Groups at the bottom of the dialog S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 lt 10 Connectivity and access to S8100 system Access methods Make the login a member of officeadmin and Users groups and click OK Click Dialin at the bottom of the dialog Check the Grant dialin permissions and No Call Back boxes and click OK Click OK in the New User dialog Close User Manager Starting an Avaya Site Administration session The customer must dial into the system to establish a PPP connection and then start their Avaya Site Administration session To set up a computer to dial into the system perform these steps 1 GotoMy Computer 2 Double click Dial Up Networking 3 Double click Make New Connection 4 Fill in the name field the system should fill in the correct modem attached to the PC if not choose the modem that is attached to the system 5 Click Next 6 Fillin the Area code and Telephone number for the system 7 Click Next 8 Click Finish in the window saying that the connection was created 9 Inthe Dial Up Networking window right click your connection icon 10 Left click Properties 11 Click the Server Types tab
114. the previous procedure for example Laptop CD ROM b You should now have access to the contents of the laptop s CD ROM You can now copy files from the laptop s CD to the 8100 server s hard drive or execute files on the laptop s CD from the S8100 s desktop for example setup exe Restore the laptop s settings laptop running WINDOWS 2000 When finished with an installation or upgrade use this procedure to restore the settings on the technician s laptop to their original state 1 10 11 12 13 Right click Network Neighborhood Select Properties The Network dialog displays Click the Configuration tab Click the File and Print Sharing button and select the I want to be able to give others access to my files box Choose Client for Microsoft Networks from the Primary Network Logon list Click the Identification tab and enter the computer name and workgroup Click the Access Control tab and check the appropriate boxes so that this dialog matches its earlier settings Click the Configuration tab e Ifa dialog appears notifying you that the security provider could not be found click Yes Ifthe Authenticator type dialog appears select Windows 2000 Domain and click OK Double click the modified component in the Network Components list This should be the TCP IP Xircom CreditCard Ethernet Adapter 10 100 The TCP IP Properties dialog displays Enter the original IP address and subnet mask Click the DNS Conf
115. the trunk from Trunk Group form EXAMPLE Port number 3 A 02 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port network or compact modular cabinet 2 Install a Tie Trunk or an international Tie Trunk circuit pack in assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required Forcustomer owned not leased tie trunk facilities such as campus environments Tie Trunk circuit packs provide signaling capabilities beyond those specified by the industry wide E amp M standard Use Figure 71 Tie Trunk circuit packs component side on page 252 and Table 34 Tie trunk option switch settings and administration on page 252 to choose the preferred signaling format set switches on the circuit pack and administer the port 4 Administer forms listed under Tie Trunk Group in the Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 8100 Installation and Upgrades 251 April 2004 Hardware additions Add DS1 tie and OPS Figure 71 Tie Trunk circuit packs component side UNPROT I SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX 4 3 2 1 o o o o o o o o PROT PORT 4 PORT 3 PORT 2 PORT 1 E amp M E amp M E amp M E amp M Table 34 Tie trunk option switch settings and administration Preferred signaling E amp M SMPLX Prot Unprot Administered Installation situation format switch switch port Circumstance To System Far End Collocated Communicat E amp M Type E amp M E amp M U
116. through the AC power cord provided with some of the 7400 series voice terminals Install the protector on the equipment side of the protection in both buildings See Table 3 Comcodes for equipment used with G600 on page 77 for circuit protector and data link protector comcodes 140 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones NOTE Install only 1 emergency transfer power panel per system An 808A emergency transfer panel or equivalent mounted next to the trunk auxiliary field enables emergency transfer See Figure 65 808A emergency transfer panel on page 142 Also see Table 16 Emergency transfer and auxiliary power on page 129 for the pinout of the AUX J1 connector The transfer panel provides emergency trunk bypass or power fail transfer for up to 5 incoming CO trunk loops to 5 selected station sets The 808A equipment s Ringer Equivalency Number REN is 1 0 Amp Use analog telephones for emergency transfer The 500 and 2500 series telephones can also be used as normal extensions Emergency transfer capability may be provided on analog CO and Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS trunks At the MDF the unit is controlled by a connection to a yellow terminal row connecting block in the trunk auxiliary field The unit is controlled by 48 VDC from the EM TRANS
117. to the right panel using the following procedure Bottom mounted MDF with modem 1 Behind the MDF cut the cable tie securing the top 5 cables to the MDF mounting frame 2 Mountthe MDF to the right panel See Figure 94 Typical bottom mounted MDF and modem cable routing on page 385 3 Secure all 10 cables to the bottom left bracket on the MDF with a cable tie 384 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install CMC1 main distribution frame MDF and external modem Figure 94 Typical bottom mounted MDF and modem cable routing 2 7 Y im AR H o9 0 oo Ue E T H ag d e oof 0 e O 5 8 10 98 76 a 9a b OY i m m o h Did D 5 473 2 1 H p 9 c a B H d EL I 9 Lg bod FS cadmrpn4 KLC 051399 Figure notes 1 Main distribution frame MDF 3 Processor Interface cable connect P2 to modem 2 External modem 4 12 x 1 inch shoulder screw Note Do not plug anything into slot 1 of Cabinet 1 Install the external modem The US
118. tone for every emergency transfer set Connect the 808A to the MDF with a B25A or A25B cable Figure 66 Connections for telephone used for emergency transfer on page 146 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used only for emergency transfer 145 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones Figure 66 Connections for telephone used for emergency transfer 50 9 7 TC LC ST 1C TK LC LC ST TC TK LC ST TC TK 1 1m 2 2m 3m 3w ma RELAY PWR ALARM MONITORS eee MAE o EN 1758580b MMR 042996 1 Figure notes 4 Topower transfer unit 1 Tonetwork interface circuitry To control carrier s AUX connector 2 Trunk circuit pack 5 3 Toblue or white station distribution field Figure 67 Connections for telephone used for emergency transfer and as normal extension on page 147 shows the connections at the trunk auxiliary field for a telephone used for emergency transfer and as a normal extension 146 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones Figure 67 Connections for telephone used for e
119. user interface to access the INTUITY AUDIX messaging system through a local area network LAN connection When connected to a LAN the INTUITY AUDIX system is referred to as the INTUITY AUDIX server A web based tool for handling multimedia messages is available as a separate product from Avaya The product www messenger provides web access to the INTUITY AUDIX messaging system Contact your Avaya representative for more information This chapter provides the high level steps for downloading the Message Manager software from the S8100 system via the web interface and for installing the Message Manager software on a PC For further information about Message Manager features and installation see Avaya Message Manager Release 5 0 Administration 555 313 513 Download Message Manager The steps required to obtain the Message Manager software from the 8100 system are as follows 1 the desktop where Message Manager is to be installed activate your favorite browser and bring up the home page for the S8100 system On the S8100 home page click User Services Use lucent3 for the login ID and password Click the Message Manager link In the File Download window click Save to download a self extracting file to the desktop In the Save As window browse to a temporary folder or click the new folder icon to create new folder and click Save The self extracting file will be saved in the specified folder I
120. x for connection between the control cabinet and a port cabinet 848525887 IP Media Processor adapter 102631413 259A adapter for C LAN 700017916 Rack mounting guide 700018021 EMI gasket x 700017924 EMI gasket s installation instructions x 848627188 Fan assembly 700012925 Remote modem s shelf x 700012909 24 port patch panel x 700012917 8 port patch panel x 601929763 Processor Interface cable multileg cable TN2314 601929763 TN2314 Processor circuit pack 848320800 Hard disk programmed 700169121 External modem x 601929920 Software CDs 408166783 PCMCIA flash card for backup 105631527 Time division multiplexing local area network bus TDM LAN bus terminator AHF110 407676691 120 VAC power distribution unit 145D 6 AC 107949364 650A power supply 848477634 LAN cross over cable RJ45 12 foot 405362641 120 VAC power cord 106278062 Apparatus blank circuit pack blank 158P 1 of 2 77 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Unpack and inspect 78 Table 3 Comcodes for equipment used with G600 2 of 2 Comcode Description Optional 106606536 Integrated channel service unit ICSU 120A2 x 107988867 DS1 loop back jack T1 Only 700A x 848477634 Cross over cable x 107152969 75 Ohm DS1 coaxial adapter 888B x 403613003 157B connecting block sneak current protectors x 406948976 6SCP 110 protector x 107435091 507B sneak current fuse pane
121. 00 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Detailed steps Step 1 Change the IP address on your laptop 1 Right click My Network Places icon on your laptop then click Properties Right click Local Area Connection then click Properties Highlight the Internet Protocol TCPIP selection click Properties Click the radio button next to Use the following IP address Enter 192 11 13 5 in the IP address field Enter 255 255 255 252 in the Subnet mask field Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window Refer to the following figure for an example of the TCPIP Properties window Un amp UN Figure 1 Changing the IP address on your laptop Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties i 2 xl General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings C Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 11 13 5 Subnet mask 255 255 255 252 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Advanced 6 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 7 Close the My Network Places window 10 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Upd
122. 04307376 C6D cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin x male on each end 104307434 C6E cable 100 foot 30 5 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin x male to 50 pin female 104307475 C6F cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin x male to 3 inch 7 62 cm stub 102381779 carbon block x 104410147 3BIE W wide gap gas tube x 105514756 3CIS analog line protector solid state x 102904893 4B1C carbon block with heat coil x 104401856 4B1E W wide gap gas tube w heat coil x 104386545 4C1S analog line protector solid state with heat coil x 105581086 4C3S 75 digital voice circuit protector solid state x 406144907 ITW LINX gas tube avalanche suppress x 901007120 ITW Linx ground bar used with above x 406304816 ITW Linx replacement fuse x 103972758 Data link protector 1 circuit x 103972733 Data link protector 8 circuits x 407063478 Electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap 107949364 Avaya online 650A UPS x 407691401 Z3A2 alarm adapter required with UPS x 2 of 2 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 361 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet A cabinet can be either floor or wall mounted Set the Carrier Address ID installing each CMCI cabinet Verify the carrier address ID on CMC1 cabinets 1 Verify and if necessary s
123. 100 system See Via a Telnet session on page 166 In this example the command entered was multivantage The next screen shows the initial SAT screen 8 Telnet win35 Connect Edit Terminal Help Login lucent3 Challenge 183 9616 Response 2697369 Enter Command audix bash cmd definity help exit LAC 310 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Connect to SAT session via Telnet 2 Enter the terminal type Telnet bosnia cf Connect Edit Terminal Help Login Password System G3cfsU8 Software Version 63U8c 00 0 507 8 Terminal Type 513 715 4416 4425 UT228 NIT SUNT 513 The screen shows login and password fields You are automatically logged in to the SAT session by the LAC NOTE Three new terminal types have been added NTT W2KTT and SUNT W2KTT uses different function key sequences see Function key sequences for W2KTT terminal type on page 312 Use NTT from a Windows 95 98 or NT platform Use W2KTT from a Windows 2000 platform e Use SUNT from a Sun Microsystems platform The following screen displays when the terminal type is entered Telnet win35 Connect Edit Terminal Help TT This system is restricted to authorized users for legitimate business pur posas unauthorized access is a criminal violation of the law Copyright 1992 Lucent Technologies Unpublished amp Not for Publication All Rights Res
124. 135 Default AUDIX Settings AUDIX Networking SNMP Agent Admin a Announcement Admin System Maintenance a Backup amp Restore if you have already installed Avaya Site Administration on your computer Click on the Download Software link at the left to install Avaya Site Administration a Shutdown or Restart 135 Download Software Remote Control Terminal Services a Login to 135 AVAYA 6 Click Download Software The Software Download page displays 7 Click Avaya Site Administration The Save As dialog displays 8 Choose a destination such as the desktop The Locations Saved To page displays When Avaya Site Administration is saved it reverts to the Software Download page 9 Double click the application name in the directory where you saved it The Unpacking Avaya Site Administration dialog and a Welcome dialog are displayed 212 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer SNMP 10 Click Next The Avaya Site Administration dialog including installation and related information displays 1l Click Next 12 Click Finish when the please wait message disappears The Avaya Site Administration README file displays Avaya Site Administration is installed on your and an Avaya Site Administration icon appears under Start Programs Avaya Site Administration Start an Avaya Site Administration session Avaya Site Administration can be started as a normal ap
125. 2 add change trunk group next Hardware additions Add TN464GP TN2464BP with echo cancellation number and press Enter aaa trunk group next TRUNK FEAT ACA Assignment n Internal Alert n Data Restriction n Glare Handling none Used for DCS n Suppress Outpulsing n Seize When Maintenance Busy neither Incoming Tone DTMF ANI no Connected to CO n Page 2 of 11 SPE A ES URES Measured both Maintenance Tests y end Per Call CPN Blocking Code Per Call CPN Unblocking Code 1 Echo Cancellation P 3 OnTrunk Features screen 2 set the DS1 Echo Cancellation field to y 4 Type add change ds1 UUCSS and press Enter ds1 2b08 Location 02B08 Bit Rate 2 048 Signaling Mode CAS Interconnect pbx Interface Companding mulaw Idle Code 111111 Slip Detection y Echo Cancellation y EC Direction inward EC Configuration 1 Page 1 of 1 SPE B E Echo Cancel t23 hdb3 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Name Line Coding Country Protocol 1 CRC n 11 Near end CSU Type other 5 Onthe DS1 Circuit Pack screen set the 1 Echo Cancellation field to y When set to y 2 new fields display EC Direction and EC Configuration e Ifyou know the echo is coming into 8100 G600 CMC1 keep the default setting for the EC Direction field of inward e Ifyou know that the distant party is hearing echo that originat
126. 2 shows the LED and alarm conditions Ring voltage and neon bus output do not activate alarm status 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections 2 Connectivity and access to an 8100 system To aid understanding of subsequent chapters this chapter provides background information about connectivity and access to an 58100 system Physical connections and connectivity are as follows Physical connections on page 153 Direct connection to the RJ45 service jack on page 154 Direct connection with a local monitor mouse keyboard on page 163 Connection via customer s LAN on page 163 Connection via RAS modem dial up on page 163 The access method is determined by the task or access situation Access methods on page 165 Via a Telnet session on page 166 Via a web browser session on page 167 Remotely using Avaya Site Administration on page 170 Logins for the S8100 on page 172 This chapter begins with procedures for physically connecting to an 58100 with a G600 or Once the physical connection is made to an 58100 you can access the system in any of several ways See Appendix H Installation connectivity quick reference for a tear out cheat sheet summarizing physical connections access methods and login information NOTE Detailed descriptions of the operation of the Microsoft Windo
127. 3 7 TXT 7 25 BK G 38 302 TXR 7 26 G BK 13 202 PXT 7 27 BK BR 39 303 PXR 7 28 BR BK 14 203 10 2 58100 Installation and Upgrades 291 April 2004 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Table 44 Pinout for TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 Wire S interface 2 of 2 Port Signal Cross connect pin Color Amphenol pin Backplane pin 8 TXT 8 29 BK SL 40 304 TXR 8 30 SL BK 15 204 PXT 8 31 Y BL 41 305 PXR 8 32 BL Y 16 205 2 of 2 Table 45 Pinout for TN793 Analog Line circuit pack on page 292 shows the pinout for the TN793 and TN2793 24 port Analog Line circuit pack Table 45 Pinout for TN793 Analog Line circuit pack 1 of 2 Port Signal Cross connect pin Color Amphenol pin Backplane pin 1 T 1 1 W BL 26 102 R 1 2 BL W 01 002 2 T 2 3 W O 27 103 R 2 4 O W 02 003 3 T 3 5 W G 28 104 R 3 6 G W 03 004 4 T 4 7 W BR 29 105 R 4 8 BR W 04 005 3 T 5 9 W SL 30 106 R 5 10 SL W 05 006 6 T 6 11 R BL 31 107 R 6 12 BL R 06 007 7 T 7 13 R O 32 108 R 7 14 O R 07 008 8 T 8 15 R G 33 109 R 8 16 G R 08 009 9 T 9 17 R BR 34 110 R 9 18 BR R 09 010 10 T 10 19 R SL 35 111 R 10 20 SL R 10 011 11 T 11 21 BK BL 36 112 R 11 22 BL BK 11 012 1 of 2 292 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Table 45 Pino
128. 314 test green off on flashl flash3 off SW SW off on flash2 TN2314 in use yellow off off off off flash2 flash sw off on flash2 4 PCMCIA yellow SW SW SW SW SW on off on Majoralarm red off off off off off SW SW off off Minor alarm red off off off off off SW SW off off off Clock status yellow off A off A Ioff off ETR red on on 26 on on on eb Sw sw on on OK to remove green off on 2 on off off off flash3 on off a b c d 40 sec 40 sec 80 sec 30 sec flash1 800 ms ON 200 ms OFF flash2 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF flash3 200 ms ON 800 ms OFF flash4 200 ms OFF on every sanity heartbeat flash5 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF sw Software controlled clk Similar to the TN2182 Tone Clock LED 338 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Status LEDs Attendant console s LEDs F Status LEDs This chapter provides information about the status LEDs for 8100 This chapter is organized as follows Attendant console s LEDs on page 339 Other circuit packs on page 339 Circuit packs status LEDs on page 339 e Power supply s LEDs on page 341 Attendant console s LEDs The console has 2 red LEDs labeled ALM and ACK The left LED lights steadily when there is a Major or Minor alarm at the switch cabinet The right LED lights steadily if the alarm has been successfully rep
129. 526900060 qrdmprt3 KLC 093002 Figure notes 1 Left panel also acts as wall mounting template and as floor mounting pedestal CMC cabinet N A Right panel External modem not shipped with every system 10 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws ooo0o000 b AC power cord NEMA 5 15P or IEC 320 Processor Interface cable Single point ground block 14 inch 35 5 cm 6 AWG 40 16 mm ground wire Flash card backup Table 59 Comcodes for equipment used with on page 360 lists the comcodes for equipment used with the If Optional is marked with an x the equipment may be unnecessary depending the site s configuration S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 359 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Unpack and inspect 360 Table 59 Comcodes for equipment used with CMC1 1 of 2 Description Optional 700225758 Left panel 847951670 Right panel 700225741 Right panel assembly 700225360 Right door 700225766 Left door 700225782 Fan assembly 847987187 CMC 110 cross connect assembly main distribution frame x recommended 103970000 Main distribution frame label Code 220A x 407745009 Fan air filter 706827717 Single point ground block 407772888 Time division multiplexing
130. 6 257 257 257 257 257 257 258 259 259 262 263 265 265 266 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Configure Avaya Site Administration Add an 58100 switch administration item Add 58100 voice mail administration item Start a switch administration session To launch a GEDI session To launch an emulation session Start a voice mail administration session 8 Message Manager Download Message Manager Install Message Manager 9 Troubleshooting Install wizard s error messages Platform s troubleshooting commands Modem s configuration and administration Verify INADS modem settings No external modem installed External modem installed Verify external modem option settings External modem not used Configure the installed modem Test the external modem 10 Security and copy protection Software copy protection mechanisms Feature protection Copy protection A Cable pinouts Set TN760E Tie Trunk s options Set TN464GP T1 E1 s options Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Pinout for Processor s external cable S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 267 267 268 268 268 269 270 271 271 271 273 273 275 276 276 2 6 276 276 277 278 278 279 279 278 279 281 281 283 284 286 Contents 55 Contents B Setup customer logins Customer access Windows logins for customers Windows login types for customers Administrator login INTUITY
131. 64 kbps D channel signaling The D channel is the 24 channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels Processor Interface cable Octopus cable splitter cable or multileg cable See Install and cable a G600 cabinet on page 71 processor port network PPN control carrier A carrier containing the maintenance circuit pack tone clock circuit pack and SPE circuit packs for a processor port network PPN and optionally port circuit packs QPPCN Quality Protection Plan Change Notice rack mounted cabinet RMC See G600 on page 408 Remote Feature Activation RFA The web based system that is used to deploy license and password files for every DEFINITY platform remote maintenance board RMB A board provided in adjunct processors that intelligently monitors the system hardware for health status These include environmental conditions PC heartbeat and sanity checks The RMB functionality also allows modem access to the TN parent board RS 232C A physical interface specified by the Electronic Industries Association EIA RS 232C transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Glossary RTU Right to use fee that is charged for feature activation 8100 Media Server The Avaya 58100 Media Server is an application enabling processing platform that runs Avaya Communication M
132. 67A adapter on page 134 Figure 61 Wiring diagram of 367A adapter 0000000 e 000000 0000000 0000000 e 06000000 000000 tt Te 000000 on 87654321 87654321 87654321 X V J v v 9 9 9 Figure notes 1 Jack 1 3 Jack 8 2 Jack 2 4 367A adapter 134 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install multipoint adapters Basic multipoint installation distances Figure 62 Basic multipoint with one work location on page 135 provides cabling information for fanout of ISDN BRI multipoint installations The terminating resistor is located in the satellite closet Every distance assumes 24 AWG 0 26 mm D inside wire DIW Figure 62 Basic multipoint with one work location inst dis RPY 012098 Figure notes 1 S interface source TN556 6 System s cabinet 2 Terminating resistor 7 Terminating endpoint 1 3 Satellite closet 8 Terminating endpoint 2 4 Maximum distance from S interface 9 Work location source to work location 1600 feet 10 Maximum distance from information 488 m outlet to terminating endpoint 33 feet 5 Maximum distance from satellite closet 10 m to work location 250 feet 76 m ii Iufonnationonitlet S8100 Installation and Upgrades 135 April 2004 In
133. 725B speech synthesizer 253 TN744D call classifier tone detector 391 TN750C announcement 253 254 TN795 processor 105 240 391 circuit protection off premises 107 394 protectors 138 C LAN functionality 244 CMC1 allowed circuit packs 386 disallowed circuit packs 389 CMC1 cabinets power switches 373 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 installation cabinets cross connecting to MDF 386 carrier address ID 362 circuit packs allowed 386 disallowed 389 comcodes for CMC1 equipment 359 connecting and routing power cords 378 415 coupled bonding conductor 378 equipment room hardware CMC1 equipment room hardware 386 floor mount cabinet 364 main distribution frame and external modem 384 MDF labling 397 off premises circuit protection 394 power switches cabinet 373 setting ringing option 399 system cabinet 362 unpack equipment 358 wall mount cabinet 364 CO trunk adding 250 code calling access adding 253 cold starts with translations 334 comcodes equipment packed with CMC1 359 G600 77 commands bash alarmstat 187 dibackup 318 didisable snmp 192 dienable snmp 192 distat 187 ftpserv 348 net user 304 349 reboot 309 331 346 348 serialnumber 177 setip 166 178 309 346 347 348 shutdown 332 statapp 348 swversion 177 categories 307 DEFINITY for user 307 installconfig 275 INTUITY AUDIX 208 change machine 226 change machine remote_machine_name 233
134. 9 10 11 3 o35332c655522525373 52525252525c 25525wcccc 333723 30I 52525252525c 2552555wc5 33333363233336 339533363932336 5 5 22252225 62522c25c 32525225625322c6c c3 5252522525w 25252525wcwcc 352525232525c 6252525wc525c 52525252525c 252525wc5wc25 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization display cos 12 13 14 15 52525232525c252525wc5wcc 525252352525c 25525cc525 52525232525c 25525wcc5c 52525252525c 25525wccwc5 a RU T Press F1 to cancel the command Check class of restriction Ensure the other fields are set to n Find the COS you plan to use for the INTUITY AUDIX port stations It is usually COS 5 Ensure that Data Privacy and Restrict Call Fwd Off Net are set to y 1 At the SAT or Avaya Site Administration window type disp cor 1 where 1 is the COR you plan to use for the INTUITY AUDIX port stations The Class of Restriction form displays display cor 1 COR Number COR Description FRL Can Be Service Observed Be A Service Observer Time of Day Chart Priority Queuing Restriction Override Restricted Call List Access to MCT Category For MFC ANI Send ANI for MFE MF ANI Prefix Hear System Music on Hold 1 Page Trof 4 CLASS OF RESTRICTION audix T n n 1 n n n y T n y APLT Calling Party Restriction Called Party Restriction Forced Entry of Accou
135. 9B Tone Clock No TN420B C Tone Detector No TN568 INTUITY AUDIX Slim No TN570B C Expansion Interface No TN572 Switch Node Clock No TN573B Switch Node Interface No TN574 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel No TN577 Packet Gateway No TN748B C D Tone Detector No TN750B Announcement No TN755 B Neon power unit No TN756 Tone Detector Generator No TN765 Processor Interface No TN768 Tone Clock No TN772 Duplication Interface No TN775 B C Maintenance No 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 389 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 390 Table 62 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules 2 of 2 Apparatus code Name Allowed TN776 Expansion Interface No TN777B Network Control No TN778 Packet Control No TN780 Tone Clock No TN787F G H J K Multimedia Interface No TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner No TN790B Processor No TN792 Duplication Interface No TN794 Network Control Packet Interface NetPkt No TN798B Processor No TN801 LAN Gateway Interface No TN1648 B System Access Maintenance No TN1650B Memory No T1654 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel No TN1655 Packet Interface No TN1656 Tape Drive No TN1657 Disk Drive No TN2182 B Tone Clock Tone Detector and Call Classifier No TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface No TN2202 Ring Generator No TN2210 Tone Generator No TN2214
136. AAR A feature that routes calls to other than the first choice route when facilities are unavailable S8100 Installation and Upgrades 405 April 2004 Glossary Automatic Route Selection ARS A feature that allows the system to automatically choose the least cost way to send a toll call bash Bourne again shell Unix like command line interpreter Basic Rate Interface BRI A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems BRI runs at 192 Mbps and provides two 64 kbps B channels voice and data and one 16 kbps D channel signaling The D channel connects monitors and disconnects every call It also can carry low speed packet data at 9 6 kbps cabinet Housing for racks shelves or carriers that hold electronic equipment cable Physical connection between two pieces of equipment for example data terminal and modem or between a piece of equipment and a termination field cable connector A jack female or plug male on the end of a cable A cable connector connects wires on a cable to specific leads on telephone or data equipment call accounting system CAS This software feature provides recording costing and reporting of call detail records Recording includes the capability to set record discard criteria that allow the customer to specify the data recorded Costing uses tariff databases and user defined parameters Reporting produces both periodic reports for indiv
137. ARNING The alternating current AC power circuit must be dedicated to the system The circuit must not be shared with other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch The AC receptacle must not be located under the CMC1 s main distribution frame and must be easily accessible AX DANGER The latch only removes the cabinet s direct current DC power Unseating the power supply removes AC power from the power supply but not from the cabinet To remove the cabinet s AC power pull the AC power cord from the AC appliance connector behind the cabinet WARNING System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding provided in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country of installation A WARNING AC mains wiring and testing must be performed by a qualified electrician and must conform to Article 250 of the NEC NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country of installation Check AC power Each CMC uses an auto ranging 85 to 264 VAC power supply 47 to 63 Hz 330 Watts 4 5 Amps 100 to120 VAC or 2 3 Amps 200 to 240 VAC at 500 VoltAmps The AC power source can be 1 phase of 120 VAC with neutral 100 VAC for Japan with 15 Amp circuit breaker or 1 phase of 220 or 240 VAC 200 VAC for Japan with 10 Amp circuit breaker The AC cord uses a NEMA 5 15P plug or an IEC 320 plug Before powering up the
138. AUDIX alarming Press the enter key At the bash prompt type wrntevent GAM 0 9991to test the platform alarming Press the enter key The modem dials the TSO to report the alarms You should be able to hear the modem dialing out Call the TSO to verify that the alarms were received Step 28 Backup the translations 13 At the bash prompt type dibackup deftran defann vmnammsgtran pcmcia to backup the system to the PCMCIA card S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Replacing 58100 Media Server s hard drive This Job Aid provides the steps for replacing the hard drive on the 58100 Media Server TN2314 circuit pack The media server s software release on the new hard drive may be the same as or later than the software release on the hard drive to be replaced If the media server s software release on the new hard drive is earlier than the software release on the hard drive to be replaced you must update the software on the new hard drive after the replacement Access keys The access method for each step is identified by the following keys Table 0 1 Technician s laptop Internet Explorer Web interface on the laptop S8100 s Windows desktop Internet Explorer Web interface on the S8100 s Windows desktop Note that SDT and SDT IE are opened inside of LT IE Bash shell on S8100 s Windows desktop LAC s
139. AUDIX logins Customer s web access logins Enabling Windows 2000 customer logins Set up login accounts Communication Manager logins for customers Forced password aging Logoff notification Super user Administer login command permissions Communication Manager commands for user login Password expiration C Miscellaneous procedures Setting the name of the switch Setting the Windows name Updating INTUITY AUDIX machine name Restarting INTUITY AUDIX Changing system name Connect to SAT session via Telnet Function key sequences for W2KTT terminal type Installing INTUITY languages other than English Laptop configuration for Windows 95 98 NT Installing INTUITY languages Perform backup Backup using a LAN resident PC Backup using an 58100 desktop Enter backup commands Backup via the web interface Perform immediate backup View backup progress Back up to a LAN address 56 299 299 300 300 300 301 302 304 304 305 306 306 306 306 307 308 309 309 309 310 310 310 310 312 313 313 315 316 317 318 318 319 322 323 323 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 View scheduled backups Access backup information Perform restore Enable disable embedded messaging Impact on maintenance Access Diskeeper software to defragment the disk Change the default times on Diskeeper D Recovery 88100 system level shutdown and restart Communication Manager software reset recovery Reset Sy
140. AVAYA Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and the Avaya CMC1 Media Gateways 555 233 146 Issue 3 1 April 2004 Copyright 2003 Avaya Inc All Rights Reserved Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Warranty Avaya Inc provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available through the following Web site http www avaya com support Preventing Toll Fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support in the United States and Canada call the Technical Service Center s Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 How to Get Help For add
141. Administration on a separate computer that computer must fulfill the following requirements Windows 95 or 2000 configuration Processor 486 Pentium RAM 16 32 MB Available Disk Space 100 MB minimum CD ROM Printer port Standard PC printer port or LAN connection Available Serial Ports 1 free serial port or LAN connection is required for a connection to the switch TCP IP LAN Optional depending on configuration Display SVGA with minimum screen resolution of 800 x 600 Setting up a voice mail account is part of the Avaya Site Administration User Administration wizard For every other INTUITY AUDIX task administrators must use Avaya Site Administration s terminal emulation feature to open an INTUITY AUDIX terminal emulation window In addition to the switch administration functions Avaya Site Administration has its own administration activities These activities help set up Avaya Site Administration to communicate with switches and INTUITY AUDIXes organize telecommunications data and specify that Avaya Site Administration will work These Avaya Site Administration administration activities include Setting up direct modem data module and LAN connections between Avaya Site Administration and switches or INTUITY AUDIX systems Entering Avaya Site Administration specific data such as time out intervals number of times to retry tasks and other system options Using the history schedule and connection viewers to track
142. Analog Line Yes TN468B Analog Line Yes TN479 Analog Line Yes TN553 Packet Data Line Yes TN556C D Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface Yes 4 Wire S T NT Interface ISDN BRI TN722B DS1 Tie Trunk Yes TN725B Speech Synthesizer Yes TN726B Data Line Yes TN735 Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET Line Yes TN742 Analog Line Yes TN744B Call Classifier Detector Yes TN746B Analog Line Yes TN747 B Central Office Trunk Yes TN750C Announcement Yes TN753 B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN754 B C Digital Line 4 Wire DCP Yes TN758 Pooled Modem Yes TN760B C D E Tie Trunk Yes TN762 B Hybrid Line Yes TN763B C D Auxiliary Trunk Yes TN767B C D E DS1 Interface 24 Channel Yes TN769 Analog Line Yes TN771 D Maintenance Test Yes 2 of 3 8100 Installation and Upgrades 387 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 388 Table 61 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules 3 of 3 Apparatus code Name Allowed TN789 Radio Controller Yes TN791 Analog Line Yes TN793 Analog Line 24 Port 2 Wire Yes TN2314 Processor Yes TN799DP Control LAN C LAN Yes TN802 B Internet Protocol IP Trunk Yes TN2135 Analog Line Yes TN2136 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Yes TN2138 Central Office Trunk Yes TN2139 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN2140B Tie Trunk Hungary Italy Yes TN2144 Analog Line Y
143. Article 250 of the National Electrical Code NEC National Fire Protection Agency NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country of installation A WARNING AC mains wiring and testing must be performed by a qualified electrician and must conform to Article 250 of the NEC NFPA 70 or the applicable electric code in the country of installation A WARNING Be sure that with the other equipment installed in the rack the G600 will not generate an overcurrent or over load condition Verify that the customer s branch circuit and or power distribution strip are adequate with respect to overload and overcurrent protection Check AC power 86 Each G600 uses an auto ranging 85 to 264 VAC power supply 47 to 63 Hz 330 Watts 4 5 Amps 100 to120 VAC or 2 3 Amps 200 to 240 VAC at 500 VoltAmps The AC power source can be 1 phase of 120 VAC with neutral 100 VAC for Japan with 15 Amp circuit breaker or 1 phase of 220 or 240 VAC 200 VAC for Japan with 10 Amp circuit breaker The AC cord uses a NEMA 5 15P plug or an IEC 320 plug Before powering up the system check the AC power in the equipment room using a KS 20599 digital voltmeter DVM or equivalent To check AC power 1 Measure the AC voltage between the hot and neutral sides of the receptacle Depending on the AC power source verify that the meter reads 90 to 132 VAC or 180 to 264 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem Measur
144. Continue NOTE Press Continue at the Terminal Type prompt If you have already selected a terminal type press Cancel and try again Login lucent3 Password Enter Command audix bash cmd multivantage exit Send BREAK Cancel Help To launch an emulation session 1 Click the Tree tab of the Avaya Site Administration window 2 Right click the newly created switch item S8100 Switch 3 Click Advanced 4 Click either 4410 Emulation or 513 Emulation Once the connection has completed a login screen displays 5 Enterthe login ID and password Cy Devo Emulation 513 OF x cancel refresh enter clear help go to page next page prey page 8100 Installation and Upgrades 269 April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Configure Avaya Site Administration Start a voice mail administration session 1 Login to the 58100 system as in the previous procedures To launch a GEDI session on page 268 or To launch an emulation session on page 269 2 Enter audix at the LAC prompt 3 Enter 4410 as the terminal type A screen similar to the following displays cancel refresh enter clearfld help choices nestpage prevpage 270 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Message Manager Download Message Manager 8 Message Manager Avaya Message Manager is a tool for handling multimedia messages with use of a personal computer PC Message Manager provides a graphical
145. Control LAC process accepts these inputs it allows admission into the system To continue enter one of the listed commands audix bash cmd multivantage help exit at the LAC prompt Via a web browser session Customers or Avaya personnel use this method of access to the 58100 system Windows 95 or Windows 2000 on their PC to Administer Communication Manager and INTUITY AUDIX web access to Avaya Site Administration Backup and restore Shut down the system Provide remote control using the Terminal Services client Download Avaya Site Administration and Message Manager The software can be downloaded to the technician s laptop or a computer on the customer s network The web browser provides a single point from which to start administration activity The web browser interface is available for use once a physical connection is established 1 Open your web browser If your physical connection is a dial up or an RJ45 direct connection complete Step 2 If not go to Step 3 2 Verify that you are not using a proxy server NOTE On Internet Explorer 5 x go to Tools Internet Options Connections at the bottom of the window click LAN settings uncheck Use a proxy server box and check Automatically detect settings click OK until back to the web page 8100 Installation and Upgrades 167 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Access methods 3 http ip address gt in the address area of the web brows
146. CornerStone The bash shell is case sensitive so be sure to capitalize the C and S in CornerStone This process should finish very quickly A status message of shutdownproc succeeded displays when the shutdown finishes S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Set up country specific call progress tones 5 Enter dlstat Confirm the following results CornerStone PARTIALLY UP Audix DOWN AudixNet DOWN If any of these 3 systems are still UP repeat steps 3 to 5 6 Enter cd c lucentsoftware cornerstone asp dsp0 This moves you to the directory where the active tone detector file is dsp0 USA 7 Enter pwd to confirm you in the correct directory The path of the current directory displays 8 Toverify the mvdsp sh script is present enter Is If you do not see the mvdsp sh script contact Tier 3 or 4 personnel for assistance 9 Enter mvdsp sh to execute the mvdsp sh script The following line displays Select dsp file AUSTRALIAIBRAZILICANADAIMEXICOIUKIOTHER NOTE You can exit from the script at any time by pressing Ctrl C 10 Inall capital letters enter one of the displayed countries or OTHER If you entered OTHER you are prompted to enter the name of your country in all capital letters Make certain a tone detector file exists for your country and you enter it correctly NOTE If you enter in an unrecognized country you are returned to the prompt to enter a valid country na
147. E is not accessible from the install wizard Ensure that the registry key is accessible 8100 is still running Shut it down and restart install Install wizard cannot execute while S8100 applications are running The command shutdown all shuts down the applications related to 8100 After this command executes run the install wizard again Unable to shut down the CornerStone logger Manually shut it down and restart the install program Execute C LucentSoftware CornerStone mtce bin csShutdownlog exe Execute the command C LucentSoftware CornerStone bin cslog_server exe UnregServer The CornerStone logger should shut down Run the install wizard again Unable to register the following files The install program is unable to self register the files Register the DLLs manually using the command regsvr32 Unable to reboot workstation now Install wizard unsuccessfully tried to reboot the workstation Reboot was attempted because some files were not installed properly may be in use Manually push the shut down switch on the front of the TN2314 and power cycle S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 273 Troubleshooting Install wizard s error messages Error message Possible explanation remedy Unable to set xxxx yyyy from ffff Install wizard could not read the key yyyy from section xxxx in the ini file ffff Check The ini file ffff shou
148. Figure 37 Shift TDM LAN bus terminator from Cabinet A to Cabinet B amp cadptdm2 KLC 102600 Figure notes 1 EMI gasket between cabinets 2 TDM LAN bus terminators 4 Remove the nuts on the posts of the plates covering the bottom right TDM LAN cable routing slot of Cabinet B and the top right TDM LAN cable routing slot of Cabinet A See Figure 38 TDM LAN bus cable routing slot plate removal on page 96 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 95 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Cable a G600 system Figure 38 TDM LAN bus cable routing slot plate removal co cadptdm3 KLC 102600 Figure notes 1 Cabinet B s routing slot plate 2 Cabinet A s routing slot plate 5 Pull open the EMI gasket and pass the TDM LAN bus cable through the routing slots in both cabinets Push the free end of the EMI gasket back in place See Figure 39 TDM LAN bus cable routed from Cabinet A to Cabinet B on page 97 A WARNING Be sure to install each TDM LAN bus cable connector with the arrow on its back pointing upward 6 Install the lower connector of the TDM LAN bus cable on the righ
149. Green Y Yellow BR Brown V Violet seyo sueJBeip ejqeo pue J0 99UU0D sinouid ajqe5 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts 298 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Set up customer logins Customer access B Set up customer logins This chapter provides information about setting up and using customer logins for an 58100 Media Server Customer access on page 299 Windows logins for customers on page 300 Enabling Windows 2000 customer logins on page 304 Communication Manager logins for customers on page 305 Customer access The Avaya Lucent Access Control LAC module allows access to a shell bash using any valid Windows 2000 login This enhancement allows a customer to use a login such as NTadmin to access Windows 2000 via a bash shell This feature is not intended to be used by Avaya Services personnel who continue to use the Lucent Services logins lucent1 lucent2 lucent3 Prior to Release 2 0 the LAC module listened only on TCP port 23 A connection to this port produced different results depending on the login used For example a services login lucent1 lucent2 lucent3 resulted in the LAC prompt to select Communication Manager INTUITY AUDIX or a bash shell An alias login such as donut resulted in a SAT screen without a LAC prompt This continues to be supported in the May 2003 release but is being deprecated in favor of the use of separate
150. ILBOX Order fifo Category Order nuo Retention Times days New 10 Old 10 Unopened 10 OUTGOING MAILBOX Order fifo Category Order unfda Retention Times days File Cab 10 Delivered Nondeliverable 10 Voice Mail Message seconds Maximum Length 1200 Minimum Needed 32 Maximum Length seconds wA Logins 1 Page 2 of 2 Outcalling n none IMAPI Access y y Trusted Server Access y 1200 Minimum Needed 8 Entries in all Lists Minimum Guarantee 0 abort 210 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Download Avaya Site Administration Download Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration is a purchase option with the Avaya Integrated Management Suite Avaya Site Administration is available for download as described in this section only if the customer has purchased the appropriate option See Chapter 7 Avaya Site Administration for more information about Avaya Site Administration NOTE The IP address differs according to the type of physical connection established 1 Open an Internet browser 2 http IP address gt in the address area of the web browser The home page displays Home V Administer System User Services 3 Click Administer System A dialog similar to the following displays Username and Password Required x Enter username for august dr lucent com at august dr lucent com User Name Password
151. Installation and Upgrades for the Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and the Avaya CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 146 47 SAT Save translations Run save trans 48 SAT Logoff SAT and exit LAC a Typelogoff and respond with y to close the SAT session b Type bash to go to the bash shell 49 BS Verify Intuity alarms Type logsend tTST 50 BS Verify GAM alarms Type wrntevent GAM 0 9991 Note This causes a Major GAM alarm After the system has called out enter cleargamalarm all at the BASH prompt to retire the alarm This alarm also generates a Maestro case that the INADS group will need to close 51 BS Close the bash windows a Type exit to close the bash window S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 b Type exit to close the LAC window 43 Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step Details 52 LT IE Backup the translations and other data to the PCMCIA card or to a network location Click Administer System Click Backup amp Restore under System Maintenance Click Immediate Backup gt Under Choose Items for Immediate Backup select everything that is installed e Destination to PCMCIA or click Other Location to backup to a network location f Click the Backup button Note If the medium you are backing up to runs out of space a message will appear noting the
152. LED remains lighted and the circuit pack is not placed into service During the various states of operation start up testing normal operation circuit failure and so forth circuit pack status LED indications appear as shown in Table 54 Control and port circuit pack status LEDs on page 340 Table 54 Control and port circuit pack status LEDs Equipment type LED Description Port circuit packs Red Briefly on during a power up a circuit pack s reseating or resetting or system reset Steadily on if a circuit pack fails start up test or fails while in use Off during normal operation Green Briefly on during a circuit pack s testing following power up circuit pack s reseating or a system reset On during periodic scheduled or a technician s on demand testing Off during normal operation Yellow On when any of a circuit pack s ports are in use otherwise off S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Power supply s LEDs 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Status LEDs Other circuit packs Table 55 LED and alarm conditions on page 341 shows the LED and alarm conditions for the 650A power supply Ring voltage and neon bus output do not activate alarm status Table 55 LED and alarm conditions LED Condition status Alarm state Normal Red off Open Yellow on No input power Red off Closed Yellow off DC output not present Red on Closed except Neon Ye
153. Mbps or 2 048 Mbps E1 digital data service between 2 collocated systems or between the system and a data network The following cables can be used C6C connector cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded cable with a 50 pin male connector on 1 end and a 15 pin male connector on the other end Use to connect a DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack to a channel service unit C6D connector cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded cable with a 50 pin male connector on each end Use to connect DS1 tie trunks in collocated cabinets C6E connector cable 100 foot 30 5 m shielded cable with a 50 pin male connector on 1 end and a 50 pin female connector on the other end Use as an extension cable between the DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack and other connector cables C6F connector cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded cable with a 50 pin male connector on 1 end and a 3 inch 7 62 cm stub on the other end Use to connect the DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack to channel multiplexers requiring hardwired connections See Table 11 Pinout of C6F cable on page 118 for a pinout Table 11 Pinout of C6F cable Wire color Lead designation Pin number White Green LI high side 47 Green LI 22 White Brown LO 48 Brown LO high side 23 White Slate LBACK2 49 Slate LBACKI 24 118 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment DS1 tie trunks between collo
154. Protocol it is necessary to collect call records via a LAN connection between the S8100 server platform and the call accounting client s platform The following descibes administration of the network connections Before beginning ensure that proper network connectivity exists between the 58100 server platform and the call accounting client s platform Also ensure that call rating has been turned off in the call accounting client if the database has not yet been initialized A login for the call accounting system has to be established in the 58100 Windows 2000 Server M software This is accomplished as follows using either Terminal Server to access the system desktop or a customer supplied keyboard mouse and monitor 1 Select Start Programs Administrative Tools Common 2 Click Computer Management 3 Click Local Users amp Groups S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Setup call detail recording CDR Right click Users folder then select New User In the dialog assign the Username this is the login and Password NOTE The Full Name and Description are optional The option check boxes are the customer s choice however we recommend that User Cannot Change Password and Password Never Expires should be the only ones checked Click Groups at the bottom of the dialog Make the login a member of officeadmin and Users groups and click OK Click OK in the New User dialog then Close Computer
155. RB8 M8 PXR 8 S1 8 LR 8 LO TX R 16 R24 49 GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD LBACK2 GRD GRD 50 GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD GRD 3of3 Denotes high side of line Table 43 DS1 interface cable H600 307 or C6C 50 pin 15 pin Pin Color Designation Pin Color Designation 02 W BL 03 BL W 47 W G LI high 11 W G LI high 22 G W LI 03 G W LI 48 W BR LO 09 W BR LO 23 BR W LO high 01 BR W LO high 49 W SL LOOP2 06 W SL LOOP2 24 SL W LOOPI 05 SL W LOOPI Every other pin is empty 290 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Table 44 Pinout for TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 Wire S interface on page 291 shows the pinouts for the TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 wire S interface Table 44 Pinout for TN2185 ISDN BRI 4 Wire S interface 1 of 2 Port Signal Cross connect pin Color Amphenol pin Backplane pin 1 TXT 1 1 W BL 26 102 TXR 1 2 BL W 01 002 1 3 W O 27 103 PXR 1 4 O W 02 003 2 TXT 2 5 W G 28 104 TXR 2 6 G W 03 004 PXT 2 7 W BR 29 105 PXR 2 8 BR W 04 005 3 TXT 3 9 W SL 30 106 TXR 3 10 SL W 05 006 PXT 3 11 R BL 31 107 PXR 3 12 BL R 06 007 4 TXT 4 13 R O 32 108 TXR4 14 O R 07 008 PXT 4 15 R G 33 109 PXR 4 16 G R 08 009 5 TXT 5 17 R BR 34 110 TXR 5 18 BR R 09 010 PXT 5 19 R SL 35 111 PXR 5 20 SL R 10 O11 6 TXT 6 21 BK BL 36 112 TXR 6 22 BL BK 11 012 PXT 6 23 BK O 37 113 PXR 6 24 O BK 12 01
156. See Figure 93 System cable connections for three CMC1 cabinets vertically and horizontally mounted on page 383 Figure 93 System cable connections for three CMC1 cabinets vertically and horizontally mounted C indmin10 KLC 083002 Figure notes 1 TDM LAN bus terminators installed on 2 Vertical TDM LAN bus cable List 8 a 3 Horizontal TDM LAN bus cable List 9 8100 Installation and Upgrades 383 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install CMC1 main distribution frame MDF and external modem Install CMC1 main distribution frame MDF and external modem Install the MDF on CMC1 A WARNING The optional MDF is a special 110 cross connect field that is smaller than the standard 110 cross connect hardware Do not install standard 110 hardware inside the right panel NOTE The depth of any equipment installed inside the right panel must not exceed 2 5 inches 6 3 cm or the right cover panel will not fit over the right panel The optional MDF represents the trunk auxiliary field Mount the optional MDF
157. Slot 9 Building 5 Information outlet 4 Label the cables as required using the supplied labels Label code number 220A comcode 103970000 contains every required label 398 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Set ringing option for CMC1 Set ringing option for CMC1 Figure 99 Selection of ringing option evdmrin2 KLC 050901 Figure notes 1 Attachment lever 2 Ringing option switch and setting label Note Look at the label on the side of the power supply to see how to set the switch S8100 Installation and Upgrades 399 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Set ringing option for CMC1 Figure 100 TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate uu In Use Maj Alarm Min Alarm Clock am Do Not Remove When In Use e Service Access Emergency Transfer On Auto Off e Complete Shutdown mm E Do Not Remove Board Unitl Shutdown Is Complete kdf2314 LJK 090501 Figure notes 1 PCMCIA slots 5 PCMCIA in use LED 2 RedLED 6 Emergency Transfer switch 3 Green LED 7 Shutdown complete LED Safe to pull board when 4 AnherLED green LED is on 8 Shut down switch Gracefully shuts down system 400 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Identify a
158. Stop the Subagent E Home The current community strings are shown in the following table Administer System User Services Community String Priviledge public ReadMIB Download Software back AVAYA 4 Click Back to return to the Configure Community Strings page 5 To add a community string Click the add an entry option b Enter the value in the Input the community string field Specify access permission by clicking the Read or ReadWrite options d Click the Submit button 6 Todelete a community string Click the delete an entry option b Enter the value in the Input the community string field Click the Submit button Start and stop SNMP You can start and stop SNMP by using a bash command or the web interface To start SNMP using a bash command start a bash session and enter start snmp To stop SNMP using a bash command start a bash session and enter stop snmp S8100 Installation and Upgrades 217 April 2004 System initialization Administer SNMP To start and stop SNMP using the web interface 1 From the 58100 System Administration page click SNMP Agent Administration The following page displays a Configure Community Strings a Start Stop the Subagent Configure Trap Destinations Home Administer System User Services Download Software 2 Click Start Stop the Subagent The following page displays Configure Trap Destinati
159. Switch Name 581 DO S witch This name will appear in amp vaya Site Administration windows to represent this switch It does not have any effect on the actual switch m Shared Systems Local System C Shared System Cancel Help S8100 Installation and Upgrades 267 April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Configure Avaya Site Administration A 00 10 Un 10 11 12 13 14 Enter a name in the Switch Name field As a technician configuring Avaya Site Administration on your laptop use a generic name as you will be able to use this connection item for every S8100 machine connected over the PCMCIA physical connection Click Next The connection type dialog displays Regardless of the physical connection used local monitor keyboard mouse PCMCIA RAS modem or customer LAN the connection type is always a Network connection Click the Network connection radio button Click Next The Network Connection IP Address dialog displays Enter the IP address used to connect to the 58100 Click Next The Network Connection Port Number dialog displays Port For the port number ALWAYS use port 23 Click Next The Network Connection Timeout Parameters dialog displays Leave the default values for the timeout parameters Click Next The login type dialog displays Click the I want to login manually each time radio button Click Next The switch summary dialog displays Check the information u
160. T 4 E 4 PXT 4 5 4 LT 4 LO TX 8 T 12 24 PXR 4 M 4 PX4 4 S1 4 LR 4 R 8 R 12 25 T 5 TS TS T 5 T 5 GND T 9 T 13 26 R 5 R 5 R 5 R 5 R 5 C 5V R 9 R 13 27 TXT 5 1 5 5 92 9 BT 5 T 10 T 14 28 TXR 5 R1 5 TXR 5 SZ1 5 BR 5 R 10 R 14 29 PXT 5 E 5 PXT 5 S 5 5 T 11 T 15 30 PXR 5 M 5 PXR 5 S1 5 LR 5 C RST R 11 R 15 31 T 6 T 6 T 6 T 6 T 6 T 12 T 16 32 R 6 R 6 R 6 R 6 R 6 R 12 R 16 33 TXT 6 T1 6 TXT 6 SZ 6 BT 6 RDATA T 17 34 TXR 6 R1 6 TXR 6 SZ1 6 BR 6 TDATA R 17 35 PXT 6 E 6 PXT 6 S 6 LT 6 TRSYNC T 18 36 PXR 6 M 6 PXR 6 S1 6 LR 6 GRD R 18 37 T 7 T 7 T T T7 SCLK T 19 38 R 7 R 7 R 7 R 7 R 7 R 19 39 TXT 7 TUI TXT 7 SZ 7 BT 7 T 20 40 TXR 7 R1 7 TXR 7 SZ1 7 BR 7 R 20 41 PXT 7 E 7 PXT 7 S 7 LT 7 GRD T 13 T 21 42 PXR 7 M 7 PXR 7 S1 7 LR 7 R 13 R 21 43 T 8 8 8 8 8 C_PRES T 14 T 22 44 R 8 R 8 R 8 R 8 R 8 R 14 R 22 45 TXT 8 T1 8 TXT 8 52 8 BT 8 T 15 T 23 46 TXR 8 R1 8 TXR 8 571 8 BR 8 DC2_DATA R 15 R 23 2of3 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 289 April 2004 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Table 42 Lead designations for port circuit packs 3 of 3 TN742 B TN747B TN760 B TN793 Cross TN753 TN760C TN763 TN767B TN746 B TN2793 connect TN769 TN754 TN760D TN763B TN464GP TN2183 TN2224 B pin TN2147 TN726 TN2209 TN762 B TN763C TN735 TN2207 TN2215 TN2214 47 PXT8 E8 PXT 8 5 8 LT 8 LI RX T 16 T24 48 PX
161. T Line TN735 Right Radio Controller TN789 Right ISDN BRI 4 Wire TN556C D Right S T NT Line A Law tw744p 2 of 2 106 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Sc vc VC OZ 6 8 ZL 9L GL VL EL C iL OL 6 8 2 9 S V C Y 6622v0 SMA 2J99JpIw Lsa jeuueyd jeyBig Hod Bojeuy Hod jeyBig Hod Install and cable a G600 cabinet Bojeuy Hod Install equipment room hardware for G600 Hod jey6iq aia xod eur Hod O2 Bojeuy Hod BuljeuBis Wea Hod Figure 42 Example cross connect field s patch panel connections GZ vc OC 6L 8 ZL 9L GL VL EL CL OL 6 8 29 S v C Y yuna aul LAW Hod 107 current protectors must be either UL listed or it protection current protection are required Sneak line or terminal installation Both over voltage protection lightning power induction and so premises Circul Protection from hazardous voltages and currents is required for every off premises out of building trunk CSA certified or must comply with local safety standards forth and sneak 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Off Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Sneak current protectors must have a maximum rating of 350 mA and a mini
162. TXR 3 PXT TXT R PXT 4 PXR 5 R PXT 6 PXR TXR PXR 7 48VDC 48 VDC 48 VDC 8 GRD GRD GRD circuit 4 wire digital 2 wire digital 4 wire BRI Trunk Analog line Data Line pack 8 ports 16 or 24 ports Side 16 or 24 ports PX PBX transmit T Tip A TX Terminal transmitR Ring B S8100 Installation and Upgrades 129 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install the BRI terminating resistor Install the BRI terminating resistor The resistors balance the cable plant between the receiver and the transmitter on the interface When using the TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface circuit pack use an NT1 A terminating resistor is always required near the terminal when the BRI S type interface circuit pack TN556 BRI 4 Wire S NT Line circuit pack is used see Z5ESS Switch Integrated Services Digital Network Customer Premises Planning Guide 533 700 100 The resistor is built into the NT1 and can be 1 of 3 values depending on the configuration and the distance from the NT1 to the ISDN terminal The NT1 controls the resistor s value if needed place a terminating resistor adapter near the terminal and in the satellite closet or work location Ay DANGER The 440A4 terminating resistor and 110RA1 12 terminating resistor block are UL listed Most new installations are the 110RA1 12 terminating resistor block Observe the following installation instructions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install te
163. TY AUDIX subscriber Download Avaya Site Administration Start an Avaya Site Administration session Administer SNMP Configure SNMP trap destinations Configure SNMP community strings Start and stop SNMP Schedule backups Add a scheduled backup INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Initial administration tasks View the Feature Options window Change number of administered remote users Administer networking channels 196 197 197 198 198 199 199 199 200 201 201 202 203 205 207 207 208 208 208 208 211 213 213 214 216 217 219 219 221 221 223 224 225 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Change local machine s information Change a local machine s profile Complete the Local Machine Administration window Add a remote machine Complete the Digital Machine Administration window via web browser Complete the Machine Profile screen for the remote machine via AUDIX Perform a full remote update Reset automatic deletion of nonadministered remote users View remote extensions 5 Upgrade and repair procedures Replace a TN795 Processor circuit pack Inventory existing features on the pre R10 switch and obtain a license file Replacing a TN795 with a TN2314 Replace the TN2314 Processor circuit pack Replace the hard disk Download firmware to port circuit packs 6 Hardware additions Add circuit packs Add IP trunk Add remote office Add C LAN functional
164. UDIX field appears Ensure that this field is set to n 10 Ensure that LWC Reception is set to none 11 Press F7 to go to the next page of the form Page 3 of the Hunt Group form displays add hunt group next Page 3 of 10 HUNT GROUP Group Number 4 Group Extension 2900 Group Type ucd mia Member Range Allowed 1 200 Administered Members min max 0 0 Total Administered Members 0 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Ext Name Ext Name 1 2001 14 2 2002 15 3 2003 16 4 2005 17 5 2005 18 6 2006 19 7 2007 20 8 2008 21 9 22 18 23 11 24 12 25 13 26 D m 3 S z a 3 gt 5 o 12 the extensions of the 8 stations you entered before 13 Press to submit the changes 206 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization Change coverage path 1 At the SAT or Avaya Site Administration window type add cov pa 2 The Coverage Path form displays add coverage path 2 Page 1 of 1 COVERAGE PATH Coverage Path Number 2 Hunt after Coverage n Next Path Number Linkage COVERAGE CRITERIA Station Group Status Inside Call Outside Call Active n n Busy y Don t Answer y y Number of Rings 3_ A11 n n DND SAC Goto Cover y COVERAGE POINTS Terminate to Coverage Pts with Bridged Appearances Pointi h4 Point2 Point3 Point Point5 Point6 2 Ensuret
165. WIDE PARAMETERS Switch Name Devo Emergency Numbers Internal XXXXXX External XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX No License Incoming Call Number XXXXX MALICIOUS CALL TRACE PARAMETERS Apply MCT Warning Tone n MCT Voice Recorder Trunk Group SEND ALL CALLS OPTIONS Send All Calls Applies to station Auto Inspect on Send All Calls n UNIVERSAL CALL ID Create Universal Call ID UCID n UCID Network Node ID T J 2 Goto page 4 In the Emergency Numbers Internal field optional type a valid extension up to 5 digits Inthe Emergency Number External field required type a 21 digit dialpad valid character string that can include trunk access codes The default for this field is 911 4 Inthe No License Incoming Call Number field optional type a valid extension up to 5 digits 5 Press Enter to save the changes Alerts notifications A mismatched or missing license file generates these alarms or signals Major alarm LIC ERR and NO LIC generated in the Hardware Error Log and Alarm Log see Alarming strategy Warning message at SAT login see Log in warning messages Lights an administered feature button see Feature button assignments Test alarm call out The following procedures are to be used to test alarming on 58100 NOTE If testing remotely from the Technical Service Center TSC you must do the rasdrop command before doing any of the alarm tests The rasdrop command forces a modem disconne
166. Y server switches You must do this before a valid license can be created FET produces an output file which is used by the Remote Feature Activation RFA to populate the system record with existing feature settings to support an upgrade to R10 or higher This file containing existing switch configuration and the SAP order for the R10 or higher upgrade information together produces a valid license If the switch has been upgraded to R10 or higher do not use FET Only asingle FET output file can be imported for an individual system record FET supports V4 to R9 DEFINITY server releases Use the FET only when RFA cannot contact the switch remotely Any customer may use this tool to capture their switch configuration and email the output file to the account team for the completion of a license The FET and instruction on how to use it are available at http www avaya com services rfa Here is a summary of the steps to use FET 1 UR Ww Begin a transaction record in RFA Capture the transaction record Open and run FET Input transaction record Store encrypted file produced by FET in local PC Go to RFA and complete your transaction record in order to create a license Obtain the license and password files Perform the procedures in this section to obtain license and password files from the RFA web site RFA information requirements for new installations 1 Your personal Single Sign On SSO for the
167. a ProLogix cabinet The cabling is also similar except for the Processor Interface cable multileg cable Do not access applications such as Communication Manager until installation and cabling of the cabinet are finished Your configuration can consist of an 58100 Media Server with 1 2 or 3 G600 Media Gateways This chapter is organized as follows Section I S8100 with a G600 installation on page 72 Site requirements on page 72 Check customer s order on page 73 Correct shipping errors on page 73 e Unpack and inspect on page 74 e Install and cable a G600 cabinet on page 79 Check AC power and ground for G600 on page 86 Cable a G600 system on page 92 e Install G600 patch panels and external modem on page 98 Install equipment room hardware for G600 on page 100 Setringing option for G600 on page 111 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 71 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Section S8100 with a G600 installation Section II Install telephones and make auxiliary connections on page 113 Install and wire telephones and other equipment on page 113 Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections on page 127 Install the BRI terminating resistor on page 130 Install multipoint adapters on page 133 Install off premises station wiring on page 136 Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones on page 141 Connect
168. a local machine s profile on page 226 3 Click Save The system updates the information and displays a confirmation message Add a remote machine If you want to enable users on the local machine to exchange messages with AUDIX users on another machine you must provide information to the local machine about the remote machine NOTE The AUDIX system accepts only 1 local machine Do not attempt to add a second local machine Use the instructions in this section only to add remote machines 230 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Complete the Digital Machine Administration window via web browser INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information To enter information for connecting to the remote machine 1 Startat the S8100 home page and select Administer System AUDIX Networking gt Administrative Menu Remote Machine Administration Digital Machine Administration 2 Onthe Digital Machine Administration screen click Add New Machine The system displays the Digital Machine Administration window Digital Machine Administration Machine Ts Connection TPIP Name type IP Address m 1 stat 2S9tat 39tat Message Transmission Schedule hh mm 00 00 23 59 i End Interval nn End Interval n End Interval E C Send Multimedia Messages ves s Machine INTUITY 4 0 or Later v
169. able the feature enter y on the local Machine Profile screen and on the appropriate remote Machine Profile screens on this local system If enabled a network connection that originated from this local AUDIX system is allowed to turn around after the local AUDIX system has sent all of its network data to any remote machine The remote machine may then return update information voice mail and status on the same connection 6 When you finish updating the local machine s information press F3 Enter to save the information in the system database The cursor returns to the command line and the system displays the following message Command Successfully Completed 7 Enter exit or another administrative command S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 229 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information Complete the Local Machine Administration window 1 Start at the S8100 home page from the web browser and select Administer System gt AUDIX Networking Administrative Menu Local Machine Administration The Local Machine Administration window displays Local Machine Administration Connection Type TCP IP Local Machine Name drryon1 Address 135 9 181 44 address Password aenveri Cancel 2 Change the password if necessary You cannot change the value in any fields except the Password field To change other values see Change
170. ablished See Appendix H Installation connectivity quick reference 1 On the laptop click Start Run from the Windows task bar The Run dialog displays Type the name of program folder or document and Windows will open it for you Open tenet 192 11 13 6 x Iv Bun in Seperate Memory Space Cancel Browse 2 Enter telnet lt 8100 IP Address If you are connected directly to the RJ45 service jack on the TN2314 use 192 11 13 6 for the IP address If you are on the customer LAN use the IP address of the 58100 server Click OK A Telnet session opens on your desktop NOTE There are 2 different scenarios depending on whether the license file has already been installed license file is installed you are prompted for your login and password The only valid login is lucent3 Enter lucent3 and continue to step 3 Connect Edit Terminal Help Login lucent3 Password B 166 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 3 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Access methods b Ifthe license file is installed use any valid Lucent login See Logins for the 58100 on page 172 for a list of valid logins You will receive a challenge response instead of a password prompt as shown in the following figures Enter the response number and continue to step 3 Connect Edit Terminal Help Login lucent3 challenge 080 5703 Product ID 7000000000 Response Once the Lucent Access
171. achine Profile screen and on the Local Machine Administration window NOTE If you change a local machine s profile inform every remote network administrator of the changes Change a local machine s profile 1 Start at the AUDIX command prompt screen 2 Enter change machine at the enter command prompt The system displays the local machine s Machine Profile screen page 1 Rctiue Alarms MmwA change machine MACHINE PROFILE Machine Name drmid10 Type local Location local Voiced Name Extension Length 5 Voice ID 0 Default Community 1_ ADDRESS RANGES Prefix Start Ext End Ext Warnings 36000 37999 1 2 3i 5 6 T 8 9 0 enter command change machine Complete the fields on this screen using the information from Table 29 Field definitions page 1 of Machine Profile screen on page 227 NOTE The Machine Name Type Location Extension Length and Voice ID fields are display only and cannot be changed except via the web page 226 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information Table 29 Field definitions page 1 of Machine Profile screen 1 of 2 Field Valid input Procedure Description Machine Name Display only Displays the local machine s Machine Name This value comes from the network settings in Wi
172. acket Gateway No TN748B C D Tone Detector No TN750B Announcement No TN755 B Neon power unit No TN756 Tone Detector Generator No TN765 Processor Interface No TN768 Tone Clock No TN772 Duplication Interface No TN775 B C Maintenance No 1 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades 103 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 104 Table 6 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules 2 of 2 Apparatus code Name Allowed TN776 Expansion Interface No TN777B Network Control No TN778 Packet Control No TN780 Tone Clock No TN787F G H J Multimedia Interface No K TN788B Multimedia Voice Conditioner No TN790B Processor No TN792 Duplication Interface No TN794 Network Control Packet Interface NetPkt No TN798B Processor No TN801 LAN Gateway Interface No TN1648 B System Access Maintenance No TN1650B Memory No TN1654 DS1 Converter T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel No TN1655 Packet Interface No TN1656 Tape Drive No TN1657 Disk Drive No TN2182 B Tone Clock Tone Detector and Call Classifier No TN2198 ISDN BRI 2 Wire U Interface No TN2202 Ring Generator No TN2210 Tone Generator No TN2214 B Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Category B only No TN2215 Analog Line 16 Port 2 Wire Category B only No TN2238 ATM Trunk Interface multimode No TN2301 Survivable Remote Logic Switch No TN2306 ATM Interface single
173. ades 315 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Perform backup 27 Expand the CD ROM drive by clicking on the in front of it 28 Click down using the on the following folder icons 29 30 31 32 33 34 Us eng Cas span French c German Lat span setup exe Click the setup exe icon In the Language Installation screen select the CD ROM drive as the Source and the D drive as the Destination Click the language to be added NOTE The system already has Us eng and can have up to three languages installed Click Add Click Install On the screen that says the installation was successful click OK The languages are now installed and can be used Perform backup Backup procedures prevent loss of data due to system errors Backups can be either immediate or scheduled You can backup data to either the LAN or the PCMCIA flash card from the command line and web browser NOTE Avaya strongly recommends that you schedule backups to more than one destination For example create one schedule to backup translations to a PCMCIA flash card and another schedule to backup to a different location for each day of the week on a remote hard disk drive on the LAN To backup to a flash card first insert a PCMCIA card into the free slot on the TN2314 circuit pack For alternative backup obtain a network location from the customer 316 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Per
174. agraph 68 316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U S can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site http www avaya com support All Avaya media servers and media gateways are compliant with FCC Part 68 but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at http www part68 org by conducting a search using Avaya as manufacturer European Union Declarations of Conformity CE Avaya Inc declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the CE Conformit Europe nne mark conforms to the European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999 5 EC including the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC This equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface BRI and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface PRI and subsets thereof in CTR12 and CTR13 as applicable Copies of these Declarations of Conformity DoCs can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site http www avaya com support Japan This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Inform
175. ame for this remote machine entered on the Digital Machine Administration window Type Display only Displays the machine type for this remote machine entered on the Digital Machine Administration window Location Display only Displays the location remote digital Voiced Name y yes The Voiced Name field contains an n until you record a n no name for the machine This field automatically changes to y when you record a name for the machine Extension Length An integer from 3 to 10 Enter the length of extensions on the local system The value you enter must match the extension length in your dial plan Voice ID Display only Displays a system assigned identifier that you must use to identify the machine if you decide to record machine names Default Aninteger from 1 If you have administered your system to use community Community to 15 sending restrictions enter the default community number for your user population Prefix 0 21 Enter the prefix digits A user enters the prefix before the alphanumeric remote user s extension when addressing voice messages characters To simplify this task use a short descriptive prefix The total length of the prefix plus the extension must not exceed 25 characters The system uses the prefix only to identify users It is not used for dialing out so it does not need to match an area code or office code The following are examples of possible prefixes No prefix
176. anager and is supported in the Avaya G600 and CMC1 Media Gateways Sanity Keeper See Global Sanity Keeper GSK on page 408 SAP Avaya s ordering system for products and services serial number swap outs There is an RFA process to update the system record and issue a new license file when hardware is swapped out You must have a valid license file installed because it must match the information on the new processor SID System identification number provided when a system record is created by RFA This number is unique and static single carrier cabinet A combined cabinet and carrier unit that contains one carrier See also multileg cable also called an octopus cable or a splitter cable on page 411 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR This software feature transmits detailed information about every incoming and outgoing call on specified trunk groups through a switch processing element SPE port to an external output device that logs the data SMDR is one facet of the more general call detail recording CDR capability switch Any kind of telephone switching system See also communications system on page 407 switch processing element SPE A complex of circuit packs processor memory disk controller and bus interface cards mounted in a PPN control carrier The SPE serves as the control element for that PPN and optionally for one or more EPNs system administrator The person who maintains overall custome
177. and Upgrades 119 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Figure 52 3 and 4 pair modularity 9 9 26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 B 2 27 3 a 3 3 1 1 o 2 4 4 4 3 4 28 5 5 5 5 1 L 3 6 6 T 6 1 or rz 7 1 T 1 E widf3pm RPY 012098 Figure notes Port circuit pack 5 Output from information outlet 4 pair 25 pair connector pins 3 pair modularity modularity MDF pins 3 pair modularity Voice or data terminal pins Adjunct power U N m Input to information outlet 4 pair modularity Adjunct power connections Figure 53 Example adjunct power connections on page 121 shows typical connection locations for adjunct power 120 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Figure 53 Example adjunct power connections Figure notes cydmapwr EWS 052898 1 Typical display telephone 8 Station side of MDF or patch panel N 400B2 adapter NA Un UQ Information outlet modular jack 12 4 pair D Inside Wire DIW cable Individual power supply such as 9 100 patch cord or jumpers 1151B not used if item 14 is used 10 System side of MDF or patch panel 11 25 pair cable to Digital Line circuit pack Equipment room 13 Satellite lo
178. and cable a CMC1 cabinet Cable a CMC1 system Cable a CMC1 system Install Processor Interface cable and TDM LAN bus terminators Figure 91 CMC1 system s cable connections cadm2mds KLC 083002 Figure notes 1 TDM LAN bus terminators installed on 2 Processor Interface cable slot 2 the TDM LAN bus pin fields 1 Install the TDM LAN bus terminators on the TDM LAN bus pin fields Connect the Processor Interface cable to the slot 2 connector behind the cabinet See Figure 91 CMCI system s cable connections on page 381 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 381 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Cable a CMC1 system Cable 3 cabinet CMC1 system Vertically mounted system 1 Route the TDM LAN bus cables through the cable trough See Figure 92 System cable connections for three CMC1 cabinets vertically mounted on page 382 Figure 92 System cable connections for three CMC1 cabinets vertically mounted cadm3trm KLC 083002 Figure notes 1 TDM LAN bus terminators installed on 2 Vertical TDM LAN bus cable List 8 the open TDM LAN bus pin fields 382 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Cable a CMC1 system Vertically and horizontally mounted system 1 Route the TDM LAN bus cables through the cable trough
179. and ending numbers for example 0000 9999 starting and ending range for a 4 digit extension length NOTE Check the Dialplan Analysis Table for the correct extension lengths To set up stations for INTUITY AUDIX ports 1 Atthe SAT or Avaya Site Administration window enter add sta number where number is the station you want to use for the first INTUITY AUDIX port The Station form displays f station 2001 Page lof 4 UN STATION Extension 2001 Lock Messages n BCC 0 Type Security Code TN 1 Port Coverage Path 1 COR 2 Name Coverage Path 2 COS 5 Hunt to Station STATION OPTIONS Loss Group 2 Personalized Ringing Pattern 1 Data Module n Message Lamp Ext 2017 Speakerphone 2 way Mute Button Enabled y Display Language english Media Complex Ext IP SoftPhone n Remote Office Phone n xe A 2 2500 in the Type field 3 Type 01A1201 in the Port field This is a virtual port used to communicate between Communication Manager and INTUITY AUDIX 4 Typeaname in the Name field 5 Enterthe correct COR and COS S8100 Installation and Upgrades 203 April 2004 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization 6 Press F7 to go to the next page Page 2 of the Station form displays f station next Page 2 GE GN STATION FEATURE OPTIONS LWC Reception msa spe LWC Activation n Coverage Msg Retrieval n LWC Log Ext
180. and the hardware for mounting NOTE The following plywood dimensions account for the extra space needed to install the panels on each side of the cabinet The cabinet is 24 5 inches 62 2 cm wide and each panel is 12 inches 30 5 cm wide Single cabinet installation 1 Install a 34 inch 2 cm thick sheet of 2 x 4 foot 0 6 x 1 2 m plywood horizontally onto the wall See Figure 80 Left panel used as mounting template on page 366 2 Ensure that the top of the plywood is at least 54 inches 1 37 m from the floor Two vertically mounted cabinets 1 Install a 34 inch 2 cm thick sheet of 4 x 8 foot 1 2 x 2 4 m plywood vertically onto the wall See Figure 82 Typical vertical 3 cabinet installation on page 368 Two horizontally mounted cabinets 1 Install 2 34 inch 2 cm thick sheets of 2 x 4 foot 0 6 x 1 2 m plywood horizontally onto the wall See Figure 83 Typical 3 cabinet installation on page 360 2 Position the 2 sheet of plywood to the right of the 1 sheet Three vertically mounted cabinets 1 Install a 34 inch 2 cm thick sheet of 4 x 8 foot 1 2 x 2 4 m plywood vertically onto the wall See Figure 82 Typical vertical 3 cabinet installation on page 368 Three horizontally mounted cabinets 1 Install 2 34 inch 2 cm thick sheets of 2 x 4 foot 0 6 x 1 2 m plywood horizontally onto the wall See Figure 83 Typical 3 cabinet installation on page 369 2 Position the 3 sheet of
181. anufacturer s instructions country specific 100 200 V AC 50 60 Hz receptacles Table 2 Circuit breakers for AC powered cabinets Cabinet s type Circuit breaker s size Rack mounted cabinet 120 VAC 60 Hz 15A Rack mounted cabinet 240 VAC 50 Hz 10A Check customer s order 1 Check the customer s order and the shipping packing lists to confirm that all equipment is included 2 Report missing equipment to an Avaya representative Check the system s adjuncts and report any damage according to local shipping instructions Correct shipping errors 1 Red tag any defective or over shipped equipment and return it according to instuctions from National Parts 2 Direct any short shipped reports to National Parts Contact the appropriate location for specific instructions For a streamlined implementation call 1 800 772 5409 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 73 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Unpack and inspect Unpack and inspect 74 AX DANGER Use lifting precautions An empty G600 weighs 35 39 Ibs 15 8 17 6 kg Verify the equipment received See Figure 24 Equipment packed with a single G600 cabinet on page 75 Actual equipment may vary in appearance and may ship in separate packages Equipment comcodes are listed in Table 3 Comcodes for equipment used with G600 on page 77 Before mounting the G600 remove the door by opening and then lifting it straight up and off the hi
182. ard Use the Online Help for the procedures to establish a switch media server record Use the IP address of the media server and port 5023 To start Avaya Site Administration click Start Programs Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration supports a terminal emulation mode which is directly equivalent to SAT command interface Avaya Site Administration also supports a whole range of other features including the GEDI and Data Import For more information see the Online Help Guided Tour and Show Me accessed from the Avaya Site Administration Help menu Configure Avaya Site Administration Add an When Avaya Site Administration is initially installed on a client machine it needs to be configured to communicate with both Communication Manager and the voice mail applications INTUITY AUDIX on the 8100 G600 CMC 1 platform When it runs initially after downloading Avaya Site Administration asks if it should create a new entry for the switch To create new entries for the switch and voice mail system follow these procedures e Add an 58100 switch administration item on page 267 e Add S8100 voice mail administration item on page 268 S8100 switch administration item 1 Click file gt new Switch A screen similar to the following displays Add Switch Enter the name of the switch You can make this name up or you can use the name that your organization has already given to this system
183. art Run type CMD and then click OK to open a DOS window 2 Atthe CMD prompt enter the following command net user guest guest123 3 Enterthe command net user guest active NOTE The Guest account should now be enabled 4 Enterexit to close the DOS window Verify the Guest account s new setting 1 Return toggle back to the Computer Management console 2 the toolbar click the Refresh button 3 from right to update the screen s status Ef System Tods fa Event wewer E System Information E3 Performance Logs and alerts 9 0 Shared Folders Device Manager Local Users end Groups Internet Guas Account perone Launch IS Process Accour IGu Ment E lcent3 Nradnin rasoccess Ca Groups 8 f storage BS Services and Appications NOTE The Guest user s icon should not be marked a red X 3 Inthe Computer Management console s title bar click the X to close the window Share the laptop s CD ROM drive 1 At the laptop s Windows desktop double click the My Computer icon The My Computer window contains the various laptop s devices NOTE Since your laptop s CD ROM drive is normally an unshared device its icon should not be marked with a hand 2 Right click the CD ROM device and select Sharing in the help menu 3 Inthe Sharing tab of the Properties dialog Click the Share this Folder option b If desired
184. ash shell type setip name machineName Limit the machine name to 10 characters Setip allows you to enter more characters however INTUITY AUDIX only displays the first 10 characters of the machine name in its administration window Example setip name mysite NOTE After having set the machine name the setip command displays the new settings and the old settings NOTE You will also need to set the host name See Set DNS addresses and host name on page 347 346 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 GAS commands in bash setip command Set RAS IP address NOTE INADS will provide this IP address To set the RAS IP address 1 InaLAC bash shell type setip ras lt ip address gt Example setip ras 10 21 0 53 NOTE This command not only sets the RAS IP address it also starts the service Turn off RAS service if system is set up without a modem After having set the RAS IP address the setip command displays the new settings and as the old settings Set the customer s LAN DNS and WINS information Set LAN address To set the customer LAN address 1 Get the IP address of the 8100 subnet mask and default gateway addresses from the customer 2 FromaLAC bash shell run the setip cust ip addr netmask gateway The gateway address is optional but the ip address and subnet mask are required Example setip cust 155 9 162 121 255 255 255 0 155 9 162 2 After setting the customer s IP address the setip comman
185. ate the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step 2 Disable the proxy servers on your Internet Explorer 1 10 Ui d WN Open Internet Explorer Click Tools Select Internet Options Click the Connections tab Click LAN Settings Remove the check mark by Use a proxy server for your LAN Click OK Click OK again to close the Internet Options window Minimize the Internet Explorer window Step 3 Physical connection between your laptop and the TN2314 1 2 Connect a CAT 5 data cable from the PCMCIA Ethernet card on your laptop to a RJ45 coupler Connect a crossover cable from the coupler to the services jack on the faceplate of the TN2314 Step 4 Share the CD ROM and activate the guest account on your laptop Use the following instructions to share the CD ROM drive and to set the password for the guest login 1 Placethe update CD in the CD ROM drive on your laptop 2 Onyour laptop right click My computer then click Explore 3 Rightclick CD ROM drive and then click Sharing Choose the radio button next to Share this folder The default letter appears in the Share name field Record the default letter for later use Click OK to close the window You now see a small hand under the CD ROM dive icon Close the My Computer window 4 Rightclick My Computer again then click manage local users and groups 5 Openthe Users folder and highlight Guests Right click Guests and click Properties Make sure
186. ation Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may occur in which case the user may be required to take corrective actions HAULERS RISE AERIS VCCI od CESS 2 2A A TERRAE OORE AZERE CHER D BEE NSRIFILLBHVIEF eT SEIBRENSIEMHVETF To order copies of this and other documents Call Avaya Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 or 1 207 866 6701 FAX 1 800 457 1764 or 1 207 626 7269 Write Globalware Solutions 200 Ward Hill Avenue Haverhill MA 01835 USA Attention Avaya Account Management E mail totalware 9 gwsmail com For the most current versions of documentation go to the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support Checklist and Job Aids Overview Checklist and Job Aids Overview This document contains job aids for three procedures to update the Avaya S8100 Media Server software to the current release of Avaya Communication Manager Update the 8100 Using a CD on page 6 Replacing an 8100 Media Server s hard drive on page 31 Replacing an 8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 on page 38 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 5 April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD What you need before you start Update the 58100 Using a CD This Job Aid provides the steps for updating the 58100 Media Server by transferring software from a CD This procedure applies to ei
187. ation location a WP 90929 List 1 concentrator cable is used There are 8 station appearances on each of the 3 fingers of the concentrator cable See Figure 64 Connections to 24 out of building telephones on page 138 8100 Installation and Upgrades 137 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install off premises station wiring Figure 64 Connections to 24 out of building telephones 1 BE E 3 EC jj coop om 0 IH ial 240 RPY 012398 Figure notes 1 Locally engineered cables 7 Out of building analog telephones 2 Multipair protector units primary protectors with 8 Part of MDF or patch panel heat coils or equivalent with sneak current Station side white field protection 3 B25A cable 10 System side purple field 11 Cross connect jumpers 4 Concentrator cable WP90929 List 1 12 To TN2183 TN769 TN742 or 5 390A adapter TN746B Analog Line circuit pack 6 Out of building wiring Circuit protectors Both building entrances require carbon block or equivalent protection and sneak current protection Provide this protection with a 4 type protector The 4 type protector is equipped with a heat coil or a 3 type protector plus a separate sneak current protector The 4 type protector is the preferred device For installations not using primary protection always use 4 type protectors
188. ature access code FAS Facility associated signaling S8100 Installation and Upgrades 407 April 2004 Glossary 408 Feature Extraction tool FET FET is used for capturing customer features and settings for S8100 with G600 or CMC1 DEFINITY ONE or IP600 R4 to R9 switches that cannot be contacted remotely The output file from FET is used to create a license file for R10 or higher feature key words These are used to identify RFA features G600 A cabinet formerly called an RMC rack mounted cabinet which when equipped with protocol conversion hardware and software such as the 58100 Media Server is a media gateway GAS See Global Administration Subsystem GAS GEDI Graphically Enhanced DEFINITY interface It is an enhanced system access terminal SAT with a Windows look Global Administration Subsystem GAS A module that provides command line access to certain administration and maintenance functions needed by services tools and provides administration support for parameters in the 58100 system that are not otherwise provided by the S8100 applications Global Alarm Module GAM A Windows NT process that coordinates alarm reporting for the S8100 platform Its primary functions are to accept and forward alarms from the applications generate alarms for Windows NT and manage the communication links to the Operations Support Systems OSSs via the Windows NT TAPI interface Global Sanity Keeper GSK A module that ensu
189. ays the date At the cmd prompt type time and enter time using a 24 hour clock for example 73 45 then press Enter The system displays the time NOTE The technician can also do this from the laptop using the Service Access jack on the front of the TN2314 board and following the same procedure Remote dial in If the customer needs to dial in remotely they will have had to set up the 8100 Media Server with dial in permissions If this has been done perform the following steps 1 On your PC right click My Network Places and select Properties 2 Double click Make New Connection Click Next 4 Select the radio button elect the radio button Dialup to private network 5 Click Next 6 the Area code and Telephone number for the system 7 Click Next 8 Select one of the radio buttons Create this connection for all users or Only for myself 9 Click Next 10 a name for the connection in the Name window 11 Click Finish S8100 Installation and Upgrades 189 April 2004 System initialization Set up country specific call progress tones 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 In the Dial Up Networking window right click your connection icon Click Properties Select the Networking tab In the Type of Dial Up Server drop down window select PPP Windows 95 NT 4 200 Internet Under Allowed network protocols only TCP IP should be checked Click OK when finished Acc
190. backed up data to the hard drive b Click Backup amp Restore Note The Windows logins of vm sa browse e Chick Restore and NTadmin are reset to their factory defaults d Select the Source for the restore The The customer should reset these passwords and reinstall other Windows accounts they may have created Destination or Other location you entered for the backup in Step 12 e Click the Continue button Under These items will be restored from every item that was backed up to the location specified in Step d will be selected f Click the Restore button Note If you backed up AUDIX announcements in Step 12 you must do two restores After the first restore repeat the steps above using the location of the backed up AUDIX announcements for the Source in Step d 33 SDT IE Close Internet Explorer 34 SDT Open a bash shell S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Click Start Run bash 35 Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step Details 35 BS Shutdown every application Execute shutdown all 36 BS After the shutdown finishes restart every application Execute start all 37 BS Monitor the startup s progress Execute statapp 38 Verify that call processing comes into service 39 Verify that voice messaging comes into service 40 BS Telnet into the LAC window
191. bash command 177 version 177 speech synthesis adding 253 statapp bash command 348 stations connections 116 status checking system s status 187 194 LEDs on circuit packs 340 super user 306 switch name setting 309 Switch settings external modem 99 149 385 TN464 circuit pack 283 TN760 tie trunk 281 switches adding new switch configuration 267 interacting with Avaya Site Administration 262 swversion bash command 177 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Index T system cabinet installing 79 362 initialization 173 reboots 334 recovery 331 resets reasons for 333 T T1 channel service unit 119 telephone connection 113 emergency transfer 147 415 features administering 196 installing 113 pin designations 129 pinout information 129 Telnet session 166 templates for adding objects in ASA 264 button labels in ASA 265 rack mounted G600 79 wall mounted CMC1 366 terminal connections 113 terminating resistor 130 adapter 130 block 131 test call 196 TFTP server configuring 175 tie trunk adding 251 circuit pack option settings 281 connectivity 118 digital wiring 117 time setting 188 TN2181 pinout information 129 TN2224 Digital Line 288 294 TN2314 faceplate 337 LEDs 336 replacing a TN795 239 TN2793 292 TN464 option settings 283 TN750C 254 TN760 option settings 281 TN793 292 TN795 faceplate 112 400 replace the circuit pack 240 replac
192. bers administer 185 nonadministered remote users deleting 237 NT1 network interface 130 off premises circuit protection 107 394 stations 136 P password file installing 182 transfer 182 PCN Updates and Upgrades High level steps 7 PCOL trunk adding 250 pedestal for floor mounted CMC1 364 pin designations auxiliary equipment 295 to 297 circuit packs 295 to 297 pinout information auxiliary equipment 113 284 294 to 297 cables 281 circuit packs 113 284 295 to 297 port packs 129 TN2185 ISDN BRI 291 TN793 Analog line 292 connector and cable diagrams 284 Processor Interface cable 288 telephones 129 port circuit pack pinout information 129 420 power cords connecting 92 378 415 routing 92 378 415 holdover 88 373 supply LEDs 341 uninterruptible 88 373 switches cabinet 88 CMC1 373 procedures backup 316 Processor Interface cable connection 93 127 381 pinout 288 Product ID setting 185 progress tones setting up country specific 190 Q QP1413b identifying correct hard disks 401 R R300 Remote Office Communicator 244 RAS setting IP address 184 347 reboot bash command 309 331 346 348 recovery of system 331 remote machines adding digital networking 230 completing profiles 233 remote office adding 244 Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator 247 remote users digital networking 224 replacing hard disk 240 TN795 with
193. bout fullsceen mode appears click OK you can resize the Terminal Services screen to full size by pressing ctlr alt Pause A login window will open Login using lucent3 After login the 8100 Windows 2000 desktop is displayed Remotely using Avaya Site Administration 170 If a customer wishes to dial in remotely using Avaya Site Administration they must create a Windows 95 or Windows 2000 login with dialin permissions or give those permissions to an existing login They should not receive the rasaccess login password but they may receive the rasaccess IP address They require the address to set up Avaya Site Administration or web access connections to the system Dial in permissions to an existing login The system administrator can give dial in permissions to an existing login by the following procedure 1 NA WN Go to Start Programs Administrative Tools Common Click User Manager Double click an existing login that will be dialing in At the bottom of the User Properties window click the Dialin icon Select the Grant dialin permission to user and No Call Back options and click OK Click OK and again in the User Properties window Exit User Manager Creating a login for remote access The system administrator can create a login for remote access as follows 1 2 3 4 Go to Start Programs Administrative Tools Common Click User Manager On the top toolbar click User and select New User In
194. cated systems Two DS1 Tie Trunk circuit packs can exist in collocated systems A DS1 Tie Trunk circuit pack in 1 system can connect to a DSI tie trunk in another system Use a C6D cable if the distance is less than 50 feet 15 24 m If the distance is greater than 50 feet 15 24 m use a C6E cable NOTE The maximum distance between cabinets is 1310 feet 399 m DS1 tie trunks using T1 channel service unit Figure 51 Typical connections to channel service unit on page 119 shows a DS1 tie trunk connected to an external T1 channel service unit CSU An enhanced 120A2 integrated channel service unit ICSU can be used in place of an external CSU The CSU or ICSU interfaces the DS1 tie trunks with the 1 544 Mbps digital facility Contact your Avaya representative for maximum cabling distances Figure 51 Typical connections to channel service unit 0012 RBP 070297 Figure notes 1 ToDSI Tie Trunk circuit pack 5 2 C Ccable If distance is over 50 feet 15 24 m 6 Tipl TI use C6E cable 7 Ringl RI External T1 CSU or 120A2 ICSU 8 1 544 Mbps T1 interface 9 carrier 3 and 4 pair modularity Figure 52 3 and 4 pair modularity on page 120 shows 3 and 4 pair modularity from the port circuit pack to the voice or data terminal Most terminals connect to an information outlet modular jack installed at the work location 8100 Installation
195. cation Satellite site or adapter location 14 25 pair D Inside Wire DIW cable Bulk power supply such as 1145B Install at satellite location or equipment room not both Local and phantom power The attendant console s AC c maximum distance from the system is limited See Table 12 Attendant console cabling distances on page 121 Table 12 Attendant console cabling distances Enhanced 24 AWG wire 0 26 mm 26 AWG wire 0 14 mm console 302C1 Feet Meters Feet Meters With selector console Phantom powered 800 244 500 152 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 Without selector console Phantom powered 1400 427 900 274 Locally powered 5000 1524 3400 1037 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 121 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Auxiliary power The nonessential functions of an AC and its optional 26A1 or 24A1 selector console derive power from an auxiliary power source During short power outages provide auxiliary power for an AC through this cable so the console remains fully operational NOTE Only 1 console can derive auxiliary power from the system and through the auxiliary cable located in the trunk auxiliary field A console s maximum distance from its auxiliary power source is e 800 feet 244 m for a 302A1 e 350 feet 107 m for a 301B1 and 302C1 An AC can also derive auxiliary power from
196. ccounting Call accounting Call accounting systems receive Call Detail Records CDRs from an 58100 system and process the information into management reports The S8100 s software writes CDRs to a CDR file and stores it in a CDR directory The Avaya call accounting systems are widely compatible and require little maintenance even while collecting data generating reports and managing remote data collection sites Avaya provides the following call accounting products to help reduce telephone expenses optimize resources assign costs identify abuse and clearly understand telephone expenses and convey that understanding to others eCAS A totally web based call accounting system supporting general businesses with from 25 to 20 000 extensions at up to 100 locations e eCAS Lite A reduced feature version of eCAS supporting small businesses with up to 100 extensions e INTUITY Call Accounting Fully integrated on the INTUITY platform supporting small S8100 and MERLIN LEGEND customers Quantum Series A suite of telemanagement applications including the Call Master Call Accounting system Infortel for Windows Lodging Interfaces with most Property Management Systems PMS to provide PC based telemanagement for the Lodging industry Call accounting systems need full read and write permissions to access the 58100 CDR files and directories across the network Setting up call accounting access will vary depending on
197. ce Announcement over LAN VAL TN2501AP e C LAN TN799DP The P suffix designation means the circuit pack is programmable new firmware can be downloaded directly to the circuit pack See the FW DWNLD maintenance object in Maintenance for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and the Avaya 1 Media Gateways 555 233 149 for detailed instructions on downloading firmware This information is also available on the Avaya Support web site http www avaya com support 8100 Installation and Upgrades 241 April 2004 Upgrade and repair procedures Download firmware to port circuit packs 242 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions Add circuit packs O Hardware additions This chapter provides the tasks required to install equipment associated with upgrading an existing 58100 system For more information about installing adjuncts and peripheral devices see Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 116 This chapter is organized as follows Add circuit packs on page 243 Add IP trunk on page 244 Add remote office on page 244 Add C LAN functionality on page 244 Add TN464GP TN2464BP with echo cancellation on page 248 Add CO EX WATS and PCOL on page 250 Add DID trunks on page 250 Add Tie trunks on page 251 Add 1 tie and OPS on page 252 Add speech synthesis on page 253 Add Code Calling access on page 253 Multiple
198. chine Administration window 231 feature options 223 full remote update 237 initial administration 221 initial tasks 222 local machine information 226 networking channels 225 number of users 224 remote extensions 238 remote machine profiles 233 remote users 224 verifying purchased options 223 417 Index digital tie trunk 117 Diskeeper defragmentation software 329 disks see hard disks DNS setting customer s information 347 drives see hard disks DS1 adding service interruption 252 tie trunk 119 E echo cancellation with TN2464BP 248 with TN464GP 248 electrical connection 86 371 embedded messaging enable disable 328 maintenance impact 328 emergency transfer power panel 129 141 telephone 147 415 emulation sessions launching 269 enable disable embedded messaging 328 equipment checking 73 357 checklist 154 comcodes for CMC1 equipment 359 comcodes for G600 equipment 77 unpacking 74 unpacking CMC1 358 equipment room hardware installing 100 error messages by installation wizard 273 external modem connecting 149 installing 99 385 option settings 99 149 385 type approved 99 385 US Robotics 99 149 385 F faceplates TN2314 Processor circuit pack 337 TN795 Processor circuit pack 112 400 Feature Extraction tool 179 239 feature protection 279 FET 179 239 firmware downloading 241 floor grounds 88 372 floor mounted cabinet 364 ftp
199. cks or any component of the G600 always wear an authorized wrist ground strap connected the ground connector provided on the system s cabinet During a cabinet s installation store circuit packs so that they will not be damaged by electrostatic discharge If necessary prepare the G600 for mounting in the medial position by removing the screws on the mounting brackets moving the brackets to a position midway on the cabinet and installing the screws through the mounting bracket and into the cabinet s holes 4 Using the rack mounting guide locate a set of rack holes to be used for mounting Note the position of the upper key hole shaped slots on each rail NOTE The mounting screws holes are not evenly spaced on a 19 rack Be sure the holes selected to mount a G600 are positioned to match every mounting bracket slot on the guide See Figure 29 Checking rack s mounting holes and placing first mounting screws on page 83 A WARNING Installing the top G600 higher than shoulder level on the rack is not recommended 5 Insert two mounting screws into the left and right rails of the rack in the holes noted in step 4 Leave enough space between the screw head and the rail surface to accept the mounting bracket See Figure 29 Checking rack s mounting holes and placing first mounting screws on page 83 6 Liftthe empty G600 and slide the key hole slots on the mounting brackets onto the two mounting screws DANGER Use
200. configure the S8100 system as a node on the customer s network see Set up customer s LAN parameters on page 177 If the 58100 system is configured as a node on the customer s LAN use a customer PC configured on the LAN to access it Connection via RAS modem dial up NOTE This connection is not used for installations or upgrades The RAS dial up connection method enables Avaya services related personnel INADS or customers to dial in remotely using a modem On 58100 systems the Windows 95 or Windows 2000 Remote Access Service RAS is listening for incoming calls from COMI to which a modem is connected Use the standard Windows 95 dial up networking operation to set up this connection from a Services laptop computer as per the following procedure NOTE In Windows 2000 use the Make a New Connection wizard to complete this procedure Just follow the on screen instructions S8100 Installation and Upgrades 163 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections 164 Create a connection icon If a connection icon already exists proceed directly to Click OK on page 164 Otherwise follow these steps 2 lt lt UR UC 12 13 14 15 16 Double click Make New Connection on the Network Neighborhood Dialup Server Control Panel Enter the name of the computer you are dialing and select the appropriate modem Click Next Enter the area code and phone number of the system
201. ct after 1 minute and gives you time to execute the alarm test commands After each test has been run the Field Services Organization FSO technician will have to go to the ART web site to verify each alarm has been received 186 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Check system s status Communication Manager alarm test 1 Access the 8100 from the SAT 2 At the command line type test inads 3 Press Enter INTUITY alarm test 1 Access the bash from the LAC 2 Atthe prompt type logsend tTST 3 Press Enter This will result in an INTUITY AUDIX alarm that should retire within a half hour Windows 2000 server alarm test 1 Access the bash from the LAC 2 Atthe prompt type wrntevent GAM 0 9991 Press Enter NOTE This causes a Major GAM alarm After the system has called out enter cleargamalarm all at the BASH prompt to retire the alarm This alarm also causes a Maestro case to be generated that will need to be closed by the INADS group Resolve alarms To resolve any alarms Refer to Maintenance for Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and 1 Media Gateways 555 233 149 Check system s status See Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands on page 343 for information about bash commands that are used in installation and administration 1 Open a LAC bash shell 2 To verify system health execute d1stat and alarmstat Enable customer logins See A
202. ct from File 1 1 entry under Protocol Device used to collect call records 3 Ensure that a format has been set NOTE 8100 should be set to output 24 word unformatted call records 4 Click Configure Settings 5 Enter the drive letter of the previously mapped drive to the 8100 server along with the file s name cas in for example F cas in 6 Ensure that a proper polling interval is displayed the default of 60 seconds is usually fine then click OK to save the settings 7 Still in the Configuration Call Collection Interface dialog ensure that the enable from to entry is set to the future 8 Click Close The interface will restart Verify call record collection 198 To verify call record collection click the protocol icon in the taskbar for the site being administered and wait for call record collection Access Call Processing Status for CASW and enable rating only if the database has been initialized and the customer is ready to process calls If proper call records are being collected and processed you have successfully administered call record collection for this PBX and site NOTE There is no error checking from call accounting of the call collection path and no message log entries of any access errors If call collection fails check the network administration drive mapping shared CDR folder and path entries for resolution S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Call a
203. cted to TN742 TN746B TN2183 or TN769 Analog Line circuit packs can be installed out of building The maximum distance from the system s cabinet to the out of building voice terminal is 6000 feet 1828 8 meters using 24 AWG 0 26 mm wire 136 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install off premises station wiring Figure 63 Connections for one to eight out of building analog telephones gt m 4 nnon poog 4 Oooo BBBB crdfobt RPY 012398 Figure notes 1 Locally engineered cables 6 Out of building analog telephones 2 Outof building wiring 7 Partof MDF or patch panel Multipair protector units primary 8 Station side white field protectors with heat coils or equivalent 9 System side purple field with sneak current protection 10 Cross connect jumpers 356A adapter B25A cabl 11 To Analog Line circuit pack TN2183 TN769 TN742 or TN746B Figure 64 Connections to 24 out of building telephones on page 138 shows the connections for up to 24 off premises analog telephones with concentrations of analog line pairs used at both buildings to minimize the off premises wiring required At the MDF jumpers must be connected between 1 row connecting block in the white field and up to 3 rows connecting blocks in the purple field At the st
204. ctrical outlet on the UPS Foran Avaya UPS connect and administer the UPS See Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections on page 127 NOTE If an Avaya UPS is wired as recommended holdover time for each power outage is 1 minute before an automatic shutdown UPS may handle any subsequent power outage based on its total battery capacity Cabinet s power switch Ay DANGER The latch acts as the DC power switch and only removes DC power from the cabinet not AC power To remove AC power pull the AC power cord from the appliance inlet See Figure 32 G600 650A power supply on page 89 88 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check AC power and ground for G600 Figure 32 G600 650A power supply 0000 evdppow LJK 102400 Connect cabinet s grounds and other grounds Follow these additional grounding requirements The approved ground wire must be green 6 AWG 40 16 mm copper stranded wire This is in addition to the ground wire in the AC power cord Bondevery approved ground at the single point ground to form a single grounding electrode system Connectthe cable as shown in Figure 33 Single cabinet G600 grounding on page 90 for a single G600 cabinet or Figure 34 2 cabinet G600 grounding on page 91 for two or three G600 cabinets S8100 Installation and Upgrades 89 A
205. cuit pack 254 APP connector information 113 284 292 295 to 297 approved grounds 87 89 372 374 ART download installation script 180 URL 180 ASA launching emulation session 269 launching voice mail administration session 270 attendant console 195 302C1 113 LEDs 339 maximum cabling distance 113 AUDIX adding subscribers 208 administration 208 AUDIX initialization check dial plan 199 checking class of service 200 dial plan 199 hunt groups 200 class of restriction 201 class of service 201 coverage plan 207 dial plan 202 hunt groups 205 test phone adding 207 415 Index auxiliary equipment pin designations 295 to 297 pinout information 113 284 294 to 297 power 129 Avaya Site Administration adding new switch configuration 267 new voice mail item 268 components 263 configuring 267 download 211 hardware configuration 262 help 265 help system 262 launching GEDI session 268 overview 259 starting sessions 213 switches 262 tasks 265 version 1 5 features 261 voice mail 262 Windows 95 98 configuration 263 backups adding a scheduled backup 219 procedures 316 scheduling 219 Web interface 319 bash commands listed 343 bit rate setting 283 BR851 B adapter 133 BRI multipoint cabling distances 135 terminating resistor 130 building steel as approved ground 87 372 button labels printing 265 printing in ASA 261 templates 265
206. current configuration CAUTION Record all the information exactly as you see in this screen You will use the setip command in Step 19 Enter the customer data using setip on page 22 to restore the data that you record Refer to the following figure for an example of the setip command executed without any parameters Figure 7 setip Def One lucenti gt setip name DEFONE cust 135 122 54 580 255 255 255 240 135 122 54 49 dns DefOne wins ras 180 21 2 81 Command succeeded No changes made 14 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step 12 Shutdown AUDIX 1 From the bash shell type shutdown Audix 2 When the bash prompt returns type statapp to verify that AUDIX has shutdown Step 13 Backing up the system Use the following steps to backup the system using a bash command 1 Verify that the PCMCIA card is in the slot of the TN2314 2 From the bash prompt type dbackup deftran defann vmnammsgtran pcmcia This dlbackup command will backup the deftran DEFINITY translations defann DEFINITY announcements and vmnammsgtran AUDIX translations names and messages to the pcmcia card Step 14 Updating the release with the CD In this section you will be using the CD ROM on your laptop to update the S8100 You will connect from your laptop to the 58100 start the desktop of the 58100 and then connect back from the 58100 desktop to t
207. d displays the new and the old settings Set DNS addresses and host name If the customer is using DNS you can set DNS information with the setip dns name domain name primary dns ip addr secondary dns ip address This sets the DNS host name domain name and the list of name server IP addresses Ex setip dns CustomerHost CustomerDomain com 155 9 1 10 155 9 15 14 After having set the customer s DNS IP address the setip command displays the old settings as well as the new settings 8100 Installation and Upgrades 347 April 2004 GAS commands in bash Other commands Set WINS addresses If the customer is using WINS you can set WINS information with the setip wins ip addr primary ip addr backup This will set the IP address of the primary and secondary IP addresses for the windows NetBios on the TCP name server Ex setip wins 155 9 145 1 155 9 145 4 After setting the customer s WINS IP address the setip command displays the new and the old settings Once you have set every appropriate settings for your location enter reboot nice to restart the system with the new settings Other commands ftpserv command The ftpserv command is executed from a console bash shell and turns on the FTP server If you attempt to ftp into the S8100 and receive a connection refused message then ftp is not running To turn on FTP enter ftpserv To turn off FTP enter ftpserv c statapp command The statapp command is used fro
208. d information on the DS1 form c Create a signaling group using the ADD SIG NEXT command If you are using FAS signaling use the 16 channel on your DS1 circuit pack as D channel for your signaling group If you are using NFAS signaling enter N in the associated signaling field List the trunk circuit pack location in the Trunk Board field f Create a trunk group by using the ADD TRUNK NEXT command 1 Complete the required information on the Trunk Group form s pages 2 Enter the port locations of the trunk members on the Trunk Group Member page Enterthe correct signaling group number 256 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions DEFINITY LAN gateway DLG Add circuit packs 1 Determine the slot assignment of the circuit packs to be added 2 Install the DSI Interface circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot Install cables Install cables from the cabinet to the MDF as required Enter added translations 1 Administer the forms listed under Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface in Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Resolve alarms 1 Examine the alarm log Resolve any alarms that may exist using Maintenance for the Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Gateway Medias 555 233 149 Save translations 1l Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation informati
209. des digital circuit switched or packet switched communications within the network and links to other ISDNs to provide national and international digital communications See also Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI and Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI The interface between a communications system and terminal that includes two 64 kbps B channels for transmitting voice or data and one 16 kbps D channel for transmitting associated B channel call control and out of band signaling information ISDN BRI also includes 48 kbps for transmitting framing and D channel contention information for a total interface speed of 192 kbps ISDN BRI serves ISDN terminals and digital terminals fitted with ISDN terminal adapters See also Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN and Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Interface ISDN PRI The interface between multiple communications systems that in North America includes 24 64 kbps channels corresponding to the North American digital signal level 1 DS1 standard rate of 1 544 Mbps The most common arrangement of channels in ISDN PRI is 23 64 kbps B channels for transmitting voice and data and 1 64 kbps D channel for transmitting associated B channel call control and out of band signaling info
210. dication of a failure that has caused critical degradation of service and requires immediate attention Major alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack logged to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if applicable MAP D Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY media gateway Hardware and firmware that converts between circuit switched and packet switched data A CMC1 cabinet with an 58100 Media Server is the media gateway formerly called DEFINITY ONE A G600 cabinet with an S8100 Media Server is the media gateway formerly called IP600 media server A processing platform running the Communication Manager which provides call control and telephony features The 58100 Media Server which is implemented on the TN2314 circuit pack can be housed in either the G600 or cabinets memory A device into which information can be copied and held and from which information can later be obtained S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Glossary minor alarm An indication of a failure that could affect customer service Minor alarms are automatically displayed on LEDs on the attendant console and maintenance or alarming circuit pack sent to the alarm log and reported to a remote maintenance facility if applicable modem A device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over telephone circuits The analog signals are c
211. download microsoft com download whistler tools 1 0 wxp en us msrdpcli exe Connect to the 58100 1 Directly connect to the S8100 s services port For details refer to Direct connection to the RJ45 service jack on page 154 2 Open the laptop s Remote Desktop Client application Inthe Remote Desktop Connection dialog type 192 11 13 6 as the server s IP address and then click Connect The S8100 s Windows application responds with the Log On to Windows dialog 4 Log into the S8100 with the proper credentials You are now at the S8100 s Windows desktop 8100 Installation and Upgrades 355 April 2004 Map CD ROM for an S8100 upgrade Map to the laptop s CD ROM drive Map to the laptop s CD ROM drive 1 At the S8100 s desktop right click the My Computer icon and then select Map Network Drive in the help menu This enables the Map Network Drive wizard see Figure 76 Map Network Drive wizard on page 356 Figure 76 Map Network Drive wizard Network Drive x Windows can help you cornect to a shared network Folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can access the folder using My Computer poo Specify the drive letter For the connection and the folder that you want to connect to Drive fu k Folder 14192 11 13 5 d X Browse Example server share Reconnect at logon Connect using a different user name Create a shortcut to a Web folder or
212. e 282 2 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the Tie Trunk circuit pack to the appropriate leads on the external tie trunk Determine names of the tie trunk leads from the manufacturer or supplier of the external trunk circuit The example in Figure 49 Analog tie trunk cross connect on page 117 shows an external tie trunk connected to a DS1 Interface circuit pack 3 Administer on the Trunk Group form See Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Digital tie trunk example Figure 50 Digital tie trunk wiring 9 9 gt O gt gt 22 lt gt dig_tie 040596 Figure notes 1 External trunk 4 LO balanced output pair 2 DSI Interface circuit pack position 1CA06 5 LI LO 6 LI balanced input pair S8100 Installation and Upgrades 117 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Before installing the DS 1 Interface circuit pack set the option switches as shown in Set TN464GP TI E1 s options on page 283 Install cross connect jumpers to connect the pins from the digital trunk circuit pack to appropriate pins on the external digital trunk Administer the DS1 Interface circuit pack on the DS1 and Trunk Group screens See Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Cable examples for tie trunk connectivity DS1 tie trunks provide 1 544
213. e displays Dial up Networking requires configuring because the list of installed modems has changed Would you like to do this now Click Yes The Remote Access Setup screen confirms that the modem is configured Test the external modem A N 278 At the SAT session type change system parameters maintenance and click Enter or Submit Ensure that the Test Remote Access Port field is set to y Type test pr maintenance and click Enter or Submit Verify that test 230 passes For more information see Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 504 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Security and copy protection Software copy protection mechanisms 10Security and copy protection This chapter provides information about software copy protection for an Avaya 58100 Media Server Software copy protection mechanisms This section provides information about software copy protection methods for the installation repair and upgrade of procedures related to the TSC COE Copying software from one machine to another is more of an issue with S8100 s Windows 2000 Server platform running the 3 primary applications DEFINITY INTUITY AUDIX and Avaya Site Administration than with a proprietary system Security measures add a level of impedance time money expertise etc to the process to discourage copying without permission The possibility exists for someone with physical acc
214. e file is uploaded a message box displays and asks whether you want to convert the file 5 Choose Yes The Convert File page displays ANNOUNCEMENT ADMINISTRATION Convert File Convert File Instructions For converting a wav file click the file and then type the new name in the box fo convert it info a usable format Home dt wav Administer Save As System The default name will be the same with i 55 extension User Services Convert Download Software Announcement Administration 6 Enter a name for the converted file and click Convert The announcements file is converted to speech format and saved in the announcements directory See Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 for information about administering CWY1 announcements 8100 Installation and Upgrades 255 April 2004 Hardware additions Add ISDN PRI Add ISDN PRI T1 North American standard This procedure describes adding a T1 line 1 Usea TN767F or TN767E or later version circuit pack to set up an ISDN PRI trunk Ensure that the dip switch on the circuit pack is set for 24 channels If you are using Facility Associated Signaling FAS 23 channels are available to be used as trunk group members Channel 24 must be used to create a signaling group for the trunk groups If you are using Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS it is possible in some instances to use all 24 channels for trunk gr
215. e installation Figure 69 Setting the neon voltage ai 1 o didmt1 KLC 053097 Call a telephone with a neon message indicator and leave a message Check for ring ping single ring pulse each time the lamp flashes approximately every 3 seconds Adjust the control clockwise in small increments until the ring ping stops Ensure that the message lamp still lights when the adjustment is finished Complete installation 1 Disconnect the laptop 2 Remove the RJ45 connector used to connect the laptop 3 Insert the flash disk 4 Setthe left and right doors of the CMC1 onto the hinge pins and close the door s The doors must be closed to prevent EMI emissions Tighten the door screws 5 For the CMC1 set the right cover panel onto the right panel and secure Do not use force 8100 Installation and Upgrades 151 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet View LEDs to determine power and fan alarm state View LEDs to determine power and fan alarm state 152 Table 24 LED and alarm conditions Use the LEDs on the front of each power unit to determine its state Condition LED status Alarm state Fan alarm Normal Red off open high Yellow on No input power Red off closed open Yellow off One or more DC Red on closed no state outputs present Yellow off Fan alarm Red on closed low Yellow off Table 24 LED and alarm conditions on page 15
216. e link allows the user to toggle between active inactive on board messaging capability When the embedded message is active a disable messaging link is present When the embedded messaging in inactive the enable messaging link is present and every web page s reference to INTUITY AUDIX messaging is removed In the active messaging state the appropriate backup restore pages display the various INTUITY AUDIX backup options whereas in the inactive messaging state the web pages are modified to not display the message related backup options Impact on maintenance 328 When INTUITY AUDIX is disabled on the system the ports on the CWY1 board become unavailable As a result maintenance is disabled for the CWY 1 board To counteract this and enable maintenance for the CWY board at least one port on the board must be administered Perform the following steps to enable maintenance for the CWY1 board when INTUITY AUDIX is disabled 1l Adda station using the next available extension For example if using the Avaya Site Administration tool click Add station and click Next Enter 141201 in the Port field Enter 2500 in the Type field Enter CWY1 Test Port in the Name field Submit the form amp Perform test port 1 1201 command and verify that the test passes 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Access Diskeeper software to defragment the disk Access Diskeeper sof
217. e mounted directly over the other flush The G600 should be installed in a well ventilated area Maximum equipment performance is achieved at an ambient temperature between 40 and 120 F 4 and 49 C for short term operation no more than 72 consecutive hours or 15 days in a year and up to 110 F 43 C for continuous operation The relative humidity range is 10 to 9596 at up to 84 F 29 C Above this maximum relative humidity decreases from 95 down to 32 at 120 F 49 C Installations outside these limits may reduce system life or affect operation The recommended temperature and humidity range is 65 to 85 F 18 to 29 C at 20 to 60 relative humidity 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check customer s order The other Environmental Considerations and System Protection requirements described in the Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager under Site Requirements apply to the G600 as well Table 1 Power sources and receptacles for AC powered cabinets Cabinet s style and power distribution unit Power sources Power input receptacles Rack mounted cabinet AC power Single phase 120 VAC 120 VAC 60 Hz NEMA 5 15R supply 650A integrated power supply source with neutral receptacle Single phase 240 VAC 240 VAC 50 Hz IEC 320 No integrated DC power supply DC source with neutral receptacle rectifiers can be used if desired follow Installations in Japan use m
218. e of the TN2314 circuit pack This chapter is organized as follows LED boot sequence on page 335 TN2314 Processor circuit pack on page 335 TN2314 Processor circuit pack s LEDs after booting on page 336 Table LED states on page 338 LED boot sequence The following describes the LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor circuit pack When power is first applied to 58100 or when the system reboots the LEDs on TN2314 circuit pack will light according to this sequence 1 RU N Every light on the TN2314 blinks in sequence scrolls from bottom to top The scrolling speed fluctuates depending on which test is being run The 1 and 2 tests run very fast The LEDs scroll quickly The 3 and 4 tests run very slowly The LEDs scroll more slowly during these tests The LEDs scroll 17 times during the core testing phase All three LEDs double blink when the tests finish Any other LEDs that are illuminated indicate an alarm or problem with 58100 For more information about alarms see Chapter 6 58100 Windows 2000 Log Events and Alarms in Maintenance for the Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 149 The emergency transfer LED is on if a reset 4 occurs or if power is cycled S8100 Installation and Upgrades 335 April 2004 LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor circuit pack s LEDs after booting The front panel
219. e the following procedures e Install the TN799DP e Test the External Connection to the LAN e Administer the TN799DP on the SAT 244 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions Add C LAN functionality Install the TN799DP To install a TN799DP C LAN circuit pack you need the following items e An unoccupied port slot e 10 BaseT Ethernet connection into your local area network e A valid unused IP addresses on your network for each C LAN circuit pack v CAUTION When adding or replacing any hardware be sure to ground yourself against electrostatic discharge ESD by wearing a grounded wrist strap NOTE The TN799DP circuit pack is hot swappable so you do not need to power down the carrier to install it From the rear of the cabinet 1 Connectthe 259A connector to the backplane connector corresponding to the TN799DP slot 2 Connect one end of the CATS cable to the 259A connector Connect the other end to the customer s network From the front of the cabinet l Insert the TN799DP circuit pack into the port slot identified earlier Administer the TN799DP on the SAT 1 change node names ip and press Enter i change node names ip Page 1 of ON i NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address clan2 135 9 167 179 default 0 0 0 0 clanl 192 168 10 21 a EN iiy In the Name and IP Address fields type a name and IP address for each PC that will be dialing into the
220. e the voltage between the neutral and ground sides of the receptacle 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check AC power and ground for G600 4 Verify that the meter reads 0 VAC If not have a qualified electrician correct the problem 5 When finished set the AC main circuit breakers to OFF Approved grounds An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance protector entrance cable shield or single point ground of electronic telephony equipment If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises the grounds must be bonded together as required in Section 250 81 of the National Electrical Code A WARNING Be sure that the G600 has a reliable earth ground connection whether the G600 is connected directly to a branch circuit or to a power distribution strip In addition the G600 requires a ground connection from the cabinet directly to an approved ground Grounded Building Steel The metal frame of the building where it is effectively grounded by 1 of the following grounds acceptable metallic water pipe concrete encased ground or a ground ring Acceptable Water Pipe metal underground water pipe at least V2 inch 1 3 cm in diameter in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet 3 m The pipe must be electrically continuous or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints plastic pipe or plastic wate
221. e you downloaded from RFA and installed on the switch will activate RTU features on system parameters customer options screen The init logon no longer controls access for activating an RTU right to use Please check to ensure that the default and optional features and capacities on the screen coincide with the customer s order To check the relationship between what was ordered and what was populated on the screen please go to the RFA information page see Go to the RFA web site on page 180 Go to the help information section of the RFA page where you will find a material code feature job aid that details the mapping between the material codes that RFA processes and the features capacities and release on the systems parameters options screen If there is a problem with the customer s order please contact the account team so they can issue another order which will generate a corrected license file from RFA S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Set country options Set country options To turn off the red alarm LEDs some of the country options must be set on the Change System Parameters Country Options screen shown in the following step 1 Enter change system parameters country options and press ENTER A screen similar to the following displays change eyetem paramotore country options SYSTEH PARAHETERS COUNTRY OPTIONS Companding Modo Mu Lau Tono Generator Set 1 40Hz PRX dial Tono
222. eceives signals from the tie trunk and the M lead transmits signals to the tie trunk To choose the preferred signaling format Table 36 Signaling formats for TN760E on page 281 and Table 37 Signaling type summary on page 281 set the switches on the TN760E and administer the port using Figure 73 TN760D Tie Trunk circuit pack component side on page 282 and Table 38 TN760E option switch settings and administration on page 282 Table 36 Signaling formats for TN760E Mode Type E amp M Type I Standard unprotected E amp M Type I Compatible unprotected Protected Type I Compatible Type I Standard Simplex Type V E amp M Type V E amp M Type V Revised Table 37 Signaling type summary Signaling type Transmit M lead Receive E lead On hook Off hook On hook Off hook Type I Standard ground battery open battery ground Type I Compatible open battery ground ground open battery Type V open battery ground open ground Type V Reversed ground open ground open 1 An open circuit is preferred instead of battery voltage 8100 Installation and Upgrades 281 April 2004 Cable pinouts Set TN760E Tie Trunk s options Figure 73 TN760D Tie Trunk circuit pack component side UNPROT i l i SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX 4 3 2 1 PROT m PORT 4 ee m
223. el 507B sneak fuse panel Sneak Current Protector 507B Figure notes 1 507B sneak current protector 3 25 pair female connector out comcode comcode 107435091 846300994 2 25 male connector in 4 220029 fuses inside panel Use a small comcode 846300994 screwdriver to pry top cover off S8100 Installation and Upgrades 395 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Each column of sneak fuse panels requires approximately 8 inches 20 cm of horizontal wall space Connector cables connect the network interface to the sneak fuse panel Also use 157B connecting blocks equipped with SCP 110 protectors for sneak current protection NOTE Sneak current protectors with a rating of 350 mA at 600 V must be UL listed for United States installations or CSA certified for Canadian installations The panel contains 2 25 pair connectors fuse removal tool and fifty 220029 sneak fuses and 2 spares Use the SCP 110 protectors with 110 type hardware and on the 507B sneak fuse panel The SCP 110 protectors can be ordered separately and installed on the 157B connecting block Fifty protectors are required per block l Install the 507B near the network interface or MDF with locally obtained 12 x 34 inch screws or equivalent Table 64 Sneak fuse connector pinout on page 396 is a pinout of the cable wiring and associated fuse numbers Tab
224. eld on both cabinets The TDM LAN bus terminators are installed on the left pin field on Cabinet A and on the right pin field on Cabinet C Install G600 patch panels and external modem NOTE The optional patch panel kit replaces standard 110A cross connect hardware If standard 110A cross connect equipment is used consult DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 Patch panels are arrays of RJ45 jacks and associated B25A cabling to accommodate 2 wire 24 port DCP analog port boards and 8 port analog trunk boards A shelf is provided to serve as a mounting surface for the external modem and other optional equipment The shelf can also be used to secure the B25A cables Install patch panels and shelf 98 Refer to Figure 40 Typical G600 s patch panel and modem installation on page 99 while performing this procedure 1 Using the supplied mounting screws mount the patch panels on the rack below processor cabinet 2 Using the supplied mounting screws mount the shelf on the rack below the patch panels 3 Attach B25A cables to the patch panels and the circuit packs amphenol connectors NOTE Connect 24 port DCP Analog circuit packs to the 24 port patch panels NOTE Connect 8 port Analog Trunk combo or DID Trunk circuit packs to either of the first two banks on the 8 port patch panel If an 8 port BRI Trunk circuit pack TN2185B is present connect it to the 3 d
225. elephone cables being protected until it reaches the cross connect nearest to the telephone system Position the unexposed telephone cables at least 12 inches 30 5 cm away from exposed telephone cables whenever possible 4 Terminate the other end to the single point ground block provided for the telephone system Connect and route the power cords 378 A WARNING The AC power cord may connect to a properly rated power distribution unit individual AC power receptacles or to a UPS See Figure 89 Routing a CMCI s AC power cord to power distribution unit on page 379 for CMC1 single cabinet routing Figure 90 Routing two 1 AC power cords to power distribution unit on page 380 for 2 cabinet routing Routing power cords for a 3 cabinet configuration is similar to routing the 2 cabinet configuration To connect and route the power cords 1 Ensure the AC load center s circuit breakers are OFF 2 Connect the cabinet to an unswitched or always on electrical outlet S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Figure 89 Routing a CMC1 s AC power cord to power distribution unit pme H UF T 0 fid
226. elp menu click Save Target As From the Save As dialog save the binary diskcheck file to a convenient folder and your chosen name on your local C drive as shown in the following figure NOTE Be sure to enter quotation marks around the file s chosen name to maintain the file s binary integrity Save in gt cal Disk m 5 SBackstreet C cPoint Documents and Settings CQDRIVERS scone Microsoft NES Online Books Microsoft Site Server mssqu7 E Multimedia Files Program Files _ RECYCLER asms ocon MyNetwork 953 Places My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 3 My Computer File name dikcheck Save as type Text Document odpm System Volume Information temp yin winpows Swutemp E piconfig txt Cancel d Click the Save button 7 Connect to the customer s S8100 system For detailed information refer to Connectivity and access to an S8100 system on page 153 402 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Identify a hard disk for PCN1413b 8 Open a CMD Command window on your laptop a Click Start Run and then type in the Run dialog b Click the OK button 9 Using the S8100 system s IP address Telnet to and log into the system NOTE Depending on your specific login credentials the system returns either the LAC or BASH prompt 10 Access the bash shell if necessary
227. em Options Click the Modems tab d Select the installed modem and click Properties e Click the Advanced tab f Click Change the Default Preferences g Inthe Compression drop down list select Disabled h Close each dialog by clicking OK and close the Control Panel window 25 SDT Open a bash shell window Click Start Run bash 26 BS Verify the software s version Type swversion Ensure that the Release number and S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 MultiVantage version number are as expected 41 Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step Details 27 BS Administer the customer s parameters that you wrote down in Step 6 using the setip command setip name lt args gt setip cust lt args gt setip dns lt args gt setip wins lt args gt setip ras lt args gt Replace each lt args gt with the corresponding parameter you recorded in Step 6 28 BS Administer the product ID and OSS productid multivantage product id lt arg gt parameters using the productid and oss productid audix product id lt arg gt commands oss lt telno gt lt retries gt lt retry_interval gt Replace each lt arg gt with the corresponding parameter you recorded from Step 15 For the OSS command enter the lt telno gt lt retries gt and lt retry_interval gt paramete
228. ement g Disk Defragmenter 3 Logical Drives Removable Storage e Services and Applications 26 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 3 Expand Local Users and Groups and click Users The following window opens Figure 21 Computer Management Users Action View e gt alm 2 Ed E Tree Names Full Name Computer Management Local j Desktech Desktech 8 Team B System Tools Event Viewer Ij smsclisveAcct amp SMSCIiSvcAccER 95 System Information IE smsclitoknac SMSCliToknAcct amp amp Performance Logs and Alerts Ij smsciitoknbo SMSCliToknLocalAcct amp gs Shared Folders BE tunkashila 45 Device Manager Bj usradmin User Administrator E Local Users and Groups 4X Users Groups E Sj Storage Disk Management Disk Defragmenter 63 Logical Drives al Removable Storage e Services and Applications 4 To add a new user click in the blank space in the right hand section then click New User The following window opens Figure 22 Add a new user window See cx User name Pete _ Full name Pete Repete Description system administrator Password Confirm password LA User must change password at next logon User cannot change password Password never expires Account is disabled oe 8100 Installation and Up
229. ement Suite NOTE Although separately available to facilitate management of an 58100 Avaya Site Administration is not included as part of the 8100 s standard software package For information about installing Avaya Site Administration see Download Avaya Site Administration on page 211 This chapter is organized as follows Avaya Site Administration overview on page 259 Interactions with switches and voice mail systems on page 262 Components of Avaya Site Administration on page 263 How Avaya Site Administration works on page 265 Avaya Site Administration help on page 265 Install Avaya Site Administration on page 266 Configure Avaya Site Administration on page 267 Add an 58100 switch administration item on page 267 Add 58100 voice mail administration item on page 268 Avaya Site Administration overview Avaya Site Administration is a general purpose system management tool that simplifies basic administration of 8100 systems with a G600 or 1 Media Gateway and INTUITY AUDIX systems Avaya Site Administration versions 1 0 and greater provide A graphically enhanced command line interface called the Graphically Enhanced DEFINITY Interface or GEDI and a terminal emulation mode for SAT administration Easy to use software with a Windows look and feel The browser contains tabbed windows menus and dockable windows The browser provides a tree view of the switches voice mail
230. enter 192 11 13 6 the IP address of the 8100 server in the IE address window Click Administer System and login using lucent3 for the login ID and password Click the Continue button when the Notice screen appears Click Login to 192 under Remote Control Terminal Services co c If an error message appears click OK S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 2 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections f Click the Connect button leave the Server window blank g Click OK if an error message appears h Login using lucent3 for the login ID and password You should now be at the 8100 Windows desktop Connect back to the laptop s CD ROM drive a On the S8100 s desktop click Start Run and type in the path to the laptop s CD ROM 192 11 13 5 lt laptop s CD ROM share name gt where laptop s CD ROM share name gt is the name you assigned to the laptop s CD ROM drive when you shared it in the previous procedure for example Laptop CD ROM b You should now have access to the contents of the laptop s CD ROM You can now copy files from the laptop s CD to the 8100 server s hard drive Restore the laptop s settings laptop running WINDOWS 95 When finished with an installation or upgrade use this procedure to restore the settings on the technician s laptop to their original state 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Right click Network Neighborhood Select Properties The
231. ents users to the Avaya Site Administration interface explains what the different areas of the Avaya Site Administration screens are for and orients users to what Avaya Site Administration is and how to get started Users can launch the guided tour by choosing Guided Tour from the Help menu S8100 Installation and Upgrades 265 April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Install Avaya Site Administration Online Help with Demonstrations The online help system tells how to administer Avaya Site Administration how to perform basic switch administration and troubleshooting and how to connect to an INTUITY AUDIX Many topics include a Show Me button When a user clicks Show Me a short animated demonstration of the task plays To open the help system choose Contents from the Help menu Show Me demonstrations Users can launch a list of Show Me demonstrations by choosing Show Me from the Help menu Connection support Clicking Help on a connection error message will launch a series of troubleshooting screens to walk users through solving common connection problems Install Avaya Site Administration 266 If you do not have Avaya Site Administration on your computer make sure your PC or laptop first meets the minimum requirements described in Table 35 Minimum requirements to run Avaya Site Administration on page 266 Table 35 Minimum requirements to run Avaya Site Administration Operating systems MS Windows 2000
232. ephone network Permissible exceptions are A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received Avaya attests that this registered equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990 REN Number For SCC1 CMC1 G600 and G650 Media Gateways This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On either the rear or inside the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company For G350 and G700 Media Gateways This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXxX The digits represented by are the ringer equivalence number REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company For all media gateways The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result
233. er The IP address also can be the name of the machine used See Appendix H Installation connectivity quick reference The S8100 home page displays Home Administer System User Services 4 Click Administer System A dialog similar to the following displays Username and Password Required Ea Enter username for august dr lucent com at august User Name l Password 5 lucent3 for both the user name and password 168 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 6 Click OK Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Access methods The following page displays Multi antage Ad tration Microsoft Internet Explorer Address e fadminjcgi rcStart exe where server amp htmPage adminFrame amp cmd noop Y Home Administer System User Services Download Software NOTICE By use of this system you accept the terms and conditions of the license agreements for all third party software included with this product Failure to comply with these agreements could result in legal action by the third party vendor s This product is designed for the use of authorized Avaya Inc products only Use of this system for any other third party applications is strictly prohibited and will result in the nullification of Avaya Inc warranty and post warranty obligations This system is restricted to authorized users for legitimate business purposes Unauthori
234. er equipment Install 26B1 selector console optional To install the optional selector console 1 Connectthe supplied 3 foot 0 9 m D8AC cable to the modular jack on bottom of the 26B1 selector console 2 Route the cable to the attendant console and connect to the DXS BLF jack o Attach labels according to the Attendant Console form 4 Administer the attendant console using Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 1152A1 Mid Span power distribution unit The 1152A1 Mid Span power distribution unit PDU is an Ethernet power supply that provides power to up to 24 46xx series IP telephones or wireless LAN WLAN access points This unit is used with a 10 100BaseTx standard Ethernet network over a standard TIA EIA 568 Category 5 6 or 6e cabling plant The 1152A1 meets the current requirements of the IEEE802 3af standard for resistive detection The 1152A1 PDU complies with the Underwriters Laboratories Inc UL standard UL 1950 2rd edition Table 13 1152A1 PDU UL 1950 compliance Complies UL 1950 Approved CSA C22 2 No 950 Std Approved CE Regulatory Compliance Approved EN 60950 Approved TUV EN 60950 For safety instructions see Important safety instructions on page 123 For installation instructions see Connect the cables on page 125 Important safety instructions Please read the following helpful tips Retain these tips for later use When usi
235. er to Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 to add new terminals S8100 Installation and Upgrades 195 April 2004 System initialization Setup call detail recording CDR Administer telephone features 1 According to the customer s order administer Communication Manager s translations INTUITY AUDIX mailboxes etc in one of two ways Avaya Site Administration web Avaya Site Administration must be installed on the laptop or on a remote PC that is connected to the 58100 Connect the PCMCIA card with the laptop or through remote PC using a web browser Internet Explorer or Netscape b Avaya Lucent Access Control LAC telnet For direct SAT access without going through Avaya Site Administration Telnet to 58100 through the LAC to receive the SAT screen See Start a Telnet session on page 176 Place a test call 1 Fromany telephone connected to a Digital Line circuit pack call any nearby telephone connected to an Analog Line circuit pack 2 Verify that the dial tone ringing pattern and talk path are acceptable o Place a call through the central office outside call to any nearby telephone 4 Verify that the dial tone ringing pattern and talk path are acceptable Test INADS callout From the SAT run test inads link Setup call detail recording CDR 196 To ensure the proper collection of CDR SMDR call records from the S8100 PBX when using the Collect from File
236. ernal Calls n Auto Answer none CDR Privacy n Data Restriction n Redirect Notification n Call Waiting Indication n Per Button Ring Control n Att Call Waiting Indication n Bridged Call Alerting n Distinctive Audible Alert n Switchhook Flash y Adjunct Supervision y Ignore Rotary Digits n H 320 Conversion n Per Station CPN Send Calling Number Service Link Mode as needed Multimedia Mode basic Audible Message Waiting n MWI Served User Type Coverage After Forwarding s Multimedia Early Answer n Direct IP IP Audio Connections n Emergency Location Ext 2002 IP Audio Hairpinning n 20 Ensure that every other field except for Switchhook Flash and Adjunct Supervision are set to n Type audix inthe LWC Reception field N z Press F7 to go to the next page Page 3 of the Station form displays station next Page 23 Oi 1N STATION SITE DATA Room Headset n Jack Speaker n Cable Mounting d Floor Cord Length 0 Building Set Color ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl List2 List3 HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialin List Number From above 1 2 or 3 Dial Code Line Appearance call appr M 10 Ensure that Line Appearance is set to call appr 11 Submit the form 204 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization 12 duplicate station number where number is the station you
237. erved Once you are logged in as user lucent1 lucent2 or lucent3 you can exit the SAT session and start an INTUITY AUDIX session without having to re authenticate 8100 Installation and Upgrades 311 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Connect to SAT session via Telnet Function key sequences for W2KTT terminal type 312 You cannot use the same function key sequences for SAT on a Windows 2000 platform However the 4 arrow keys do work as expected NOTE Function keys are case sensitive For example Esc p and Esc P produce two different results Use the following Escape key sequences when using the W2KTT terminal type Action Key sequence Refresh Esc r Cancel Esc x Submit Esc e Logout Esc lower case L Clear field Esc Help Esch Next form Esc fn Next page Escn Prev page Esc p Edit vec Esc f 6 Dir page Esc dp Update form Esc u f Next field Esc N Prev Field Esc f p S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Installing INTUITY languages other than English Installing INTUITY languages other than English To access the 58100 the technician needs a laptop a PCMCIA card for the laptop a 451A adapter a D8W cord a cross over cord and the CD with the Merrill Lynch INTUITY AUDIX R5 0 Announcement set A cord comcode 846943306 can be used If this cord is unavailable a 104 block can be used with 2
238. ervice Pack 4 Setup Wizard screen The following window opens Figure 11 2nd Window of the Setup Wizard Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard x License Agreement Please read the following license agreement To continue with setup 2 you must accept the agreement SUPPLEMENTAL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT MICROSOFT WINDOWS 2000 SERVICE PACK 4 PLEASE READ THIS SUPPLEMENTAL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SUPPLEMENTAL EULA CAREFULLY BY INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THIS SUPPLEMENTAL ej C Do Not Agree Agree Print pear 8100 Installation and Upgrades 17 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the S8100 with a CD 15 Click on the radio button next to I Agree then click Next The following window opens Figure 12 3rd Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard Select Options A CAUTION Do not achieve files now Click the radio button next to Do Not Achieve Files 18 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 16 Click Do Not achieve Files Then click Next The following window opens Figure 13 4th Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard Window Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard Ed Updating Your System 2 Please wait while setup inspects your current configuration and updates your files Checking f
239. es Provides information through optical calls for example time of day and RYON board serial number and supports the DEFINITY SAT interface OSS Operations Support System OSSI Operational Support System Interface Product Activation System PAS The process of creating and installing license files password files ASG keys Maestro records and partial registration for 58100 with G600 or CMC1 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 411 April 2004 Glossary 412 PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PID Product ID also know as Alarm ID port A data or voice transmission access point on a device that is used for communicating with other devices port network PN A cabinet containing a TDM bus and packet bus to which the following components are connected port circuit packs one or two tone clock circuit packs a maintenance circuit pack service circuit packs and optionally up to four expansion interface EI circuit packs Each PN is controlled either locally or remotely by a switch processing element SPE port network connectivity The interconnection of port networks PNs regardless of whether the configuration uses direct or switched connectivity Primary Rate Interface PRI A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems PRI runs at 1 544 Mbps and as used in North America provides 23 64 kbps B channels voice or data and one
240. es TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN2147C Central Office Trunk Yes TN2149 Analog Line Yes TN2180 Analog Line Yes TN2181 Digital Line 2 Wire DCP Yes TN2183 Analog Line Yes TN2184 DIOD Trunk Yes TN2185 B ISDN BRI 4 Wire S T TE Interface Trunk Side Yes TN2199 Central Office Trunk Yes TN2207 DS1 Interface 24 Channel and E1 32 Channel Yes TN2224 B Digital Line 24 Port 2 Wire DCP Yes TN2242 TTC Japanese 2 Mbit Trunk Yes TN2302 IP Media Processor Yes TN2305 Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Trunk Yes TN2464 DS1 Interface 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Yes TN2793 B Analog Line 24 Port Yes 3 of 3 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Disallowed circuit packs Table 62 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 389 lists the circuit packs that cannot be used with CMCI Table 62 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules 1 of 2 Apparatus code Name Allowed 982LS Current Limiter No CFYIB Current Limiter No No ED 1E546 INTUITY AUDIX R3 System No TN566 TN567 ED 1E546 CallVisor Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAT No TN2208 over the DEFINITY LAN Gateway R1 TN2170 J58890M 1 CallVisor ASAI Call Visor PC LAN over the DEFINITY No TN801 LAN Gateway Release 2 0 TN41
241. es for equipment used with G600 on page 77 for circuit protector ordering information comcodes Digital out of building telephones Use the following equipment to protect digital out of building voice terminals and Digital Line circuit packs at both building entrances e 4C3S 75 Enhanced Protector ITW Linx Enhanced Protector These units provide primary and sneak current protection The 4C3S 75 is equipped with a heat coil for sneak current protection while the ITW Linx is equipped with replaceable fuses for sneak current protection Use the 4C3S 75 only with Vintage 14 or newer TN754 circuit packs The 4C3S 75 can be used on any vintage of the TN754B circuit pack The ITW Linx may be used on any vintage of the TN754 circuit pack Table 19 Digital voice circuit protectors on page 140 lists the approved protectors NOTE The TN2181 2 wire 16 port Digital Line circuit pack may not be approved for some out of building uses Contact your Avaya representative for more information S8100 Installation and Upgrades 139 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install off premises station wiring Table 19 Digital voice circuit protectors Enhanced primary protector Circuit pack with sneak current protection TN754B any vintage 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2181 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx TN2224B any vintage 4C3S 75 or ITW Linx When possible every new and reused wiring installation should use blocks that acce
242. es in 8100 G600 CMC1 or its line side stations or equipment set the EC Direction field t o outward Keep the default setting for the EC Configuration field of 1 This setting rapidly minimizes echo when first detected regardless of the volume of the talker s voice 6 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Test the voice quality on a telephone connected through the TN464GP or TN2464BP circuit packs and known to have echo to see if the echo was eliminated 249 Hardware additions Add CO FX WATS and PCOL 7 Ifthe echo still exists set the EC Configuration field to 2 3 or 4 then test the voice quality These settings provide help for the following scenarios Setting 2 Minimizes speech clipping but it takes a fraction of a second longer for the echo to fade Setting 3 Eliminates speech clipping but a strong echo may take 2 or 3 seconds to fade Setting 4 Minimizes extremely strong echo very hot signals or excessive clipping or breakup of speech from a distant party It reduces speech clipping but may allow slight residual echo or more background noise 8 Ifthe echo still exists after trying every previous setting contact technical support Add CO FX WATS and PCOL Requirements Each Central Office CO Foreign Exchange FX Personal Central Office Line PCOL or Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS trunk connects to 1 port of either an 8 port TN747B or to 1 of s
243. escribed in the following section Manually set S8100 s customer related information alternative to ART on page 184 Wait until after you have finished the manual procedure before rebooting Also if you are installing a license file you should wait to reboot until after the license file is installed 5 Installation of the password license and installation script files is finished License file installation failure The license file s installation will fail if The processor s serial number in the license file does not match the serial number of the processor that is installed in the system e There is a software version mismatch between the license file and the system The license is expired e The license file is unreadable cannot be decrypted has the wrong length has the wrong checksum or has other format errors S8100 Installation and Upgrades 183 April 2004 System initialization Manually set S8100 s customer related information alternative to ART If the serial number mismatch occurs because of a processor swap out the serial number of the system s processor no longer matches the license file s serial number Normal call processing continues The system enters license error mode e A major alarm is sent The 6 day countdown timer starts Replace the old processor or install a new license file within 6 days Manually set S8100 s customer related information alternative to ART The instal
244. ess the system by double clicking the connection icon On the connect screen type in User name and Password Click Connect When the connection occurs a screen opens Click the Continue box A login window may appear saying that the connection was successful Click OK The dial up connection drops down to the tray on the taskbar next to the Time Once the dial up connection is established return to step 1 of the previous section Set up country specific call progress tones 190 By default the call progress tones of the United States are used for each 58100 system Using the mvdsp sh shell script you can change the system so that it recognizes the call progress tones specific to your country The system gets it s translation of call progress tones from a file named dsp0 USA You can overwrite this file with one that contains translations that are appropriate for your country To set up country specific call progress tones 1 Start a Telnet session For more information see Start a Telnet session on page 176 Go to a LAC prompt and execute a bash shell For more information see Appendix G GAS commands in bash At the BASH prompt enter shutdown Audix The bash shell is case sensitive so be sure to capitalize the first letter in Audix It will take a few minutes for AUDIX to shutdown please be patient A status message of shutdownproc succeeded displays when the shutdown finishes Enter shutdown
245. ess to break into a system There are 2 types of software protection in the 8100 environment feature and copy protection Feature protection Feature protection has specific feature protection capabilities or capacities within an application It controls the capabilities provided by the application As an example the copy protection for DEFINITY feature translations supports a customer options administration form to tailor operation of DEFINITY to a specific customer Copy protection Copy protection prevents software copying A special mechanism associated with an S8100 s license file prevents the software from running on other systems S8100 Installation and Upgrades 279 April 2004 Security and copy protection Software copy protection mechanisms 280 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Cable pinouts Set TN760E Tie Trunk s options A Cable pinouts This appendix provides the following information for TN760E Tie Trunk and TN464GP 1 1 option settings connector and cable diagrams and pinout charts e Set TN760E Tie Trunk s options on page 281 e Set TN464GP T1 E1 s options on page 283 Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts on page 284 Set TN760E Tie Trunk s options The TN760E Tie Trunk circuit pack interfaces between 4 tie trunks and the TDM bus Two tip and ring pairs form a 4 wire analog transmission line An E amp M pair are DC signaling leads used for call setup The E lead r
246. et the carrier address ID for each cabinet as shown in Table 60 Carrier address ID settings on page 362 and Figure 78 Setting CMC carrier address ID right side on page 363 Cabinet A is the processor cabinet and cabinets B C and D optional port carrier cabinets S8100 supports up to three cabinets A B and C Table 60 Carrier address ID settings on page 362 shows the settings for cabinets A B C and D The 1s and Os indicate closed and open positions respectively of the 6 rocker switches on the switch panel For example switches 2 4 and 5 are in the closed position for cabinet A This table is embossed on the cabinet next the switch panel Table 60 Carrier address ID settings A B C D 362 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Figure 78 Setting CMC1 carrier address ID right side 1 F E O 0900 0 Cg o E M um E j NN swdmdip KLC 082002 2 Proceed to either Floor mount the cabinet on page 364 or to Wall mount the CMCI cabinets on page 364 S8100 Installat
247. everal CO trunk circuit packs Installation 1 Determine the port assignment of the trunk from Trunk Group form EXAMPLE Port number 3 A 07 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port network or compact modular cabinet 2 Install a TN747B or a CO Trunk circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required 3 Administer the forms listed under CO FX WATS or PCOL Trunk Group in Administrator 5 Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Add DID trunks Requirements Each Direct Inward Dial DID trunk connects to 1 port DID Trunk circuit pack or to 1 port of an assortment of DID trunk circuit packs 250 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions Add Tie trunks Installation l Determine the port assignment of the trunk from Trunk Group form EXAMPLE Port number 1 A 07 01 Cabinet Carrier Slot Circuit Port network or compact modular cabinet 2 Install a DID Trunk circuit pack in assigned carrier slot if an additional circuit pack is required 3 Administer forms listed under DID Trunk Group in Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Add Tie trunks Requirements Each tie trunk connects to port of a 4 port Tie Trunk circuit pack or to an assortment of international Tie Trunk circuit packs Installation 1 Determine the port assignment of
248. ext the switch panel Table 4 Carrier address ID settings A B D N oO gt a O 1 2 3 4 5 6 TEE oooo 123456 HEEL OPEN o swdpdip1 LJK 102400 Proceed to either Floor mount a G600 cabinet on page 81 or Rack mount a G600 cabinet on page 82 80 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Floor mount a G600 cabinet NOTE A single G600 can be either floor or rack mounted Double and triple G600 systems must be rack mounted A WARNING Do not stack one G600 on top of another on the floor 1 Screw the feet to the cabinet s base as shown in Figure 28 Floor mounting the G600 on page 81 Figure 28 Floor mounting the G600 indptabl LJK 102600 2 Locate the cabinet on the floor Proceed to Check AC power and ground for G600 on page 86 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 81 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Rack mount a G600 cabinet A WARNING Verify that the customer supplied standard 19 rack is properly installed and solidly secured to the floor If not do not proceed with the installation 1 Be sure the door has been removed Remove every circuit pack and the power supply A WARNING When handling a circuit pa
249. ffect Click OK Close the windows and reboot the system if necessary Connect the cross over cable between the laptop and the TN2314 Service Access port RJ 45 jack v CAUTION When using Terminal Server because of the size of the laptop display use the scroll bar on the right side of the display to go to the bottom of the desktop screen That is where the Start button for the desktop is found Otherwise the Start button on the Taskbar may be that of the laptop The technician can also right click the laptop Taskbar select Properties and check the Auto Hide box This will cause the Taskbar to be hidden until the cursor is moved to the very bottom of the display S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Installing INTUITY languages other than English Installing INTUITY languages Perform the following procedures 1 Insert the CD into the laptop then open My Computer on the laptop 2 Click CD ROM Right click CD ROM and select Sharing 4 Under Sharing click Share As and give the drive a name like Upgrade NOTE After the upgrade finishes you can discontinue sharing the CD ROM 5 Click OK and close My Computer to return to the desktop 6 For Windows 95 98 right click Network Neighborhood and select Properties 7 Select File and Print Sharing 8 Check J want to be able to give others access to my files 9 Click OK in both windows to exit 10 Connect the laptop to the RJ 45 Access Serv
250. file RFA Authentication file and ART installscript sh file 21 Step 17 Reboot the system 22 Step 18 Restore the customer translations 22 Step 19 Enter the customer data using setip 22 Step 20 Set the timezone the time and re administer the customer logins and passwords 23 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 45 April 2004 Contents Step 21 Verify AUDIX extension length Step 22 Verify scheduled backups Step 23 Reboot nice Step 24 Check the health of the system Step 25 Verify correct displays make internal and external calls Step 26 Verify AUDIX greetings and auto attendant Step 27 Test alarming Step 28 Backup the translations Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Access keys Update steps Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Access keys Update steps About this book 46 Overview Audience Using this book Conventions Physical dimensions Terminology Typography Commands User input System output and field names Related documents Technical assistance Within the US Outside the US Trademarks Security alert and safety labels 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 30 31 31 38 38 39 61 61 61 62 64 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 66 66 66 66 66 58100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Safety precautions Electromagnetic interference Customer s safety responsibilities Antistatic protection Control circuit packs versus power Avaya Product D
251. files that didn t get backed up 53 Close Internet Explorer on the S8100 s desktop and on the laptop A SECURITY ALERT When you are finished with the update procedures you should restore your laptop to its original configuration 44 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Contents Contents Checklist and Job Aids Overview 5 Update the 58100 Using a CD 6 What you need before you start 6 Obtaining the license file and Authentication file from Remote Feature Activation RFA 6 Before you begin 6 High level steps 7 Deliver the files from RFA to your laptop T Select a delivery option 7 Procedure to Update the S8100 with a CD 9 High level steps 9 Detailed steps 10 Step 1 Change the IP address on your laptop 10 Step 2 Disable the proxy servers on your Internet Explorer 11 Step 3 Physical connection between your laptop and the TN2314 11 Step 4 Share the CD ROM and activate the guest account on your laptop 11 Step 5 Telnet to the TN2314 12 Step 6 Open a SAT window 12 Step 7 Verify the station length 12 Step 8 Verify the emergency number and no license incoming call number 12 Step 9 Save the Communication Manager translations 13 Step 10 Open bash shell 13 Step 11 Record the customer network and product information 13 Step 12 Shutdown AUDIX 15 Step 13 Backing up the system 15 Step 14 Updating the release with the CD 15 Step 15 Execute the swversion command 21 Step 16 Load the RFA license
252. form backup Backup using a LAN resident PC This is the bash shell procedure when using a LAN resident PC that is not 58100 but is connected to the same LAN as 58100 1 Click Start Run from the Windows task bar The Run dialog displays Type the name of program folder or document and Windows will open it for you Open telnet 155 132 119 101 7 Iv Ronin Separate Memon Space Cancel Browse 2 Enter telnet S8100 Name or IP Address Click 3 Telnet session opens on the desktop Enter the login and response at the prompts Telnet Win95 P Connect Edit Termina Help Login lucent3 Challenge 523 6295 Response Once the AVAYA Access Control process accepts your inputs it grants admittance to the 8100 system 4 Atthe LAC prompt type bash and press Enter The machine name and login ID displays as your prompt 5 Skipto Enter backup commands on page 318 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 317 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Perform backup Backup using an 8100 desktop This is the bash shell procedure when using an 58100 desktop 1 At an 58100 desktop log into Windows 2 Click Start gt Run from the Windows task bar The Run dialog displays Run RAE Type the name of a program folder or document and gt Windows will open it for you Open bas v Ronin Seperate Memon Space Cancel Browse 3 Enter bash and click OK 4 Telnet session
253. g either the V1 or V2c option d Click Submit 6 To delete an IP address Choose the delete an entry option b Enter the IP address in the Input the IP address field Click Submit 8100 Installation and Upgrades 215 April 2004 System initialization Administer SNMP Configure SNMP community strings To configure community strings 1 Fromthe 58100 home page click SNMP Agent Administration The following page displays a Configure Trap Destinations a Configure Community Strings a Start Stop the Subagent a Home Administer System User Services Download Software zx f T n ee 2 Click Configure Community Strings The following page displays a Configure Trap Destinations Configure Community Strings Start Stop the Subagent B Home LS Help Administer System Configure Community Strings on AVAYAS8100 action community string privilege list current entries add an entry C delete an entry User Services Input the community string C Read ReadWrite Download Software D cea submit AVAYA a eres 216 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer SNMP To list the currently administered community strings click the list current entries option and click the Submit button The following page displays a Configure Trap Destinations Configure Community Strings a Start
254. ge Manager Software The Windows admin account should be used for Windows administration only The account name can be chosen as desired For this example it is called DIWEB 6 Disconnect from Terminal Server NOTE The Windows admin account can be used for download but should be used for Windows administration only Communication Manager logins for customers In addition to the logins maintained in the Windows operating system there are customer level logins within Communication Manager that do NOT appear as Windows logins The default password should be changed by the customer during installation Table 51 Communication Manager customer logins Communication Manager Default customer logins Comments password defty 1 This is the customer level super user login within Communication Manager Its use should be restricted to the system administrator This login can be used to create additional Communication Manager logins See the SAT command add login The May 2003 release of S8100 provides enhanced login password security by adding a security feature that allows users to define their own Communication Manager logins passwords and to specify a set of commands for each login The system allows up to 14 simultaneous connections logins to 58100 58100 can have 5 connections INTUITY AUDIX can have 4 connections and the rest of the connections are reserved for shell commands e Each 58100 login
255. gency transfer panel Install telephone for power transfer unit Connect modem to telephone network Connect modem Option settings for external modem Set neon voltage to prevent ring ping Complete installation View LEDs to determine power and fan alarm state 2 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections Direct connection to the RJ45 service jack Connect the laptop to S8100 system Configure the laptop laptop running WINDOWS 95 Connect 58100 system to laptop s CD ROM drive laptop running WINDOWS 95 Restore the laptop s settings laptop running WINDOWS 95 Configure the laptop laptop running WINDOWS 2000 Connect 58100 system to laptop s CD ROM drive laptop running WINDOWS 2000 Restore the laptop s settings laptop running WINDOWS 2000 Direct connection with a local monitor mouse keyboard Connection via customer s LAN Connection via RAS modem dial up Create a connection icon S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 130 130 131 133 133 134 135 136 136 136 138 139 141 141 147 148 149 149 150 151 152 153 153 154 154 156 158 159 160 160 162 163 163 163 164 Contents 49 Contents Access methods Via a Telnet session Via a web browser session Logging into the S8100 Windows 2000 desktop Remotely using Avaya Site Administration Dial in permissions to an existing login Creating a login for remote access Starting an Avaya Site Admin
256. grades 27 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 5 Enter the customer information in the appropriate fields then click Create 6 To change the password for an existing user double click on the user Select User must change password at next login and click Ok 7 Close the Computer Management window 8 Toendyour TN2314 desktop session click on the end session button on the top of the screen as indicated by the arrow in figure 19 9 Click the back button You see the Administer System window Set the timezone and time using a keyboard monitor and mouse 1 Connect the keyboard monitor and mouse to the TN2314 2 Scroll down the TN2314 desktop until you see the time at the bottom of the right hand side as shown by the arrow in figure 13 Click on the time A CAUTION It is important that you change the timezone first before changing the time Change the timezone and then change the time 4 Re administer the customer logins and passwords as described in Re administer the Customer logins and passwords on page 26 Step 21 Verify AUDIX extension length 1 Inan nternet Explorer window click Default Audix Settings under System Administration 2 Click on AUDIX Extension Length Check to see that the extension length is the same as the station extension length that you recorded in Step 7 Verify the station length on page 12 Both the AUDIX extension length and the station extensi
257. gtran Press the return key Step 19 Enter the customer data using setip In this step the information recorded in Step 11 Record the customer network and product information on page 13 is entered using the setip command Find the setip information you recorded before continuing When you execute the setip command from bash without any parameters the command will display the current configuration You can set any parameter with setip by typing setip the name within setip that you wish to change and the parameter for that name For example To restore the information shown in figure 16 you would type setip name DEFONE cust 135 122 54 50 255 255 255 240 135 122 54 49 dns DefOne ras 10 21 2 81 22 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Figure 16 Setip example DefOne lucenti setip name DEFONE cust 135 122 54 50 255 255 255 240 135 122 54 49 dns Def One wins Fas 16 21 2 81 Command succeeded No changes made 1 From the bash prompt in the telnet window type setip name custname cust customer IP address dns dns server name wins wins number ras ras IP address 2 Press the enter key The setip script displays the new settings 3 Minimize this window for future use Step 20 Set the timezone the time and re administer the customer logins and passwords You must be on the TN2314 desktop to change the time
258. h file separately When you click on the file name a file download pop up window opens 1 Click Save After clicking Save in the File Download window a standard Microsoft Save As window opens Enter the location you want to use on your laptop for the saved file in the Save in field and click Save The file downloads to your laptop Using Express Delivery Express Delivery zips all the files and sends them to the same place e mail address or PC After clicking Express Delivery a pop up window opens 1 Click OK in the pop up window A standard Microsoft Save As window opens Enter the location you want to use on your laptop for the zipped file in the Save in field and click Save The zip file downloads to your laptop A confirmation window opens Option two Download files using e mail Use the following steps to download a file using e mail 1 Click Download Files via E mail gt NOTE The e mail address that was entered in the Mod Apps Details screen will automatically appear in the E mail Address field You may enter a new e mail address modify the e mail address or accept the e mail address as it appears The e mail address entered or modified in this screen will not automatically appear in the Mod Apps Details screen 2 You have two options to choose from You may click Submit to deliver a single file to a specified e mail address or you may click Express Delivery to e mail all files to a single e mail address 3 Aconfirmatio
259. has 2 groups of LEDs One group indicates the status of the pack and the other group which includes the Major Minor and Warning alarms reflects maintenance conditions in the entire system Red alarm The system has detected a fault in this circuit pack NOTE Alarms on the PROCR PR MAINT SW CTL and PKT INT maintenance objects are indicated by the red LED on the Processor circuit pack Green test The system is running tests on this circuit pack e Amber In an operating system this LED indicates that the handshaking between the firmware and the Windows 2000 operating system is occurring by flashing briefly once every 10 seconds PCMCIA amber The flash disk is in use MAJOR ALARMS red MINOR ALARMS red e CLOCK amber Blinks once every 4 seconds EM XFER red Indicates emergency transfer has been invoked NOTE If the AC power cord is unplugged the emergency transfer feature invokes however the EMERGENCY TRANSFER LED red is not lit due to loss of AC power The system gracefully shuts down in about 3 minutes OK REMOVE green Steady indicates that it is OK to remove the TN2314 Processor circuit pack WARNING DO NOT REMOVE the TN2314 circuit pack unless the green Complete Shutdown LED is lit Failure to heed this warning may result in loss of data and or damage to equipment 336 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor LED boot seque
260. hat Number of Rings is set to 3 Ensure that Point 1 is set to the INTUITY AUDIX hunt group that you previously set up 4 Submitthe form Add test phones 1 SAT or Avaya Site Administration window type add sta next f station next Page L wr aN STATION Extension 2017 Lock Messages n BCC 0 Type 6408D Security Code 1 Port Coverage Path 1 COR 1 Name Coverage Path 2 cos 1 Hunt to Station STATION OPTIONS Loss Group 2 Personalized Ringing Pattern 1 Data Module n Message Lamp Ext 2017 Speakerphone 2 way Mute Button Enabled y Display Language english Media Complex Ext IP SoftPhone n Remote Office Phone n D 2 the kind of phone you are using in the Type field Type the port in the Port field 4 Inthe Coverage Path 1 field type the number of the coverage path you just created or changed 5 Fill in any other appropriate fields and submit the form 8100 Installation and Upgrades 207 April 2004 System initialization INTUITY AUDIX administration Save translations 1 Enter save translation and press Enter This instructs the system to take all translation information in memory and write it to the translation cards 2 Update backup cards if necessary INTUITY AUDIX administration This section provides information about INTUITY AUDIX commands and administering INTUITY AUDIX For additional information about INTUITY AUDIX administration
261. he Administered Remote field 4 Press to save the information in the system database The cursor returns to the command line and the system displays the following message Command Successfully Completed 5 Enter exit or another administrative command Administer networking channels Enable the network channels so that the local AUDIX system can exchange voice messages over the digital network Enabling the channels creates a communication link between the ACCX card and the switch or between the LAN card and the LAN and or the wide area network WAN To enable the network channels 1 Startat the S8100 main page from Internet Explorer and select Administer System AUDIX Networking Administrative Menu Network Channel Administration The system displays the Network Channel Administration window Network Channel Administration Channel Type Channel Status Channel Configuration C Enable Disable Enable Disable 1 DISABLE 2 TCP IP ENABLE 2 Click Enable for each channel in the Channel Configuration column 3 Click Save The system takes a few seconds to change the hardware configuration The system displays a confirmation message when the process finishes S8100 Installation and Upgrades 225 April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information Change local machine s information You can change a local machine s information on its M
262. he CD ROM drive on your laptop Use the following steps to update the S8100 with the CD 1 Maximize the Internet Explorer window 2 192 11 13 6 in the URL address field and press Enter The Web interface screen opens as shown in the following example Figure 8 Web Interface AVAYA communication System User Services 8100 Installation and Upgrades 15 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 3 Click Administer System on the navigation pane The Enter Network Password screen opens as shown in the following example Figure 9 Enter Network Password screen Al xl 7 Please type your user and password Site 135 122 54 50 Realm 135 122 54 50 User Name Password Save this password in your password list OK Cancel 10 12 13 16 Type NTadmin in the User Name field and NTadminl in the password field and click OK If NTadmin does not work you must use the lucent3 login and the lucent3 password In the Administer System window click Login to 192 under Remote Control Terminal Services If a VBScript error appears click OK In the Remote Desktop Web Connection screen click Connect If a VBScript error appears again click OK Login again with the login and password from step 4 of this section You are now on the S8100 desktop In the 58100 desktop click Start gt Run In the Open field type bash If yo
263. heir interfaces Your Avaya provided software applications as well as their underlying hardware software platforms and interfaces Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products TCP IP Facilities Customers may experience differences in product performance reliability and security depending upon network configurations design and topologies even when the product performs as warranted Standards Compliance Avaya Inc is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Product Safety Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable Safety of Information Technology Equipment IEC 60950 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with IEC for Electrical Equipment IECEE CB 96A Safety of Information Technology Equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 60950 00 UL 60950 3rd Edition Safety Requirements f
264. hell System administration terminal Information in braces is for Windows 2000 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 31 April 2004 Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Update steps Step Details 1 Fora direct connection between the technician s Right click the Network Neighborhood My laptop and the S8100 s service port LT Change the laptop s IP address to 192 11 13 5 Network Places icon on the laptop s desktop and select Properties b Right click PCMIA Ethernet Connection or Local Area Connection and select Properties Highlight the TCP IP icon from the popup window and select Properties Check the Specify an IP address Use the following IP address radio button d Enter 192 11 13 5 in the IP address field and 255 255 255 252 in the subnet mask field and click OK to close the popup windows 2 LT IE Disable proxy servers on Internet OpenInternet Explorer and select Tools Internet Explorer Options the Connections tab and LAN Settings b Uncheck the Use a proxy server radio button and click OK to close the popup windows 3 Connect the laptop to the service jack on the a Connect a cable from the laptop s PCMCIA front of the 58100 s Processor board Ethernet card to an RJ45 coupler b Connect a cross over flip cable from the coupler to the TN2314 s RJA5 jack 4 LT IE Connect to the
265. icate with the 8100 system 1 a RO NY 10 12 13 In Windows Explorer click Start Settings Network and Dial up Connection Local Areal Connection Click Properties In the list of components window check File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click Properties Check Use the following IP address radio button NOTE Before continuing record the current settings from each of the TCP IP Properties tabs This information is needed to restore the laptop after work is finished with S8100 system Type 192 11 13 5 as the IP Address and 255 255 255 252 as the Subnet Mask If Default Gateway has an IP address record then remove it or leave blank If there are DNS IP addresses in the Preferred and or Alternate DNS windows record them then remove them Click the Advanced button In the DNS and WINS tabs record then remove any IP addresses Click OK here and in the following windows Start a DOS shell on the laptop by clicking Start Programs gt MS DOS for Windows 2000 click Start gt Run gt cmd In the DOS window type ping 192 11 13 6 and press Enter A series of 4 similar replies indicating successful response should display Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128
266. ications system The software controlled processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones and keyboard characters and makes the proper connections both within the system and external to the system The communications system itself consists of a digital computer software storage device and carriers with special hardware to perform the connections A communications system provides voice and data communications services including access to public and private networks for telephones and data terminals on a customer s premises See also switch on page 413 compact modular cabinet CMC See 1 on page 407 and media gateway on page 410 The chassis and shelf hardware used to support S8100 s hardware platform derived from actually the same as a DEFINITY ProLogix cabinet correlation ID A temporary number that is created during the FET process This number needs to be entered in RFA during the switch configuration file s upload process CSA Canadian Safety Association digital The representation of information by discrete steps See also analog on page 405 digital trunk A circuit that carries digital voice and or digital data in a telecommunications channel E1 A digital transmission standard that carries traffic at 2 048 Mbps The E1 facility is divided into 32 channels DSOs of 64 kbps information Channel 0 is reserved for framing and synchronization information A D channel occupies Channel 16 FAC Fe
267. ice port 11 Start the laptop internet browser 12 On your browser turn off proxies Write down the settings for restoration later Internet Explorer 4 x go to View Internet Options Connections check Connect to Internet using LAN uncheck Use proxy server Internet Explorer 5 x go to Tools Internet Options Connections At the bottom of the window click LAN Settings Uncheck Use a proxy server box and Automatically detect settings Click OK until back at web page 13 Execute an http 192 11 13 6 14 Login 15 Click Administer System and Login 16 Start Terminal Server on the system by clicking on Login to S8100 under Remote Control Terminal Services S8100 may have been changed to a different server name 17 Answer yes to the questions asked on the agreement screens if they appear 18 Login 19 Rightclick My Network Places and select Map Network Drive 20 screen appears with a default drive letter Change this to another letter like 21 Uncheck Reconnect at Logon and click Finish 22 Wait while the system locates the laptop 23 When the laptop appears double click it to display shared drives 24 Double click the CD ROM The path box at the top of the window becomes populated 25 Ifa window with the CD ROM contents does not open right click the S8100 icon this looks like the My Computer icon If the contents appear go to step number 31 26 Click Explore S8100 Installation and Upgr
268. ick the Backup button 13 Verify backup Click Last scheduled backup results and note the Time Finished to verify that the backup finished 14 LT IE Record AUDIX extension length Click the Back icon on the IE tool bar twice to return Note You will need to verify the extension o tne Acimimisier System pajzs length later b From the explorer window click Default AUDIX Settings Note whether AUDIX is enabled If so click AUDIX Extension Length and record the extension length 15 LT IE Shutdown the system Click Administer System b Select Shutdown or Restart under the System Maintenance section 16 The green Complete LED on the TN795 faceplate will be flashing during the shutdown process Wait until this LED is on steady Then power down the system 17 Remove the TN795 Processor board 18 Carefully remove the PCMCIA card from Do not swap the hard drives A TN795 s hard drive will not the TN795 Processor board and install itin work on a TN2314 the new TN2314 Processor board 19 Install the new Processor board into the platform and power up the system 40 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Step Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Details 20 Wait approximately 5 minutes then connect the laptop to the service jack on the front of the TN2314 Processor board Connect a cable from the lapto
269. identified by the following keys Table 0 2 Technician s laptop Internet Explorer Web interface on the laptop S8100 s Windows desktop Internet Explorer Web interface on the S8100 s Windows desktop Note that SDT and SDT IE are opened inside of LT IE Bash shell on S8100 s Windows desktop LAC shell System administration terminal Information in braces is for Windows 2000 38 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Update steps Step Details 1 For a direct connection between the Right click the Network Neighborhood My technician s laptop and the S8100 s service Network Places icon on the laptop s desktop and port select Properties LT Change laptop s IP address to b Right click PCMIA Ethernet Connection or Local 192 11 13 5 Area Connection and select Properties Highlight the TCP IP icon from the popup window and select Properties Check the Specify an IP address Use the following IP address radio button d Enter 192 11 13 5 in the IP address field and 255 255 255 252 in the subnet mask field and click OK to close the popup windows 2 LT IE Disable proxy servers on Internet OpenInternet Explorer and select Tools Internet Explorer Options the Connections tab and LAN Settings b Uncheck the Use a
270. idual users organizations accounts user defined criteria and demand statistics call detail recording CDR Textual representation of call traffic carrier An enclosed shelf containing vertical slots that hold circuit packs CAS See call accounting system CAS central office CO The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling central office CO codes The first three digits of a 7 digit public network telephone number in the United States central office CO trunk A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through the local CO circuit 1 An arrangement of electrical elements through which electric current flows 2 A channel or transmission path between two or more points 406 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Glossary circuit pack A card on which electrical circuits are printed and IC chips and electrical components are installed A circuit pack is installed in a switch carrier CMC1 A cabinet formerly called a CMC compact modular cabinet which when equipped with protocol conversion hardware and software such as an S8100 Media Server is a media gateway Communication Manager The communication application that runs on Avaya servers to provide call control and telephony features Formerly called MultiVantage software or Avaya Call Processing ACP commun
271. ied electrician S8100 Installation and Upgrades 87 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check AC power and ground for G600 Floor grounds are those grounds on each floor of a high rise building that are suitable for connection to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet s single point ground terminal Approved floor grounds may include Building steel The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer feeding the floor Metallic water pipes e Power feed metallic conduit supplying panel boards on the floor A grounding point specifically provided in the building for the purpose Uninterruptible power supply A recommended uninterruptible power supply UPS may be used for power holdover The type of UPS depends on the holdover requirements Total holdover capacity varies depending on the UPS The UPS must provide surge protection for the G600 cabinet Vv CAUTION The major alarm contacts should only be connected to a UPS that can indicate its backup power status For most non Avaya UPSs you should not use the major external device leads Using these leads for anything else could cause an SPE download 1 Connectthe UPS to an electrical outlet capable of handling the power requirements of the cabinets 100 VAC 4 5 Amps b 120 VAC 3 8 Amps 200 VAC 2 3 Amps d 220 to 240 VAC 2 0 Amps 2 Ensure that the cabinet is connected to an unswitched or always on ele
272. iew for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and 1 Media Gateways 555 233 231 e Avaya Communication Manager Little Instruction Book for Basic Administration 555 233 756 e Avaya Communication Manager Little Instruction Book for Advanced Administration 555 233 757 e Avaya Communication Manager Little Instruction Book for Basic Diagnostics 555 233 758 Getting Started with the Avaya R300 Remote Office 555 233 769 MAX 3000 Installation and Basic Configuration Guide 555 233 768 e Avaya Communication Manager Toll Fraud and Security Handbook 555 025 600 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 65 April 2004 About this book Technical assistance Technical assistance Avaya provides the following resources for technical assistance Within the US For help with Feature administration and system applications call the Avaya DEFINITY Helpline 1 800 225 7585 Maintenance and repair call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line 1 800 242 2121 Toll fraud call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 Avaya offers services that can reduce toll fraud liabilities For more information contact your Avaya representative Other security issues call Avaya Corporate Security 1 800 822 9009 Outside the US For any non US location contact your local Avaya authorized dealer for additional help Trademarks Every trademark identified by the 9 or TM is a registered trademark or trademark
273. iguration tab to enable DNS Enter the appropriate information Click the WINS Configuration tab to enable WINS Enter the appropriate information Click the Gateway tab if a gateway was used and enter the appropriate information S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections 14 Click OK to close the TCP IP dialog 15 Click Yes to restart your computer When rebooted the laptop returns to its original settings Direct connection with a local monitor mouse keyboard Use this method when plugging the monitor into an 58100 system thus making it look like a PC The Processor Interface cable is on slot 2 of the S8100 system Customers have their own monitor mouse keyboard setup 1 Plugthe monitor into the Processor Interface cable behind the S8100 server TN2314 Processor circuit pack 2 Plug the mouse into the Processor Interface cable behind the 58100 server TN2314 Processor circuit pack Plug the keyboard into the Processor Interface cable behind the 58100 server TN2314 Processor circuit pack NOTE If these devices are plugged in while the system is running you must reboot so that the system will recognize these peripherals Once recognized by the system the devices are hot pluggable Connection via customer s LAN Customers may decide to connect the 58100 system to their LAN which connects to the Ethernet jack of the Processor Interface cable To
274. iles starting this backup System C Aum announcements md previous backup data Au translations amp messages from the destination trans names amp messages will be erased Aupr translations amp names AUDE translations _Backup none from AUDIX Destination pcmcia BS other locations User Services Download Software Oooo Click Other locations AVAYA 8100 Installation and Upgrades 323 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface The following screen displays 1 Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results 1 Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Home example Enter security information to anisa Administer make a new network drive dade System available for Backup and Restore operations Share name backup bkdir User Services Populate each field as shown Domain drntdomain inthe exe column Do Download not include any extra Username joe kfc Software characters like backslashes The Sonar field may be Password eft empty if the computer does not participate ina domain 2 Enter LAN location information Click Verify The following screen displays a Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore The security information that you have entered has been verified The backup and restore operations now have access to the shared network drive
275. in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company REN is not required for some types of analog or digital facilities Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network is shown in the following tables For SCC1 CMC1 G600 and G650 Media Gateways Manufacturer s Port FIC Code SOC REN Network Identifier A S Code Jacks Off premises station OL13C 9 0F RJ2GX RJ21X DID trunk 02RV2 T 0 0B RJ2GX RJ21X CO trunk 02GS2 0 3A RJ21X 02LS2 0 3A RJ21X Tie trunk TL31M 9 0F RJ2GX Basic Rate Interface 02185 6 0F 6 0Y RJ49C 1 544 digital interface 04DU9 BN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 04DU9 IKN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 04DU9 ISN 6 0F RJ48C RJ48M 120A4 channel service unit 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ48C For G350 and G700 Media Gateways Manufacturer s Port FIC Code SOC REN Network Identifier A S Code Jacks Ground Start CO trunk 02GS2 1 0A DID trunk 02RV2 T AS 0 Loop Start CO trunk 02LS2 0 5A 1 544 digital interface 04DU9 BN 6 0Y RJ48C 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ48C 04DU9 IKN 6 0Y RJ48C 04DU9 ISN 6 0Y RJ48C Basic Rate Interface 02155 6 0F RJ49C For all media gateways If the terminal equipment for example the media server
276. information about obtaining and installing license password authentication and installation script files NOTE When you swap out a processor that has an RFA generated license file the faulty processor must be returned to repair It is not re usable because the serial number of the swapped out processor has been captured within an SAP database and is marked as unusable If you try to generate a license against it you will be denied To replace a TN2314 circuit pack follow the steps in the Job Aid Replacing an 58100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 on page 38 and substitute new TN2314 for TN795 Replace the hard disk The hard disk on the TN2314 Processor circuit pack will need to be replaced if it is defective or needs to be upgraded To replace the hard disk follow the steps in the Job Aid Replacing an 58100 Media Server s hard drive on page 31 240 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Upgrade and repair procedures Download firmware to port circuit packs Download firmware to port circuit packs You can download updated application code for a port circuit pack on site or remotely This eliminates the need to physically remove the circuit pack and send it to the factory for the firmware update The port circuit packs supported are e 0051 TN464GP TN2464BP and TN2313AP DIG LINE TN2214CP and TN2224CP e Maintenance Test TN771DP IP Media Processor TN2302AP e Voi
277. ing AUX Trunk TN417 TN763 TN763D Ceniral Office Trunk 3 wire Central Office Trunk TN429 TN2199 TN493 TN422 TN421 TN438B TN465C TN429 TN2139 TN459B TN436B TN753 N2146 TN414 Tie Trunk TN478 TN458 TN449 TN760D TN760C TN434 TN415 TN2209 DS1 Tie 4 port Trunk DIOD TN483 TN2184 TN722 TN767 TN722B TN464F TN2207 TN2464 s nould ojqe5 sueuo 1nouid sueJBeip ejqeo pue 10 99UU0D vooz idy pue uonejjeisul 00195 2 3 E rel z E 96 Table 47 Leads for circuit packs and auxiliary equipment pinout charts 1 of 3 Digital or Data or 2 wire Connector s Analog Hybrid 3 wire DID MET AUX CO Tie DS1 Tie DIOD pin number Line Line Line Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk E m e qe eee er ee memi ee a effete sear re eee fs e enis 1 1L e je mu e p ew INTE mop oem mmm p f e e fe fe fe fe fe fe fe e _ mw e mui _ p pe peje e Do e p o el o N W 4 K ko oi rw S R re f seyo sueJBeip ejqeo pue J0 99UU0D sinouid 2 gt m Table 47 Leads for circuit packs and auxiliary equipment pinout charts 2 of 3 o Digital or Data or 2 wire 3 wire DID C
278. ing every in preparation for removing TN2314 Processor application The system AC power or removing the Processor board does not restart TN2314 Processor circuit board s automatically pack The system can be faceplate restarted only by removing and restoring power or reseating the TN2314 Detection of Wiring from Loss of AC Shut down the system Provides a graceful shutdown the loss of the UPS Z3A2 power for more after closing every when AC power is lost for AC power by alarm adapter than minute application The system more than minute the UPS to the Major restarts automatically upon restoration of AC power 3 of 3 Communication Manager software reset recovery There are severe reset levels available to restart Communication Manager These resets can be user initiated with the reset system command where is the reset level They may also be automatically initiated by the system s software in response to certain error conditions A system is reset due to a loss of power or through Reset commands entered during a SAT terminal session Maintenance software from which the system can reset itself This process starts when certain software and hardware errors are detected by the software v CAUTION When the system is rebooted or reset at level 2 3 4 or 5 every voice terminal and attendant console feature is adversely affected Users should be advised of services that are lost and that as
279. ing with a TN2314 239 TN799C installing 245 transfer password file 182 translations adding 195 copy protection 279 save procedure 113 troubleshooting 273 commands 275 error messages 273 trunks adding 250 type approved external modem 99 149 385 421 Index U uninterruptible power supply UPS 88 373 unpacking CMC1 358 equipment 74 upgrade hardware 243 to a TN2314 239 UPS 88 373 US Robotics modem 99 149 385 V vertically mounted cabinets 365 voice mail adding items 268 interacting with Avaya Site Administration 262 launching administration session 270 W wall mounted cabinets 364 365 366 waterpipes as approved ground 87 372 WATS trunk adding 250 Web browser accessing S8100 167 logins 188 Windows logins 304 WINS setting customer s information 347 wiring analog tie trunk 117 color code 116 digital tie trunk 117 examples 3 and 4 pair modularity 119 302C attendant console 113 analog tie trunk 117 attendant console 113 digital tie trunk 117 telephone connection 113 pin designations 295 to 297 pinouts 113 284 292 Processor Interface cable 93 100 127 381 385 telephone connection 113 wizards Map Network Drive 356 www messenger 271 422 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004
280. integrated recorded announcements on page 253 Add ISDN PRI on page 256 DEFINITY LAN gateway DLG on page 257 Add circuit packs When installing additional features or equipment it may be necessary to install additional circuit packs For a list of allowed circuit packs see Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 100 This is a general procedure to use when adding features or equipment that require adding circuit packs 1 NA 4 WN Log into the system and answer y to the Suppress Alarm Origination question during login Install the circuit pack in the carrier Type change circuit pack Verify that the circuit pack appears in the listing If the circuit pack code does not appear type the code manually in the proper slot Type test board long command to test the circuit pack Log off the system after the addition and any required administration is complete For information about administering circuit packs and other equipment see the Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 8100 Installation and Upgrades 243 April 2004 Hardware additions Add IP trunk Add IP trunk For IP Media Processor set up instructions refer to Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 504 Add remote office S8100 can connect to the Avaya R300 Remote Office Communicator Avaya R300 in a remote office configuration Avaya R300 operates like a sim
281. ion and Upgrades 363 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Floor mount the CMC1 cabinet The dimensions of each cabinet with floor pedestal are 28 5 inches 72 4 cm high x 24 5 inches 62 2 cm wide x 12 inches 30 5 cm deep Maintain a service clearance of 12 inches 30 5 cm on the left right and front of the cabinet If your configuration requires 2 cabinets be sure each maintains the service clearance of 12 inches 30 5 cm on the left right and front sides To floor mount the cabinet 1 Floor mount the cabinet as shown in Figure 79 Typical floor mounted installation on page 364 Figure 79 Typical floor mounted installation indmflor KLC 083002 Figure notes 1 Left panel floor mounting pedestal 12 inches 30 5 cm minimum from nearest X 12 Teh shoulder screws object required to service the circuit packs 2 Proceed to Check AC power and ground for on page 371 Wall mount the CMC1 cabinets Ay DANGER A fully loaded system with a single CMCI1 cabinet weighs 58 lbs 26 3 kg Use lifting precautions The CMC1 unit weighs 29 Ibs 13 1 kg with the doors power unit and circuit packs removed 364 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Install plywood backing on wall The install technician must provide the plywood
282. ircuit to accommodate basic 2 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install multipoint adapters Install multipoint adapters Use multipoint adapters to provide signal fanout of the T interface BR851 B or the 367A perform fanout at the workstation These adapters support more than ISDN terminal per horizontal 4 pair D inside wire DIW To support multiple horizontal runs a MDF with multiple common rows performs fanout in the satellite closet The 110RA1 12 provides fanout for 2 horizontal runs and contains the 100 Ohm terminating resistor Use this for basic multipoint or point to point with terminating resistor in the closet Other fanout blocks include the 110AB1 025M and the 110AB1 050M BR851 B adapter T adapter The BR851 B supports 2 terminals on 1 multipoint BRI at the workstation and is used to fanout transmission and power See Figure 60 Wiring diagram of BR851 B on page 133 Figure 60 Wiring diagram of BR851 B gt 8 7 654321 9 SESS e i iu RTRTRTRT 443 44311322 87654321 87654321 6 1910017 RPY 012098 Figure notes 1 Wire pairs 4 Female 2 Pin numbers 5 T type adapter BR851 B 3 Modular plug male S8100 Installation and Upgrades 133 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install multipoint adapters 367A adapter The 367A adapter provides fanout for up to 7 terminals See Figure 61 Wiring diagram of 3
283. is may have another name if the customer has changed it and select Properties Then choose the Network Identification tab to view the workgroup information S8100 Installation and Upgrades 177 April 2004 System initialization License file password file and installation script overview From the BASH prompt use the setip command to administer each parameter 1 setip name lt machine name gt 2 Type setip cust lt IP address subnet mask default gateway 3 Typesetip dns lt dns IP addresses and or names 4 Typesetip wins lt WINS IP address gt v CAUTION You must reboot the system for the machine name parameter to take effect It is important to reboot at this point because subsequent procedures depend on the correct machine name 5 Type reboot nice The reboot process should take about 5 minutes See setip command on page 346 for more information about the setip command These parameters can also be set in the Network Places properties on the 8100 Windows 2000 desktop In the event that customers require a new IP address they can use the Terminal Services access to the 8100 Windows 2000 desktop License file password file and installation script overview 178 License file Remote Feature Activation RFA is a web based application that enables the creation and deployment of license files for every switch The license file enables the switch s software category release features and capacities License
284. is tree is a Windows Explorer like view of every switch and INTUITY AUDIX system connected to Avaya Site Administration the tasks a user has created and the button label templates Users can Expand nodes in the tree Move items Cut copy or delete items Add or paste items to the tree Rename items Change an item s properties Connect to a switch How Avaya Site Administration works In Avaya Site Administration any switch or INTUITY AUDIX administration activity is called a task When using Avaya Site Administration to perform a switch or INTUITY AUDIX administration task enter the task into Avaya Site Administration and then tell Avaya Site Administration when to run the task For example to add a phone to the system for a new employee create a task in Avaya Site Administration that adds the phone and optionally the associated voice mail account and then tell Avaya Site Administration to add the new phone immediately or at a later time When the task runs Avaya Site Administration connects to the appropriate switch or INTUITY AUDIX runs the task and displays feedback about the task in the schedule tab Depending on the instructions from the user Avaya Site Administration will either disconnect from the switch or make the connection idle when it is finished running the task Avaya Site Administration help Avaya Site Administration provides the following information to help administrators Guided tour The guided tour ori
285. istration session Logins for the 58100 Avaya personnel logins Avaya business partner and dealer logins 3 System initialization Connectivity and access to the 58100 system Configure DHCP and TFTP servers DHCP server TFTP server Preliminary tasks Power up and observe LEDs Connect the laptop computer to 58100 Start a Telnet session Verify the software s version number Determine the serial number Set up customer s LAN parameters License file password file and installation script overview Using the Feature Extraction tool for upgrades from pre R10 only Obtain the license and password files RFA information requirements for new installations Go to the RFA web site Obtain the installation script file Direct channels Indirect channels Install the password file license file and installation scripts Copy files to the server Install the password license and installation script file License file installation failure 50 165 166 167 170 170 170 170 171 172 172 172 173 174 175 175 176 176 176 176 176 Tr 177 177 178 179 179 179 180 180 180 181 182 182 183 183 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Contents Manually set S8100 s customer related information alternative to ART 184 Manually setting RAS IP address 184 Manually setting product ID 185 Manually setting alarm origination and alarm destination number 185 Administer no license emergency numbe
286. ition switches on the left side of the 808A See Figure 65 808A emergency transfer panel on page 142 These switches set each of the 5 incoming trunk lines to either loop start or ground start Two switches are used for each of the 5 circuits switches 1 and 2 are used for circuit 1 switches 3 and 4 are used for circuit 2 and so forth See Table 20 Trunk test switches on page 143 Table 20 Trunk test switches Switch Circuit number number 1 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 4 8 4 9 5 10 5 11 Not used 12 Test switch 4 Connect a 25 pair cable between the male RJ21 25 pair connector on the 808A and the yellow field on the MDF Table 21 Pin assignments for 25 pair connector on 808A on page 144 shows the pinouts 5 Make cross connections for each emergency trunk emergency station pair See Figure 66 Connections for telephone used for emergency transfer on page 146 and Figure 67 Connections for telephone used for emergency transfer and as normal extension on page 147 6 the trunk identification label at the bottom of the panel record the trunk line extension and location for each circuit To each voice terminal designated as an emergency terminal attach a label identifying it as such The labels are provided with the unit 8 the system for normal operation as follows Place the test switch switch 12 in NORMAL OPERATION b Ensure the power supply is
287. itional support telephone numbers go to the Avaya support Web site http www avaya com support If you are Within the United States click the Escalation Management link Then click the appropriate link for the type of support you need Outside the United States click the Escalation Management link Then click the International Services link that includes telephone numbers for the international Centers of Excellence Providing Telecommunications Security Telecommunications security of voice data and or video communications is the prevention of any type of intrusion to that is either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of your company s telecommunications equipment by some party TS Your company s telecommunications equipment includes both this Avaya product and any other voice data video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product that is networked equipment An outside party is anyone who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Whereas a malicious party is anyone including someone who may be otherwise authorized who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent Such intrusions may be either to through synchronous time multiplexed and or circuit based or asynchronous character message or packet based equipment or interfaces for reasons of Utilization of capabilities special
288. ity Add a TN799DP C LAN circuit pack Install the TN799DP Administer the TN799DP on the SAT Test the external connection to the LAN Communication Manger Add TN464GP TN2464BP with echo cancellation Add CO FX WATS and PCOL Requirements Installation S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 226 226 230 230 231 233 237 237 238 239 239 239 240 240 240 241 243 243 244 244 244 244 245 245 246 247 248 250 250 250 Contents 53 Contents Add DID trunks Requirements Installation Add Tie trunks Requirements Installation Add DS1 tie and OPS Service interruption Add speech synthesis Add Code Calling access Multiple integrated recorded announcements TN750C Announcement circuit pack Add TN750C circuit pack Move a single announcement to another Announcement circuit pack CWY1 announcements Installing CWY1 announcements Add ISDN PRI T1 North American standard E1 international standard Add circuit packs Install cables Enter added translations Resolve alarms Save translations DEFINITY LAN gateway DLG Corresident DLG 7 AvayaSite Administration 54 Avaya Site Administration overview Interactions with switches and voice mail systems Components of Avaya Site Administration How Avaya Site Administration works Avaya Site Administration help Install Avaya Site Administration 250 250 251 251 251 251 252 252 253 253 253 254 254 254 254 255 256 256 25
289. k TN417 Lower right Modem Pool TN758 Lower right Data Line TN726 Upper left Digital Line TN754C TN2181 Upper left TN2224 B Analog Line TN746B TN2135 Upper left TN467 TN2144 TN2149 TN2180 TN2183 TN2215 TN468B TN791 TN793 TN2793 TN2214 Hybrid Line TN762B Upper left MET Line TN735 Upper left Radio Controller TN789 Upper left ISDN BRI 4 Wire TN556C D Upper left S T NT Line A Law 2 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades 393 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Figure 96 Example MDF connections Sc vc 6 1 0 GL 8L Lb OL SL v EL ZL IL OL 6 8 29 S v C Vk 662270 SMA 2J99JpI jeuueyd jeybiq Bojeuy Hod jeybiq Bojeuy Hod xod Hod did Hod eur uod Mod Bojeuy yod BuieuBis Wea Jod GZ vc EZ 1 0 GL 8L Lb OL SL pL EL ZL IL OL 6 8 29 S v FL yuna Hod 9ur LIN 340d it protection ISes circul Off prem Protection from hazardous voltages and currents is required for every off premises out of building or terminal installation Both over voltage protection lightning power induction and so forth and sneak line trunk current protectors must be either UL listed or current protection
290. k mounted Set the Carrier Address ID either before or after installing each G600 WARNING It is very important to align the cabinet with the correct holes in the frame because the distance between each varies To aid your installation of the rack mounted cabinet print a copy of the G600 mounting template provided on this CD Print the template on 11 x 17 paper so you can use it as an actual template Verify the carrier address ID on G600 cabinets 1 Loosen the thumb screws on the fan assembly and pull it straight out as shown in Figure 26 Fan assembly removal on page 79 Figure 26 Fan assembly removal fndpremv LJK 102600 2 Verify and if necessary set the carrier address ID for each cabinet as shown in Table 4 Carrier address ID settings on page 80 and Figure 27 Setting G600 carrier address ID on page 80 Cabinet A is the processor cabinet and Cabinets B C and D are optional port carrier cabinets S8100 supports up to three cabinets A B and C S8100 Installation and Upgrades 79 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Table 4 Carrier address ID settings on page 80 shows the settings for Cabinets A B C and D The Is and Os indicate closed and open positions respectively of the 6 rocker switches on the switch panel For example switches 2 4 and 5 are in the closed position for Cabinet A This table is embossed on the cabinet n
291. ks This section lists the tasks needed to power up and check the software s version and serial number Power up and observe LEDs When power is first applied to 58100 or when the system reboots the LEDs on TN2314 circuit pack light according to a predefined sequence See LED boot sequence on page 335 for details about the power up sequence Connect the laptop computer to 58100 For this procedure see Connect the laptop to 58100 system on page 154 Start a Telnet session 1 2 176 On the laptop click Start Run from the Windows task bar The Run dialog displays Enter telnet 192 11 13 6 Click OK A Telnet session opens on your desktop Enter Iucent3 for the login and password At the LAC prompt type bash S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Preliminary tasks Verify the software s version number The following procedure verifies the software s version number on the CD ROM that shipped with the system 1 From the BASH prompt type swversion and press Enter This displays information about the version of software running on the system The first line displays a string like Release S8 100 CM2 0 216 0 which shows the software s load number in this case load 216 Remove the CD ROM that shipped with the system from the cabinet s door Verify that the load number stamped on the CD ROM matches the load number found in step 1 If the load numbers match
292. ks and power supply 10 Proceed to Check AC power and ground for G600 on page 86 Rack mount two G600 cabinets Mount port Cabinet B directly above processor Cabinet A l Install the rectangular EMI gasket over the right TDM LAN bus cable routing slot on the top of Cabinet A Be sure the open corner of the gasket faces the rear of the cabinet Once installed Cabinet B should rest on and compress the gasket See Figure 37 Shift TDM LAN bus terminator from Cabinet A to Cabinet B on page 95 2 Follow the steps to Rack mount a G600 cabinet on page 82 Proceed to Check AC power and ground for G600 on page 86 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 85 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check AC power and ground for G600 Check AC power and ground for G600 A WARNING The alternating current AC power circuit must be dedicated to the system The circuit must not be shared with other equipment and must not be controlled by a wall switch The AC receptacle must not be located under the G600 s main distribution frame and must be easily accessible AX DANGER The latch only removes the cabinet s direct current DC power Unseating the power supply removes AC power from the power supply but not from the cabinet To remove the cabinet s AC power pull the AC power cord from the AC appliance connector behind the cabinet Av WARNING System grounding must comply with the general rules for grounding provided in
293. kward compatible although the echo cancellation feature can only be used with Release 9 or later software and after the feature is enabled The echo cancellation feature cancels echoes with delays of up to 96 ms Echo cancellation is disabled automatically when the circuit pack detects a 2100 Hz phase reversed tone put out by a high speed 56 kbps modem but not when it detects a 2100 Hz straight tone generated by a low speed 9 6 kbps modem For information about installing port circuit packs refer to Installing Port Circuit Packs For information about setting the option switches refer to Option Switch Settings For information about administering the circuit packs refer to the Administrators Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Echo cancellation must first be purchased then activated by someone with customer options login privileges Refer to the Administrators Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Use the following procedure to modify the settings NOTE You do not need to busyout the circuit packs to modify the settings But the modified settings do not take effect until either the port is busied out or the scheduled maintenance runs 1 display system parameters customer options and press Enter On screen 2 verify that the DS1 EchoCancellation field is set to y If not contact someone in your area with customer options login privileges 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004
294. l system when assigning users For example if your system uses extensions between 2000 and 3000 enter 2000 in the Start Ext field Up to 10 different ranges can be specified to pinpoint the exact set of extension blocks used by the local system The length of the start and end extension must agree with the Extension Length field For a 5 digit extension the default is 00000 to 99999 End Ext A 3 to 10 digit string Enter the ending extensions for the ranges of telephone numbers used on the local system For example if your system uses extensions between 2000 and 3000 enter 3000 in the End Ext field Warnings Display only This field displays a warning when a duplication or overlap of an extension range for another machine is being assigned 2 of 2 4 When you have finished entering information on this screen press F7 The system displays local machine s Machine Profile screen page 2 Active Alarms MmwA Logins 2 change machine Page 2 of 2 MACHINE PROFILE Allow Automatic Full Updates y Updates In y Out y Network Turnaround y enter command change machine 228 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information 5 Complete the fields on this screen using the information provided in Table 30 Field definitions page 2 of Machine Profile screen on page 229 Table 30 Field definitions page 2 of Machine Pr
295. l x 407216316 220029 sneak current fuse x 104307327 C6C cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin male to x 15 pin male 104307376 C6D cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin male on x each end 104307434 C6E cable 100 foot 30 5 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin male to x 50 pin female 104307475 C6F cable 50 foot 15 2 m shielded DS1 cable with 50 pin male to x 3 inch 7 62 cm stub 102381779 carbon block x 104410147 3BIE W wide gap gas tube x 105514756 3 1 analog line protector solid state x 102904893 4B1C carbon block with heat coil x 104401856 4B1E W wide gap gas tube with heat coil x 104386545 4C1S analog line protector solid state with heat coil x 105581086 4C3S 75 digital voice circuit protector solid state x 406144907 ITW Linx gas tube avalanche suppress x 901007120 ITW Linx ground bar used with above x 406304816 ITW Linx replacement fuse x 103972758 Data link protector 1 circuit x 103972733 Data link protector 8 circuits x 407063478 Electrostatic discharge ESD wrist strap 407691401 Z3A2 alarm adapter required with UPS x 2 of 2 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet A WARNING Be sure there is adequate ventilation in the area The internal room temperature must not exceed 50 C 122 F A G600 cabinet can be either floor or rac
296. lation script downloaded from the ART web site normally configures every system parameter Use the procedure in this section only if the customer has a maintenance contract and an installation script s file was not installed in the previous procedure Install the password file license file and installation scripts on page 182 NOTE Rebooting is required for these changes to take effect To avoid multiple rebooting set every customer related parameter and license file installation before rebooting the system The customer related parameters configured by this procedure are 1 RAS IP address 2 product ID definity and audix 3 alarm destination number and 4 alarm origination Manually setting RAS IP address 184 To connect the system to the modem you need to get the RAS IP address from the registration group at the time of License file generation The recommended procedure is 1 Telnet to the S8100 from the laptop 2 Goto the bash shell from LAC by typing bash Use the setip command to set the IP addresses The format is setip ras lt RAS IP Address for example setip ras 198 152 30 15 This completes the procedure to set the RAS IP addresses Instead of using the setip command you could use the following alternative procedure Connect to the 58100 through the web interface This is done by typing http 192 11 13 6 on the Internet Explorer with proxy server turned OFF Login as lucent3 and password luce
297. ld IEC 61000 4 8 Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000 4 11 Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000 3 2 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000 3 3 Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15 Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when answered by the called station answered by the attendant or routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all direct inward dialed DID calls forwarded back to the public switched tel
298. ld be in the same directory as Setup exe install wizard The ini file ffff should have read permissions The ini file ffff has the section xxxx and a value for the key yyyy Unable to determine screen resolution Escalate Screen resolution must be at least 640 x 480 Install wizard requires that the screen resolution be at least 640 x 480 Unable to determine the operating Escalate system Unable to determine operating system Escalate version Operating system must be Windows 2000 Server The underlying OS is not Windows 2000 Server Must have administrator privileges to run this program Installer does not have administrative privileges Unable to get free disk space on X drive Escalate Not enough space on X drive for new install Space required is Y Free up space and ensure that there is at least Y MB space on drive X Not enough space on X drive for an upgrade Space required is Y Free up space and ensure there is at least Y MB space on drive X Unable to parse path Escalate Unable to remove last slash from path Escalate Unable to get current path Escalate Unable to create XX XX Escalate Unable to create a target directory Ensure that the path is syntactically correct and you have access rights to the target drive Unable to allocate memory required to complete the copy file process Free memory by terminating as many running ap
299. le 64 Sneak fuse connector pinout1 of 2 Connector pin Pair fuse numbers number 26 1 1 27 2 2 28 3 3 29 4 4 30 5 5 31 6 6 32 7 7 33 8 8 34 9 9 35 10 10 36 11 11 37 12 12 38 13 13 39 14 14 40 15 15 41 16 16 42 17 17 1 of 2 396 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Table 64 Sneak fuse connector pinout2 of 2 Connector pin Pair fuse numbers number 43 18 18 44 19 19 45 20 20 46 21 21 47 22 22 48 23 23 49 34 24 50 25 25 2 of 2 Label the main distribution frame Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Figure 98 Label graphic symbols and nomenclature on page 398 shows the graphic symbols used on the supplied labels for the system cross connections information outlets and cables 1 Write the floor and building identification on each label as required 2 Insert the labels into the plastic holders 3 Snapthe holders into the appropriate locations on the MDF S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 397 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Figure 98 Label graphic symbols and nomenclature uo Ed ld Lid T ra 9 Ak aeos Figure notes 1 Floor and building identification 6 Site satellite closet 2 Cabinet 7 Tie circuit 3 Carrier 8 Floor 4
300. le command dlrestore Restores data from a specified source that was backed up with the dl backup command downloadboot Enables download of boot image to firmware identbackup Identifies the data on a specified source backed up with the d1backup command 1 of 3 343 GAS commands in bash Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands Table 56 Bash commands for Avaya logins 2 of 3 Command Description environment Displays the TN2314 temperature and voltage ranges ftpserv Enables the FTP service fileversion Queries Windows 2000 for executable file fwversion Displays command version number gamalarmstat Displays GAM alarm information formatted as follows mm dd yyyy month day year Windows 2000 Event Log Name System Security Application Alarm Sourcez Windows 20001 GAM LAC GSK VFM I GAS Windows 2000 Event Type Error Warn Info Alarm Type Major Minor Event ID Event field in Windows 2000 Event Log ACKed ACKed NACKED FAILURE NO OSS RESPONSE net user Used to add activate logins change passwords OSS Sets telephone numbers for outgoing INADS calls post If no argument is given postcodes are sent to the 860 firmware with the results sent to standard output rasdrop If no argument is given rasdrop schedules the RAS service to stop and restart in 2 minutes from when it was run reboot Reboots system as follows nice Shuts down applications and Windows 2000 in a graceful manner
301. le customer logins on page 187 for further information about logins Logins to enter Logins to enter the system Communication Manager Logins to enter INTUITY AUDIX ntadmin This login is built into the system dadmin This login must be enabled in the license file sa This is the normal customer level login on AUDIX must be enabled manually S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization 3 System initialization This chapter describes the procedures needed to initialize the S8100 system Starting with Release 10 for S8100 telephony features are activated or deactivated by the license file The System Parameters Customer Options form is no longer used to activate deactivate features you can still display this form to see which features are activated but you cannot use it to turn features on and off This chapter is organized as follows Connectivity and access to the 8100 system on page 174 Configure DHCP and TFTP servers on page 175 Preliminary tasks on page 176 License file password file and installation script overview on page 178 Obtain the license and password files on page 179 Obtain the installation script file on page 180 Install the password file license file and installation scripts on page 182 Resolve alarms on page 187 Check system s status on page 187 Place a test call on page 196
302. lephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Terminating resistor adapter 130 Figure 57 8 wide terminating resistor adapter 440A4 on page 130 shows an 8 pin 440A4 terminating resistor adapter The adapter has an 8 wide plug at 1 end a short cord and an 8 wide jack at the opposite end Figure 57 8 wide terminating resistor adapter 440A4 R C R C e on ounrk 1910013 RPY 012098 Figure notes 1 8 wide plug 2 8 wide jack S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install the BRI terminating resistor Closet mounted 110RA1 12 The 1 12 terminating resistor block consists of 12 2 pair circuits and provides the 100 Ohm termination used for ISDN BRI circuits Figure 58 Terminating resistor block 110 1 12 on page 131 shows the wiring of the 110 1 12 Three rows of 110D 4 connector blocks contain resistors and capacitors The bottom row is designated as the input row and the top and middle rows are designated as the output rows The circuit assembly is mounted on a standard 110A 100 pair mounting base Figure 58 Termi
303. lifting precautions An empty G600 weighs 15 8 17 6 kg 35 39 Ibs 82 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Figure 29 Checking rack s mounting holes and placing first mounting screws 0000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000 Ld indprac1 LJK 102400 Figure notes 1 Spacingofrack s mounting holes 2 Mounting screw S8100 Installation and Upgrades 83 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Figure 30 Rack mounting the G600 0000000000000000000000000000000020020 e TT 2505250009550 907 indprac2 101901 7 Tighten the two top mounting screws 8 Install and tighten the remaining screws See Figure 30 Rack mounting the G600 on page 84 NOTE Follow the same steps to install the G600 with mounting bracket in the medial position See Figure 31 Rack mounting the G600 in medial position on page 85 84 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and cable a G600 cabinet Figure 31 Rack mounting the G600 in medial position indprac3 KLC 101901 9 Reinstall the circuit pac
304. link types the license file must turn on the following features Co Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway and ASAI Link Core Capabilities for ASAI IP links and or Computer Telephony Adjunct Links for ADJ IP links These settings can be verified by displaying the System Parameters Customer Options form In addition the links must be administered on the DLG Administration page of the IP Services form avameters cuzstoner o OPTIONAL FEATURES Abbreviated Dialing Enhanced List Analoy Trunk Incoming Call ID A D Grp Sys List Dialing Start at 01 Answer Supervision hy Call ARS AAR Partitioning ARS AAR Dialing without FAC ASAI Link Core Capabilities ASAL Link Plus Capabilities fisync Transfer Mode CATM gt Trunking ATMS Attendant Vectoring y eeeeeet ct fiudible Message Waiting Authorization Codes Branch CAS Main Change COR hy FAC Conputer Telephony Adjunct Links Co Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway Cug Of Calls Redirected Off net DCS Basic DCS Call Coverage DCS with Rerouting Digital Loss Plan Modification DS1 MSP DSi Echo Cancellation tee eee eee asst 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration overview f Avaya Site Administration This chapter provides information about Avaya Site Administration a system management tool that the customer can purchase as an option with the Avaya Integrated Manag
305. llow off Fan alarm Red on Closed Yellow on 341 Status LEDs Other circuit packs 342 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 GAS commands in bash Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands G GAS commands in bash This chapter provides information about bash commands that are used in the installation process It also includes information about the setip command These commands are not available to the customer Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands The following commands are useful during installation and maintenance tasks and are allowed for the avaya logins After opening the LAC bash shell enter the name of the command Refer to Maintenance for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 149 for detailed information Table 56 Bash commands for Avaya logins 1 of 3 Command Description alarmorig Turns on alarm origination from the GAM INADS alarmstat Gives global alarm status major minor or none for the GAM Communication Manager and INTUITY AUDIX autobackup Enables and disables backup commands cleargamalarm Clears every GAM alarm after failure conditions are repaired dlIbackup Backs up translations and other data to the specified destination didisable Disables SNMP SNMP dlenable SNMP Enables SNMP 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 avaya help Displays help for every availab
306. lly continuous or made electrically continuous by bonding around insulated joints plastic pipe or plastic water meters to the point where the protector ground wire connects A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building a concrete encased ground or a ground ring If these grounds are not available the water pipe ground can be supplemented by 1 of the following types of grounds e Other local metal underground systems or structures Local underground structures such as tanks and piping systems Rod and pipe electrodes A 5 8 inch 1 6 cm solid rod or 3 4 inch 2 cm conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet 2 4 m Plate electrodes Must have a minimum of 2 f 0 185 m of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil Concrete Encased Ground An electrode encased by at least 2 inches 5 1 cm of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth The electrode must be at least 20 feet 6 1 m of 1 or more steel reinforcing bars or rods 1 inch 1 3 cm in diameter or at least 20 feet 6 1 m of bare solid copper 4 AWG 26 mm wire Ground Ring A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least 2 5 feet 0 76 m below the earth s surface The ground ring must be at least 20 feet 6 1 m of 2 AWG 35 mm bare copper wire Approved floor grounds WARNING If
307. login This login is disabled from the factory It must be enabled and a password chosen before it can be used See Set up login accounts on page 304 Sa This login is used in the Voice Messaging application It has full customer administration privileges See the INTUITY AUDIX documentation Table 49 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins for sa vm and browse on page 301 for a list of commands accessible to this login This login is disabled from the factory It must be enabled and a password chosen before it can be used See Set up login accounts on page 304 NOTE The stand alone INTUITY AUDIX system login sa normally produces a menu This feature is not supported on 58100 Every login results in a Forms Screen interface Table 49 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins for sa vm and browse 1 of 2 Login Command sa vm browse add x x audit x x change x x copy x display x x x exit x x x get x x help x x x list x x x logoff x x x print x x x remove x x reset x 1of2 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 301 Set up customer logins Windows logins for customers Table 49 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins for sa vm and browse 2 of 2 Login Command sa vm browse test x x x toggle x x x trace x x x 2 of 2 Customer s web access logins The following login groups are used f
308. ly from the Avaya Publications Center toll free at 1 800 457 1235 voice and 1 800 457 1764 fax International customers should use 1 207 866 6701 voice and 1 207 626 7269 fax 68 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 About this book Sending comments Sending comments Avaya welcomes your comments about this book To reach us by Mail send your comments to Avaya Inc Product Documentation Group Room B3 H13 1300 W 120 Ave Westminster CO 80234 USA E mail send your comments to document avaya com Fax send your comments to 1 303 538 1741 Please be sure to include the name and number 555 233 146 of this book 8100 Installation and Upgrades 69 April 2004 About this book Sending comments 70 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet 1 Install and cable a G600 cabinet This chapter describes procedures for installing and cabling the cabinet to physically connect and access an 58100 Media Server with G600 Media Gateways Also for either a G600 or CMC1 Media Gateway Section II of this chapter describes procedures for installing telephones and making auxiliary connections NOTE A G600 is a rack mounted cabinet whereas a CMC1 is a wall or table mounted cabinet For information about installing a CMC1 cabinet see Appendix I Install and cable a I cabinet on page 357 NOTE The physical installation of a G600 cabinet is similar to
309. m Origination Activated to OSS Numbers field is set to y and press Enter 3 Verify that the Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification fields are set to y 4 Test remote access port to n Verify external modem option settings 1 Connectto the 8100 desktop Click Start Settings Control Panel Double click Phone and Modem Options hw N Open the Modems tab Verify that the modem s port is attached to COMI 5 Select the US Robotics 33 6K FAX Ext modem and click the Properties button Verify that the Speaker s volume is set to mid range Wait for Dial Tone before Dialing box is checked 276 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Troubleshooting Modem s configuration and administration Click the Advanced tab Click the Advanced Port Settings button Click the Defaults button and then the OK button Click the Change Default Preferences button then click the Advanced tab Se lt 10 Verify that the defaults are set Data bits is 8 Parity is none Stop bits is 1 Modulation is Standard 11 Click OK three times to save and exit External modem not used NOTE This procedure is necessary if the factory shipped modem is not used 1 Connectto the 8100 desktop Click Start Settings Control Panel 3 Double click Phone and Modem Options The Install New Modem wizard is displayed Install New Modem Windows NT will now try to detect your modem Before conti
310. m a LAC bash shell to determine the current status of each application Table 58 Example W2000 12 10 W2000 WEB 1 1 W2000 TERMSERV 1 1 W2000 Console 1 2 CoResServ 5 5 Communication 51 51 Manager SNMP 3 3 CornerStone 4 4 AUDIX 15 33 AUDIXNet 0 5 MISC 24 0 348 8100 avaya1 gt statapp UP UP UP in use UP UP UP UP PARTIALLY UP DOWN UP 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 GAS commands in bash Other commands net user commands The net user commands manipulate Windows 2000 level logins on the 8100 system and can be used to add new logins change passwords on existing logins or simply to enable disable existing Windows 2000 accounts To add a new user execute the following command from a bash shell net user username password To change the password of an existing login execute the following command from a bash shell net user username newpassword To enable an existing login that is disabled execute the following command from a bash shell net user username active 8100 Installation and Upgrades 349 April 2004 GAS commands in bash Other commands 350 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Installation connectivity quick reference Installation connectivity quick reference This appendix provides a tear out quick reference sheet summarizing physical connections access methods and login information for 8100 You can physically connect to an S8100 system in several way
311. m immediate backups Schedule backups see Schedule backups on page 219 Restore backups Access last scheduled backup information View contents of backup location NOTE As you navigate the backup and restore screens the main menu items remain available Use the Back button to return to previous screens 8100 Installation and Upgrades 321 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface Perform immediate backup 322 To perform an immediate backup click Immediate Backup The following screen displays Home Administer System User Services Download Software a Immediate Backup a Scheduled Backups a Restore Choose items for immediate backup MultiVantage announcements MultiVantage translation files AUDIX announcements Aup translations amp messages Auprt trans names amp messages Aup translations amp names Auprx translations none from Au Destination a Last scheduled backup results a Contents of backup location Warning Before starting this backup operation any previous backup data from the destination will be erased Backup 5 Other locations AVAYA 1 From the Destination pull down menu select a backup destination This can be a LAN address or a PCMCIA Flash Disk For this example select pcmcia 2 Select items for immediate backup 3 Click Backup After you click Backup the following screen displays
312. machine name 1 Windows reboots Update INTUITY AUDIX Enable the 8100 web page using a browser Click the Administer System link The web page prompts for login and password Use the lucent3 login with the new password supplied by INADS 2 Click the INTUITY AUDIX Networking link Click the Administrative Menu link after the page loads Click the Local Machine Administration link to load the Local Machine Administration web page Click the change button in the middle of the page for INTUITY AUDIX to re populate its databases with the current settings 3 Exitthe web pages and restart INTUITY AUDIX Restarting INTUITY AUDIX Enable a Telnet session to the S8100 s LAC bash shell Execute the shutdown Audix command at the shell prompt Select start Audix when the shutdown finishes When INTUITY AUDIX restarts it recognizes the new machine Changing system name 1 When the system is up enable a SAT session using either telnet or Avaya Site Administration Login as dinit lucent will grant the same permissions with the appropriate password 2 Enter change system parameters features On page 4 change the switch name to match the Windows 2000 and INTUITY AUDIX switch names Connect to SAT session via Telnet This method of access is used primarily by technicians who use one of the services logins This connection type will access a SAT emulator to administer and maintain the 58100 1 Enter a command after logging in to the S8
313. me Your country s translation file for call processing tones is copied into dsp0 USA Meanwhile the old dsp0 USA file is saved as dsp0 USA sav in case you need to restore these settings You are successful when the dsp file successfully copied message displays It is now safe to start CornerStone and AUDIX 11 Use the log file to confirm successful completion 12 Enterstart CornerStone The message addproc succeeded displays upon successful completion This command will start AUDIX as well as CornerStone 13 Enter distat to confirm that CornerStone and AUDIX UP Call processing will now be based on the tones specific to your country S8100 Installation and Upgrades 191 April 2004 System initialization Enable and disable SNMP Enable and disable SNMP By default SNMP is enabled on If you are not using SNMP disable it To disable SNMP enter d1disable snmp from a bash session The command d1disable snmp disables SNMP from being run when CMC1 is started To enable SNMP enter dlenable snmp from a bash session The command dlenable snmp enables snmp so that it automatically runs when CMC is started You must reboot your system for the SNMP settings to be effective Check customer option screen 192 From SAT type display system parameters customer options and press Enter to display the system parameters customer options screen Ensure that the version is V10 The license fil
314. mergency transfer and as normal extension 10 35 l9 24 49 2820 ST EMXR Peo ru 7 BE B im 4 5 6 8 Em 7 TC TK LC ST TC 1M 1m 2 2m 3M ALARM MONITORS 11 1 1758582b MMR 042996 Figure notes 1 Tonetwork interface facility 4 ToCO Trunk circuit pack 2 Toblue or white station field 5 To power transfer unit 3 To Analog Line circuit pack 6 To control carrier s AUX connector Install telephone for power transfer unit Follow the appropriate procedure for your installation Trunk auxiliary field telephone used only for emergency transfer 1 Connecta pair of wires between the 48V and GRD terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block and the EM TRANS RELAY PWR terminal See Figure 66 Connections for telephone used for emergency transfer on page 146 2 Connect CO trunk leads from the purple field to the TC terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk Connect CO trunk leads from the green field to the TK terminals on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each trunk 4 Connect the ST leads on the yellow emergency transfer row connecting block for each emergency transfer telephone to the ST terminal appearance in the yellow trunk auxiliary field The ST terminal leads should
315. ministered remote users on page 237 View remote extensions on page 238 Initial administration tasks To perform initial administration complete the tasks shown in sequential order in Table 28 Initial administration tasks on page 222 Confirm that each of the tasks are performed as some may have been completed by the technician at installation The design center provides information for completing digital networking administration Ensure that you have design center specifications for TCP IP network channels the local machine and every remote machine S8100 Installation and Upgrades 221 April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Initial administration tasks Table 28 Initial administration tasks 1 of 2 Task Description Screens windows or commands Complete Windows and switch administration normally done by the technician at the time of installation Define the machine name TCP IP address and the switch to work with AUDIX digital networking Windows Settings screens and Switch screens View digital networking settings See View the Feature Options window on page 223 Verify that the purchased digital networking options are correctly displayed List Configuration window Verify or change the number of administered remote users normally done by the technician at the time of installation See Change number of administered remote users on page 224 Define the
316. mode No TN2308 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk No 2 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Circuit pack installation A WARNING When handling a circuit pack or any component of a G600 system always wear an authorized wrist ground strap Connect the strap to the ground connector provided on the system s cabinet Circuit pack slot loading 1 Check the reinstalled circuit packs Every circuit pack slot in the G600 is a universal slot Any slot can contain any type of port circuit pack with the following exceptions for Cabinet A See Figure 41 G600 cabinet and slot numbering on page 105 e TN2314 Processor circuit pack must be installed in slot 2 of Cabinet A e TN744E Call Classifier Tone Detector circuit pack should be installed in slot 3 2 Load every port circuit pack See Table 7 Circuit pack installation order loading on page 105 for the recommended circuit pack layout Figure 41 G600 cabinet and slot numbering
317. mps 2 Ensure that the cabinet is connected to an unswitched or always on electrical outlet on the UPS 3 Foran Avaya provided UPS connect and administer the UPS See Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections on page 127 NOTE If an Avaya provided UPS is wired as recommended holdover time for each power outage is 1 minute before an automatic shutdown The UPS may handle any subsequent power outages based on its total battery capacity Cabinet s power switch DANGER The latch acts as the DC power switch and only removes DC power from the cabinet not AC power To remove AC power pull the AC power cord from the appliance inlet See Figure 85 CMC1 power supply on page 374 8100 Installation and Upgrades 373 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Figure 85 CMC1 power supply evdmrin2 KLC 050901 Figure notes 1 Latch 2 Ringing option switch and setting label Connect cabinet s grounds and other grounds Follow these additional grounding requirements The approved ground wire must be green 6 AWG 40 16 mm copper stranded wire This is in addition to the ground wire in the AC power cord Bond every approved ground at the single point ground to form a single grounding electrode system Install the ground block and ground wire on
318. mstat System Alarm Status Global major Commun icaMgr none Audix major productid productid lists the product identification numbers for the system A CAUTION Record the information from the productid command This information could be required if problems are encountered during the update 8100 Installation and Upgrades 13 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD The following figure shows an example of the productid command Figure 5 productid GAM product id 7880080808081 AUDIRX CornerStone product id 2880800808888 MultiVantage product id 1234567896 4 swversion swversion lists the version of software for NT CYGNUS GAM LAC Watchdog Communication Manager AUDIX and CornerStone Record the current software version A CAUTION Record the information from the swversion command This information could be required if problems are encountered during the update The following figure shows an example of the swversion command Figure 6 swversion Software Versions and Loads Release 88188 MU2 0 222 8 NT 5 6 2195 Service Pack 4 CYGNUS CYGWIN_NT 5 GAM R612c 66 1 222 6 LAC R612c 66 1 222 6 Watchdog R612c 66 1 222 6 Commun icaMgr R 12c 66 1 222 8 fiudix N5 1 CornerStone 1 0 1 5 setip setip is used to display or set the IP parameters for the S8100 If you execute setip without any parameters the command will list the
319. mum voltage rating of 600V or as required by local regulations The following devices protect the system from over voltages Analog trunks use the 507B sneak protector or equivalent Over voltage protection is normally provided by the local telephone company Analog voice terminals use one of the following types of combined over voltage and sneak current protection or equivalent Carbon block with heat coil for UL code 4B1C Gas tube with heat coil for UL code 4B1E W Solid state with heat coil for UL code 4C1S e DCP and ISDN BRI terminals use the solid state 4C3S 75 with heat coil protector or equivalent e DSI TI circuits require isolation from exposed facilities This isolation may be provided by a channel service unit CSU T1 or other equipment that provides equivalent protection Install sneak fuse panels Sneak current protection is required between the incoming RJ21X or RJ2GX network interface and the system for both trunk and off premises circuit packs The model 507B sneak current fuse panel or equivalent is recommended for sneak current protection See Figure 43 Model 507B sneak fuse panel on page 108 Figure 43 Model 507B sneak fuse panel Sneak Current Protector 507B Figure notes 1 507B sneak current protector 3 25 pair female connector out comcode comcode 107435091 846300994 2 25 male connector in 4 220029 fuses inside panel
320. n be used with G600 Table 6 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 103 lists the circuit packs that cannot be used with G600 Table 5 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules 1 of 3 Apparatus code Name Allowed 650A AC power unit Yes NAAI Fiber Optic Cable Adapter circuit pack Yes TN417 Auxiliary Trunk Yes TN429 B C D Analog Direct Inward Outward Dialing DIOD Central Yes Office Trunk TN429C Analog Central Office Trunk Yes TN429D Analog DIOD Trunk Analog Loop Start Yes TN433 Speech Synthesizer Yes TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN437B Tie Trunk Australia future availability Yes 1of 3 100 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 Table 5 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules 2 of 3 Apparatus code Name Allowed TN438B Central Office Trunk Yes TN439 Tie Trunk Yes TN447 Central Office Trunk Yes TN457 Speech Synthesizer Yes TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN464GP DS1 Interface 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Yes TN465B C Central Office Trunk Yes TN467 Analog Line Yes TN468B Analog Line Yes TN479 Analog Line Yes TN553 Packet Data Line Yes TN556C D Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface Yes 4 Wire S T NT Interface ISDN BRI
321. n the Machine Profile screen NOTE The Digital Machine Administration window must be completed for a remote machine before completing the Machine Profile screen for that machine 1 Start at the AUDIX command prompt screen 2 Enter change machine remote machine name at the enter command prompt The system displays the Machine Profile screen for a remote machine page 1 Alarms MmwA MACHINE PROFILE Machine Name drbiglO Tupe UEX Location remote digital Voiced Name n Extension Length 5 Uoice ID 1 Default Community 1 ADDRESS RANGES Prefix Start Ext End Ext Warnings 53000 56999 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 0 enter command change machine drbig10 NOTE If you do not know the names of the remote machines enter list machines at the enter command prompt The system displays a list of every machine administered on the system 3 Complete the fields in this window using the information provided in Table 32 Field definitions remote machine profile screen page 1 on page 234 NOTE The Machine Name Type Location and Voice ID fields are display only and cannot be changed S8100 Installation and Upgrades 233 April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information 234 Table 32 Field definitions remote machine profile screen page 1 1 of 2 Field Valid input Description Machine Name Display only Displays the machine n
322. n window opens when the e mail has been sent 4 Open the e mail and download the attachment onto the hard disk on your laptop 8 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the S8100 with a CD Procedure to Update the S8100 with a CD High level steps 1 Change the IP address on your laptop 2 Disable the proxy servers on your Internet Explorer Connect your laptop and the TN2314 4 Sharethe CD ROM and activate the guest account on your laptop 5 Telnet to the TN2314 6 Open a SAT window 7 Verify the station length 8 Verify the emergency number and no license incoming call number 9 Savethe Communication Manager translations 10 Open a bash shell 11 Record the customer network and product information 12 Shutdown AUDIX 13 Back up the system 14 Update the release with the CD 15 Execute the swversion command 16 Load the RFA license file RFA Authentication file and ART installscript sh file 17 Rebootthe system 18 Restore the customer translations 19 Enter the customer data using setip 20 Set the timezone the time and re administer the customer logins and passwords 21 Verify AUDIX extension length 22 Verify scheduled backups 23 Reboot nice 24 Check the health of the system 25 Verify correct displays make internal and external calls 26 Verify AUDIX greetings and auto attendant 27 Testalarming 28 Backup the translations S8100 Installation and Upgrades 9 April 2004 Update the S81
323. name assigned on the IP Interfaces screen Do not type any Remote Port xxx Type y in the Enabled field for each completed row Enabling the local node turns on the listen socket Test the external connection to the LAN To test the external IP connections ping the C LAN server and ping a known computer connected to your network If everything is configured correctly the Result column on the Ping Results screen reads pass If it reads abort verify the IP address information and check the connectivity including the cabling S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions Add C LAN functionality 1 Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack Z2 ip address 192 168 10 21 CN PING RESULTS End pt IP Port Port Type Result Time ms Error Code 192 168 10 21 01A13 CLAN PASS 10 1124 s 2 ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of the customer s gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack Type ping ip address nnn nnn nnn nnn board UUCSS and press Enter The variable nnn nnn nnn nnn is the IP address of another computer beyond the gateway and UUCSS is the cabinet carrier and slot of the TN799DP C LAN circuit pack
324. name can be customized Logins must be 3 to 6 alphabetic numeric characters or a combination of both password must be from 4 to 11 characters in length and contain at least 1 alphabetic and 1 numeric symbol Password aging is an optional feature that the super user administering the logins can activate see the following NOTE If several users are logging in and out at the same time a user may see the message Transient command conflict detected please try later After the users have completed logging in or out the terminal is available for use 8100 Installation and Upgrades 305 April 2004 Set up customer logins Communication Manager logins for customers Forced password aging Forced password aging operates as follows The password for each login can be aged starting with the date the password was created or changed and continuing for a specified number of days 1 to 99 e 7 days before the password expiration date the user is notified that the password is about to expire at the login prompt When the password expires the user is required to enter a new password into the system before logging in Ifa login is added or removed the Security Measurement reports are not updated until the next hourly poll or when a clear measurements security violations command is entered e Once a non super user has changed the password the user must wait 24 hours to change the password again Logoff notification
325. nating resistor block 110RA1 12 r910014 RPY 012098 Figure notes 1 Circuit 1 5 Inputrow 2 Circuit 12 6 Only 1 circuit shown to all 12 circuits 3 Output row A 2APR per block 4 Output row 7 110D 4 connector block Figure 59 Typical installation of terminating resistor block on page 132 shows the wiring connections for the 11ORA1 12 terminal block The TN556 BRI switch port is terminated to bottom row C S8100 Installation and Upgrades 131 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install the BRI terminating resistor 132 Figure 59 Typical installation of terminating resistor block TRT1R1 Figure notes Part of terminating resistor block White or purple field Part of 4 pair blue field From ISDN T interface circuit 2 10 pair To ISDN S T interface terminals A U N E 6 2 cross connect term_blk RPY 012098 Basic multipoint option 4 pair horizontal cables Row A Row B Row C For point to point wiring the top row connects to the blue station field The pair connects from the 110RA1 12 to the standard 4 pair circuit Pair 1 from the 110RA1 12 connects to Pair 1 of the station field and Pair 2 connects to Pair 3 of the station field Connect row B output to the 2rd terminal multipoint applications terminal common to the multipoint c
326. nce Figure 75 TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate Figure notes 1 PCMCIA slots 2 RedLED 3 Green LED 4 Amber LED uu In Use Maj Alarm Min Alarm Clock Not Remove When In Use Service Access Emergency Transfer On Auto Off Complete o Shutdown E Do Not Remove Board Unitl Shutdown Is Complete PCMCIA in use LED Emergency Transfer On Auto Off switch Complete Shutdown LED Safe to pull board when green LED is on steady Shut down switch Gracefully shuts down system S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 337 LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor LED boot sequence LED states Table 53 TN2314 circuit pack s LED states on page 338 summarizes the TN2314 circuit pack LED states Table 53 TN2314 circuit pack s LED states Shut down Boot sequence 3 min 45 sec sequence Other N 2 S t E Sig 54 o 5 g 5 2 S 2 5 2 8 8 e 3 5 z o aD 9 s 8 3 o 2 a c o c c o 2 a 2 2 2 E 5 9 o 5 sisi 2 LEDname color 8 8 3 5 51518 8 TN2314 CPA red on on on on on SW on on on alarm TN2
327. nding conductors 92 378 emergency transfer power panel 141 equipment room hardware 100 error messages 273 external modem 99 385 G600 72 ground block 374 Intuity AUDIX languages 313 315 main distribution frame and external modem 384 Message Manager 211 multipoint adapters 133 off premises station wiring 136 password file 182 8100 72 script 182 download from ART 180 install 183 manual installation 184 sneak fuse panels 108 395 system cabinet 79 362 telephones 113 installconfig command 275 Installing INTUITY AUDIX languages 313 installing the cabinet 71 357 integrated channel service unit ICSU 119 INTUITY AUDIX commands 208 Communication Manager administration 199 digital networking 221 languages installation 313 315 networking 221 IP solutions Media Processor 247 IP trunks installing 244 IP setting RAS IP address 347 IP600 installation unpacking 74 ISDN BRI fanout of multipoint installations 135 terminating resistor 130 ISDN PRI adding 256 L label main distribution frames 397 LAC bash commands listed 343 LAN IP Trunk 244 setting customer s information 347 laptop computer connecting 154 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Index lead designations 284 port boards 129 telephones 129 LEDs 176 alarms 336 attendant console 339 boot sequence 335 circuit packs 339 on Maintenance Processor circuit packs 336 power supply 341 TN2314 Proce
328. ndows 2000 Machine Type Display only Displays local Location Display only Displays local Voiced Name y yes The Voiced Name field contains an n until you n no record a name for the machine This field automatically changes to y when you record a name for the machine Extension Length An integer 3 10 Enter the length of extensions on the local system The value you enter must match the extension length in your dial plan Voice ID Display only Displays a system assigned identifier that you must use to identify the machine if you decide to record machine names Default Community An integer 1 15 If you have administered your system to use community sending restrictions enter the default community number for your user population Prefix 0 21 alphanumeric characters Prefixes can be used on the local machine but they limit functionality and are not recommended For details about the use and implications of prefixes see the AUDIX Fax Administration documentation 1of2 227 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information Table 29 Field definitions page 1 of Machine Profile screen 2 of 2 Field Valid input Procedure Description Start Ext A 3 to 10 digit string Enter the starting extensions for the ranges of telephone numbers used on the local system Designate a block of switch extensions that can be used at the loca
329. nformation screen opens Click Start RFA Application The RFA Application Main Menu screen opens From the RFA Application Main Menu click Maintenance gt PCN Update from 10 Enter the SAP order number Verify that the SAP order data is correct Record the transaction number Enter the SID Verify the SID data Complete the customer and general system information Complete the module and application detail information Complete the feature information Complete the transaction Record the SID and the new SID version number Deliver the files from RFA to your laptop A U N At the RFA Application Main Menu click Deliver Files Enter the SID and click Retrieve Verify the SID detailed information and click Accept Close the confirmation window Select a delivery option There two delivery options available on the Request to Deliver Files Detail screen 1 Option one Download Files to My PC 2 Option two Download Files using e mail S8100 Installation and Upgrades 7 April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Obtaining the license file and Authentication file from Remote Feature Activation RFA Option one Download Files to My PC Use the following steps to download RFA files to your PC 1 Click Download Files to My PC You can click on the file name use the Express Delivery option or right click on the file name to download the file Clicking on the file name Clicking on the file name in the Download File column sends eac
330. ng Access 2 Administer the form listed under Code Calling Access in Administrator 5 Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Multiple integrated recorded announcements S8100 provides 3 methods of integrated announcements Both can be used the same system The methods are e TN750C Announcement circuit pack e CWYI announcements e TN2501 VAL circuit pack NOTE The wav files that contain an S8100 s announcements can be used with the VAL voice announcements on the LAN circuit pack in other DEFINITY server systems only if the S8100 s wav file attributes match those used by VAL To use an 58100 wav files with VAL they must be created with the following attributes PCM encoded 8 bits per sample 8 KHz sampling rate and single channel Mono mode S8100 Installation and Upgrades 253 April 2004 Hardware additions Multiple integrated recorded announcements TN750C Announcement circuit pack The TN750C circuit pack contains on board flash memory that provides internal backup of announcements Thus the TN750C circuit pack does not require the save and restore processes TN750C announcements cannot be backed up and restored to an external device with an 8100 system The TN750C circuit pack can replace a TN750 or TN750B The difference in operation is that the TN750C automatically restores and reports the availability of announcements from its internal flash memory in 5 minutes rather than the 40 min
331. ng procedures be sure to make note of and save both old and new information S8100 Installation and Upgrades 155 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections Configure the laptop laptop running WINDOWS 95 Set up the network PCMCIA interface to communicate with the 8100 system 1 In Windows Explorer right click Network Neighborhood folder and click Properties 2 Inthe Configuration tab click File and Print Sharing Client for Microsoft Networks 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 30589 3C589B Mircom CreditCard Ethernet Adapter 10 100 TCP IP gt 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 3C589 3C583B n CreditCard Ethernet Adapter 10 100 Add f _Bemove __Broneries The File and Print Sharing dialog displays File and Print Sharing L 3 Choose the I want to be able to give others access to my files box 4 Click OK and return to the Network dialog 5 Right click Network Neighborhood and select Properties to return to the Network dialog 156 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections 6 Click the Access Control tab NOTE Before continuing record the current settings on the Access Control tab This information is needed to restore the laptop after work is finished with the S8100 system 7 Ensure that Share Level Access Control is selected 8 Click OK Click Yes if the following message displays Do you want all connec
332. ng this switch the following safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons Read and understand every instruction Follow every warning and instruction marked on the switch e This product can be hazardous if immersed in water To avoid the possibility of electrical shock do not use it near water The 1152A1 PDU contains components sensitive to electrostatic discharge Do not touch the circuit boards unless instructed to do so S8100 Installation and Upgrades 123 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment This product should be operated only from the type of AC and optional DC power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of the type of AC power being provided contact a qualified service person Donotallow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord can be damaged by persons walking on it e Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of line or electric shock e Disconnect the cords on this product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions e Ifthe power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into it e If it has been exposed to rain or water e Ifit was dropped or the housing has been damaged e If it exhibits a distinct change in performance e
333. nge pins NOTE The G600 s power cord software and documentation CDs Processor Interface cable wrist strap and cabinet s feet are shipped inside the cabinet s accessory compartment See Figure 24 Equipment packed with a single G600 cabinet on page 75 The optional G600 port cabinet is shipped with AC power cord or international power cord kit mounting Kit TDM LAN bus cable and EMI gasket S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Unpack and inspect Figure 24 Equipment packed with a single G600 cabinet qrdpprts LUK 102600 Figure notes 1 G600 cabinet with 650A power supply 9 External modem purchased separately 2 Screws for rack mounting The following circuit packs are shipped with the 3 IP Media Processor adapter may be preinstalled e TN2314 Processor 4 259A adapter for C LAN e TN744E Call Classifier Detector 5 Cabinet s feet and screws e TN2302 Media Processor 6 Processor Interface cable e TN799DP C LAN 7 Flash card backup The remote modem s shelf is also included with 8 AC power cord NEMA 5 15P or IEC 320 he packaging or international power cord kit 8100 Installation and Upgrades 75 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Unpack and inspect Figure 25 Front view of a G600 Jn
334. nprotected Type 1 ion Manager 1 Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Inter Building Communicat Protected Protected E amp M Protected Type 1 ion Manager Type 1 Type 1 Compatible Standard Compatible Plus Protectio n Unit Collocated Net E amp M Type Any PBX E amp M Unprotected Type 1 Integrated 1 Standard Add DS1 tie and OPS Service interruption Because the addition of DS1 tie trunk service may require a service interruption notify the customer when the addition will occur 252 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions Add speech synthesis Add speech synthesis The TN725B Speech Synthesizer circuit pack is required when Voice Message Retrieval Automatic Wakeup or Do Not Disturb features are activated The TN725B circuit pack does not require administration 1 Determine the port assignment of the Speech Synthesizer circuit pack being added 2 Install the TN725B Speech Synthesizer circuit pack in the designated carrier slot Add Code Calling access The tones for the Code Calling feature are generated by the TN2182 B tone clock circuit pack in the port networks 1 Install a TN763B C D auxiliary trunk circuit pack or a TN457 speech synthesizer circuit pack and connect for Loudspeaker Paging The Code Calling Access feature shares the same ports as Loudspeaker Paging An auxiliary trunk circuit pack provides 4 ports for Loudspeaker Paging and Code Calli
335. ns had purple labels can be removed or installed when the power is on Avaya Product Documentation web page You can download the latest version of this book 555 233 146 from the Avaya web site You must have access to the Internet and a copy of Acrobat Reader must be installed on your personal computer Avaya makes every effort to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate However information can change after we publish this book The Avaya web site may contain new product information and updates to the information in this book To download the latest version of this book 1 Access the Avaya web site at http support avaya com Click Product Documentation The system displays the Welcome to Product Documentation page 3 Type 555 233 146 in the search window and then click Search The system displays the Product Documentation Search Results page 4 Scroll down to find the latest issue number and then click the book title that is to the right of the latest issue number 5 Onthe next page scroll down and click one of the following options PDF Format to download the book in regular PDF format ZIP Format to download the book in zipped PDF format Avaya Publications Center In addition to this book other description installation maintenance and administration books and documentation library CDs are available This document 555 233 146 and any other Avaya documentation can be ordered direct
336. nsistency between the license and 58100 and fix it by obtaining and installing a valid license License Server A component of the Global Sanity Keeper GSK that looks for a special encrypted control file whose contents indicate which serial number of the TN795 Processor card is permitted to execute on and which application are allowed to run If the file is present the license information is read from the file If not no licenses are granted light emitting diode LED A semiconductor device that produces light when voltage is applied LEDs provide a visual indication of the operational status of hardware components the results of maintenance tests the alarm status of circuit packs and the activation of telephone features local area network LAN A networking arrangement designed for a limited geographical area Generally a LAN is limited in range to a maximum of 6 2 miles and provides high speed carrier service with low error rates Common configurations include daisy chain star including circuit switched ring and bus Lucent Access Control LAC A module that governs maintenance access to the Avaya application software maintenance Activities involved in keeping a telecommunications system in proper working condition the detection and isolation of software and hardware faults and automatic and manual recovery from these faults maintenance update This is a software update the processor is not replaced major alarm An in
337. nstall Message Manager To install Message Manager first unzip the self extracting file downloaded in the previous section then run the setup wizard 1 Exit every application on the desktop and double click the self extracting file downloaded in the previous section Download Message Manager on page 271 2 Specify a folder to hold the unzipped files This can be the same temporary file you are currently in which holds the self extracting file Browse to this folder and click the Unzip button The Setup exe file is extracted along with some documentation files 3 Double click the Setup exe file The Avaya Message Manager Installation wizard starts 8100 Installation and Upgrades 271 April 2004 Message Manager Install Message Manager 272 4 Follow the prompts to complete the installation In the Tell Me About window click the Continue radio button You can first click the Install Overview or other radio buttons to read about the installation requirements and available documentation but you will eventually need to click the Continue button to proceed with the installation In the Install Type window click the Single User Install radio button In the Select Destination Directory window specify the folder in which to install the software You can accept the default or browse to or create a different folder For example C Program Files Avaya Message Manager In the Backup Replaced Files window click
338. nstallation and Upgrades 367 April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Install three vertically mounted cabinets Figure 82 Typical vertical 3 cabinet installation 48 122 cm eel o 9 Un A E E er n 0 zy g Lin uU indmins7 KLC 082002 Figure notes 12 x 1 inch shoulder screws 2 12 x 1 inch safety screw 1 Securely tighten the shoulder screws and safety screws 1 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 368 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install an S8100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Install two cabinets vertically and one horizontally Figure 83 Typical 3 cabinet installation
339. nt Codes Direct Agent Calling Facility Access Trunk Test Can Change Coverage Fully Restricted Seruice Automatic Charge Display PASTE Display PBX Data on Phone Can Be Picked Up By Directed Call Pickup Can Use Directed Call Pickup none none 5 3 35 5735 3 Ilt Controlled Restriction inactiue a RU T Ensure that Calling Party Restriction is set to none Ensure that Time of Day Chart is set to 1 Press F7 to go to the next page of the form Page 2 of the Class of Restriction form displays S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Ensure that the COR has an FRL of 7 to allow for Outcalling and Fax Print 201 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization 6 Press F7 to go to the next page of the form Page 3 of the Class of Restriction form displays display cor 1 0 y 12 24 y 36 y 48 1 13 y 25 y 37 y 49 2 y 14 y 26 y 38 y 50 3 y 15 y 27 y 39 y 51 16 28 40 52 5 17 29 4 53 6 y 18 30 y 42 y 54 7T 19 31 y 43 y 55 8 y 20 y 32 y 44 56 9 y 21 y 33 y 45 y 57 18 y 22 y 34 y 46 y 58 11 y 23 y 35 y 47 y 59 ac cac cac c c c cac c CLASS OF RESTRICTION 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 ac c c c c c cc c c cc 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 acc c c c c
340. nt3 4 the Administer system which pops up the Screen to administer the system Select the Terminal server option on the screen If you receive error messages when starting a Terminal Server session click OK for each error message Login as Iucent3 and password lucent3 5 Selectthe Network Connections on the S8100 desktop and change the IP address on the incoming connections with the RAS IP address S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Administer no license emergency numbers Manually setting product ID You need to set the product ID for each application Get the product ID for each application from the registration group The steps are 1 Telnet to the 58100 from the laptop 2 Goto the bash shell from LAC by typing bash 3 Use productid command to set the product ids on the 8100 There are two components Communication Manager Multi Vantage and AUDIX Each component has a unique ID given by the services group at the time of registration Use productid multivantage product id 1xxxxxxxxx to configure the Communication Manager ID Use productid audix product id 2xxxxxxxxx to configure AUDIX ID Manually setting alarm origination and alarm destination number 8100 runs multiple applications on the platform Every application reports problems to GAM Global Alarming Module which in turn calls out through the modem to the alarm destination number This is different from
341. nuing you should 1 If the modem is attached to your computer make sure it is turned on 2 Quit any programs that may be using the modem Click Next when you are ready to continue T Don t detect my modem wil lt Beck Next gt Cancel Click Don t detect my modem I will select it from a list Click Next Click Add Select the manufacturer 3COM Corp and the model US Robotics 33 6K FAX Ext Click Next Select the port the modem is attached to COMI 10 Click Next An 11 Under On which ports do you want to install it select Selected ports S8100 Installation and Upgrades 277 April 2004 Troubleshooting Modem s configuration and administration 12 13 Click Next The Modem Setup screen states that you need to restart the modem before using it Click Finish OK Another Install New Modem screen states that the modem is set up successfully The Modem Properties screen displays Configure the installed modem 1 10 Right click Properties The Properties screen displays Click OK to accept speed and speaker volume defaults Click Connection tab Click OK to accept the defaults for Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 and Call Preference Click the Advanced button The Advanced Connection Settings screen displays Click OK to accept the defaults Click OK Close The Modem Properties screen displays Click Close The following messag
342. o set the system time Using Windows 2000 Use Windows 2000 to set daylight savings rules and time zones as well as the system date and time Use a laptop or a keyboard mouse and monitor to login to the system Establish a terminal servers session through the web interface On the Windows 2000 desktop double click the time icon in the tool tray at the lower right of the desktop A window opens enabling you to set the date time parameters 188 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Remote dial in Using systime Avaya services logins can also use the command line interface to set the date and time Telnet to the LAC prompt and enter the following bash command systime hh mm Use military time For example 16 00 represents 4 00 PM Using a local command line interface CLI The date and time can also be set via the command line interface similar to MS DOSTM Only Avaya services logins can use this procedure You will not be able to set the time zone or automatic daylight change with this method but updating the time is possible Perform a telnet to the LAC and choose cmd From a local keyboard mouse and monitor perform the following 1 a RU Click Start Run on the desktop In the window type telnet 192 11 13 6 and click OK Login At the LAC prompt type cmd and press Enter At the cmd prompt type date and enter date for example 12 06 2001 then press Enter The system displ
343. o the cross over cable e RJ45 cross over cable approx 12 feet 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections Figure 70 Laptop connection to the 58100 with the G600 or CMC1 cydflap2 KLC 093002 Figure notes 1 Laptop computer 4 RJ45 coupler BRIA4P 2 Laptop s PCMCIA Ethernet card 5 RJ45 cross over cable Media coupler 6 RJ45 jack NOTE Figure 70 Laptop connection to the 58100 with the G600 or on page 155 shows a media gateway For a G600 media gateway the connection to the RJ45 jack on the TN2314 is the same Install the Ethernet card 1 Ensure the laptop s power is off 2 Insert a PCMCIA Ethernet card into the laptop NOTE The Ethernet card can be any brand or model desired A card with 100 Mbps capability provides faster response 3 Using the RJ45 cross over cable and the media coupler cable connect the RJ45 jack in the TN2314 circuit pack to the laptop s Ethernet card See Figure 70 Laptop connection to the 8100 with the G600 or CMC1 on page 155 4 Powerup the laptop and start Windows 95 or Windows 2000 NOTE When changing computer settings in the followi
344. o10 digit string Enter the ending extensions for the ranges of telephone numbers used on the local system For example if your system uses extensions between 2000 and 3000 enter 3000 in the End Ext field Warnings Display only This field displays a warning when a duplication or overlap of an extension range for another machine is being assigned 2 of 2 4 Press F7 NextPage The system displays the Machine Profile screen for a remote machine page 2 Active Alarms change machine drbig MACHINE PROFILE Send to Non Administered Recipients y Updates In y Network Turnaround y enter command change machine drbigiO S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 MmwA 235 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information 236 5 Complete the fields in this window using the information provided in Table 33 Field definitions remote machine profile screen page 2 on page 236 Table 33 Field definitions remote machine profile screen page 2 Field Valid Input Description Send to Non y yes Enter y if the system will attempt to deliver messages to Administered n no unadministered remote recipients ipi is Recipients Enter n if messages cannot be sent to unadministered recipients Updates y yes Enter y if the local system will accept updated database In n no information from the remote system the Updates Out field
345. ocumentation web page Avaya Publications Center Sending comments 1 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Section 58100 with a G600 installation Site requirements Check customer s order Correct shipping errors Unpack and inspect Install and cable a G600 cabinet Verify the carrier address ID on G600 cabinets Floor mount a G600 cabinet Rack mount a G600 cabinet Rack mount two G600 cabinets Check AC power and ground for G600 Check AC power Approved grounds Approved floor grounds Uninterruptible power supply Cabinet s power switch Connect cabinet s grounds and other grounds Install coupled bonding conductor Connect the power cords Cable a G600 system Install Processor Interface cable Cable a 2 cabinet G600 system Cable a 3 cabinet G600 system Install G600 patch panels and external modem Install patch panels and shelf Install the external modem S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 67 67 67 67 68 68 68 69 71 72 72 73 73 74 79 79 81 82 85 86 86 87 87 88 88 89 92 92 92 93 94 98 98 98 99 Contents 47 Contents 48 Install equipment room hardware for G600 Cross connect the cabinet to the patch panels Allowed circuit packs Disallowed circuit packs Circuit pack installation Circuit pack slot loading Off premises circuit protection Install sneak fuse panels Setringing option for G600 Section II Install telephones and make auxiliary connections Install and wire tele
346. ofile screen Field Valid input Description Allow Automatic Full Updates y yes n no If y the local AUDIX system automatically requests full updates from remote systems If n the local AUDIX system does not automatically request full updates from remote systems Updates In y yes n no If y this local AUDIX system will accept updated user database information from any remote machine the Updates In field must also be set to y on the remote Machine Profile screen setup on the local AUDIX system for each remote machine If n the local AUDIX system will not accept updates from any remote machine regardless of the entry on the remote Machine Profile screen Set this field to y only after testing the network end to end during initial administration Updates Out y yes n no If you enter y updates to user database information for local users are sent to a remote machine the Updates Out field must also be set to y on the remote Machine Profile screen set up on the local AUDIX system for each remote machine If you enter n updates will not be sent to any remote machine regardless of the entry for this field on the remote Machine Profile screen Set this field to y only after testing the network end to end during initial administration Network Turnaround y yes n no To disable this feature system wide enter n on the local Machine Profile screen To en
347. ome Administer System User Services Download Software 3 Select items to restore 4 Click Restore S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 s Immediate Backup a Restore AupnIctrans names amp mes Aupmtranslations amp names AUD translations C none from a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location These items will be restored from pcmcia Warning Multi Vantage announcements pais applications will be M MultiVantage translation files genic announcemen the restore cir operation Clear Fields 327 Miscellaneous procedures Enable disable embedded messaging The following screen displays a Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Home Note DEFINITY ONE Restore in progress applications are being Administer stopped as part of the restore operation System i When restore is done you User will need to reboot the Services system Download 9 View restore progress Software 5 After the restore finishes reboot the system NOTE A reboot is required The restored translations will not be used if the 8100 is not rebooted Enable disable embedded messaging 58100 supports the capability to disable and enable the embedded INTUITY AUDIX messaging system Configured from the administration web pages a disable enabl
348. on in memory and write it to the translation cards 2 Update backup cards if necessary DEFINITY LAN gateway DLG The 58100 system supports both the external MAP D and corresident implementations of DEFINITY LAN Gateway DLG The corresident DEFINITY LAN Gateway DLG provides CTI link connectivity for ASAI to ASAT adjuncts including CentreVu CT Connectivity is provided between 58100 and an ASAI adjunct using the IP interface on the TN2314 circuit pack and or the C LAN TN799 circuit pack Multiple CTI links are supported Up to 8 links can be administered For more information about DLG see e Administrator 5 Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 e CallVisor ASAI Technical Reference 555 230 220 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 257 April 2004 Hardware additions DEFINITY LAN gateway DLG Corresident DLG 258 The coresident DLG functionality is on the 58100 Media Processor This feature must be enabled in the license file If so the Co Res DEFINITY LAN Gateway field on the System Parameters Customer Options form will be set to y ADJ IP and ASAI IP are the two CTI link types supported by the coresident DEFINITY LAN Gateway DLG feature The ASAT IP link is the Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAD link between S8100 and an ASAI adjunct The Adjunct IP link is the ASAI proprietary link between 58100 and CentreVu CT The ASAI endpoint is connected to an Ethernet LAN To use the ASAT IP and ADJ IP
349. on length should be the same 3 Click back to get to the Administer System window Step 22 Verify scheduled backups 1 Ina Internet Explorer window click Backup amp Restore in the Administer System window 2 Click Scheduled Backups Figure 23 Scheduled Backup window z Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Current list of scheduled backup jobs Data Set Destination Days Time o DermitTY translation files pcmcia Su M T W Th F S 3 00 Zg x o Au trans names amp messages C Add new schedule 4 edit delete This feature is currently enabled zl enable E disable 28 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 3 Check the data set destination days and time fields If there are no scheduled backups add a new schedule Time for the backup should be set to 3 00 so that the backup does not interfere with scheduled software maintenance Step 23 Reboot nice Maximize the telnet window In the telnet window at the bash prompt type reboot nice Step 24 Check the health of the system 1 A U N mrntnan wn Open a telnet session by clicking Start gt Run In the Open field type 192 11 13 6 and click OK Login using lucent 3 and the ASG response to the challenge At the LAC prompt type bash At the bash prompt type distat All processes should be up except f
350. onnector s Analog Hybrid MET AUX CO CO Tie DS1 Tie DIOD pin number Line Line Line Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk x m pe pe e ende 1 1L es mw qe ro i Td x m m fs 42 T17 CT6 7 7 O BK 4 an BL Y 4 WwW 4 N wn LES BON al S Y o 5 e D D 5 o 5 c 2 o s nould ojqe5 seyo 1nouid sueJBeip ejqeo pue vooz Indy pue 00185 262 Table 47 Leads for circuit packs and auxiliary equipment pinout charts 3 of 3 16 port 2 wire i 24 port Digital or 2 wire 3 wire DID igi Digital Hybrid AUX CO co i i Line Line Line Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk The wire colors in this chart apply only to B25A and A25B cables Colors are not shown for an H600 307 cable The following abbreviations apply to every circuit pack unless otherwise noted T R PBX transmit voice T Tip A Green TI R1 PBX receive voice R Ring B Red M PBX transmit signal S Sleeve E PBX receive signal PX PBX transmit TX Terminal transmit LI LI Digital Trunk IN LO LO Digital Trunk OUT The following wire colors apply in the previous chart W White S Slate Grey BL Blue R Red O Orange BK Black G
351. ons Configure Community Strings a Start Stop the Subagent Home Start Stop the SNMP subagent on AVAYAS8100 action subagent current status Administer T System start the subagent SNMP subagent is down stop the subagent ia User Services Download D 11 submit Software AVAYA The Start Stop the Subagent page shows whether the subagent process is running From this page you can start or stop the subagent process To start the subagent process choose the start the subagent option and click Submit To stop the subagent process choose the stop the subagent option and click Submit 218 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Schedule backups Schedule backups Backup procedures prevent loss of data due to system errors Backups can be either immediate or scheduled You can execute backup procedures to either the LAN or the PCMCIA flash card from the command line and web browser For information about performing backups see Perform backup on page 316 NOTE Avaya strongly recommends that you schedule backups to more than one destination For example create one schedule to backup translations to a PCMCIA flash card and another schedule to backup to a different location for each day of the week on a remote hard disk drive on the LAN Add a scheduled backup To schedule backups 1 From the 8100 administration page click Backup and
352. onverted back to the original digital data signals by another modem at the other end of the circuit MOdulator DEModulator multileg cable also called an octopus cable or a splitter cable Processor interface cable NFAS See Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS node A switching or control point for a network Nodes are either tandem they receive signals and pass them on or terminal they originate or terminate a transmission path No license error mode in DEFINITY 8100 will run in Admin Mode only You must determine the cause of inconsistency between the license and 8100 and obtain and install a valid license Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS A method that allows multiple T1 and or 1 facilities to share a single D channel to form an ISDN PRI If D channel backup is not used one facility is configured with a D channel and the other facilities that share the D channel are configured without D channels If D channel backup is used two facilities are configured to have D channels one D channel on each facility and the other facilities that share the D channels are configured without D channels NT operating system The Windows 32 bit operating system engineered by Microsoft NT Servers provided centralized security fault tolerance and additional connectivity while managing NT Workstations over a network Oryx API OAPI Terminates the Oryx calls from the DEFINITY application and converts them to Windows NT primitiv
353. opens on the desktop Enter User Name and Password The 58100 system grants admittance once inputs are accepted 5 Continue with Enter backup commands on page 318 Enter backup commands 1 Typedibackup lt data set gt destination and press Enter 2 Enterone or more of the following data set parameters separate multiple choices with a space for backup Parameter Meaning deftran Communication Manager Translations vmnamtran Voice Names and Translations vmmsgtran Message Bodies and Translations vmannounce Announcement Sets vmnammsgtran Voice Names Messages and Translations registry NT registry sam NT Passwords Login and Policy defann Communication Manager Announcements lac Password and License Server File The destination is pcmcia to backup to a flash card or a directory name to backup to a remote hard disk on the LAN 318 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface If a directory name is entered a network drive must be mapped as the F drive Use the web interface to map a network drive The following is an example of how to enter information for backup procedures LAC gt d1backup deftran vmnamtran pcmcia NOTE When executing this command there may be a delay of 1 to 2 minutes because INTUITY AUDIX Networking is shutting down and auditing the INTUITY AUDIX databases INTUITY AUDIX restarts when the backup complete
354. or W2000 Console and DOWN or PARTIALLY UP processes noted in Step 11 Record the customer network and product information on page 13 Type exit to get back to the LAC prompt At the LAC prompt type mv Check for any alarms or license errors In the SAT window type system parameters features Verify that the emergency numbers and the no license incoming call number matches the information you recorded in Step 8 Verify the emergency number and no license incoming call number on page 12 Step 25 Verify correct displays make internal and external calls Check the phones for Dial tone Correct displays Correct time Internal calls External calls Step 26 Verify AUDIX greetings and auto attendant Verify that AUDIX answers a call and AUDIX greetings are in place Check the auto attendant if applicable 8100 Installation and Upgrades 29 April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 30 Step 27 Test alarming 1 2 AANA NN 4 C E 2 Open a telnet session by clicking on Start gt Run on your laptop In the Open field type 192 11 13 6 and click OK Login using lucent3 with the ASG response At the LAC prompt type mv In the SAT window type test inads In the SAT window type save translations to backup the translations Type logoff to logoff the SAT window At the LAC prompt type bash At the bash prompt type logsend tTST to test the
355. or Customer Equipment ACA Technical Standard TS 001 1997 One or more of the following Mexican national standards as applicable NOM 001 SCFI 1993 NOM SCFI 016 1993 NOM 019 SCFI 1998 The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1 LASER Device s These devices comply with the following standards EN 60825 1 Edition 1 1 1998 01 21 CFR 1040 10 and CFR 1040 11 The LASER devices operate within the following parameters Maximum power output 5 dBm to 8 dBm Center Wavelength 1310 nm to 1360 nm Luokan Laserlaite Klass 1 Laser Apparat Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposures Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product information Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Standards This product complies with and conforms to the following international EMC standards and all relevant national deviations Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of Information Technology Equipment CISPR 22 1997 and EN55022 1998 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement CISPR 24 1997 and EN55024 1998 including Electrostatic Discharge ESD IEC 61000 4 2 Radiated Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000 4 4 Lightning Effects IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted Immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Mains Frequency Magnetic Fie
356. or Processor s external cable 2 of 3 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Processor P1 amphenol AUX Modem Signal name connector J1 P2 Mouse Keyboard USB VGA Ethernet USB DAT 42 3 GRD 41 4 VGA RED 49 1 VGA GREEN 47 2 VGA BLUE 23 GRD 10 5 GRD 48 6 GRD 46 7 GRD 24 8 VGA PWR 35 9 GRD 36 10 VGA HSYNC 37 13 VGA VSYNC 11 14 ETH RD 44 ETH RD 19 ETH TD 32 ETH TD 7 RX 28 TX 13 TX 14 RX 39 NC NC GROUND 50 NC 43 NC 2 of 3 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 287 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Table 41 Pinout for Processor s external cable 3 of 3 NC NC Processor P1 amphenol Signal name connector AUX J1 Modem P2 Mouse Keyboard USB VGA Ethernet 3 of 3 Table 41 Pinout for Processor s external cable on page 286 shows the pinout for the processor s external cable NOTE AUX is a 50 pin receptacle Modem is a 25 pin D sub plug Mouse is a 6 pin miniature DIN receptacle Keyboard is a 6 pin miniature DIN receptacle USB is a type A receptacle VGA is a 15 pin D sub receptacle and Ethernet is an 8 pin jack Table 42 Lead designations for port circuit packs 1 of 3 TN742 B TN747B TN760 B TN793 Cross TN753 TN760C TN763
357. or Windows 2000 click Start gt Run gt cmd In the DOS window type ping 192 11 13 6 and press Enter A series of 4 similar replies indicating successful response should display Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 Reply from 192 11 13 6 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 128 If a timeout reply displays check cabling or review the previous setup steps Also verify that the S8100 is operating normally and referencing the LEDs on the TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate See Table 53 TN2314 circuit pack s LED states on page 338 Connect S8100 system to laptop s CD ROM drive laptop running WINDOWS 95 To copy software from the laptop s CD ROM drive to the 58100 server you need to share the CD ROM drive and establish a connection from the server to the drive 1 NY On the laptop double click My Computer Right click the CD ROM drive icon and select Properties When the Properties dialog displays click the Share tab Click Share As Enter a share name for example Laptop CD Check the Full Access radio button Click OK to exit the windows The CD ROM drive is now shared The following procedures describe how to connect to the CD ROM drive from an 58100 server 1 Establish a connection from the laptop to the 8100 server On the laptop open Internet Explorer and
358. or media gateway causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment for repair or warranty information please contact the Technical Service Center at 1 800 242 2121 or contact your local Avaya representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant It is recommended that repairs be performed by Avaya certified technicians The equipment cannot be used on p
359. or necessary space Details Running processes before install Finish Help 17 Do not restart the system when the update is complete Click the box do not restart now then click Finish The wizard closes 18 Click the shared CD ROM folder Locate the Setup exe file and double click to open 19 If you get messages about service pack 4 not being installed it is because the system does not recognize that you installed service pack 4 until you reboot You do not want to reboot at this time Click No on the first message window Click OK on the next message window S8100 Installation and Upgrades 19 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 20 Multivantage setup program wizard opens as shown in the following example Figure 14 Multivantage S8100 Setup Wizard LX Multi antage s8100 Welcome to the Multi antage s8100 Setup program This program will install MultiVantage s8100 on your m computer lt is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the
360. or web access Officeadmin Login IDs in this group are installed from the factory This login group facilitates access via the S8100 web interface Group members select administrative privileges via the web interface The Windows admin account is used to establish an account in this group Generally an account in the Offieceadmin group is used to download Avaya Site Administration from the 8100 web page See Table 50 Web access rights officeadmin and officeuser access on page 302 Officeuser Login IDs in this group are installed from the factory This login facilitates download of client software such as Message Manager Group members have access for client download only The NTadmin login is used to establish an account in this group An Officeuser group account is generally used to download Message Manager from the 58100 web page See Table 50 Web access rights officeadmin and officeuser access on page 302 anonymous The anonymous login is for very limited access via the web interface to load a software patch See Table 49 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins for sa vm and browse on page 301 INTUITY AUDIX commands versus logins Table 50 Web access rights officeadmin and officeuser access 1 of 3 Directory Use Login group Permissions c LucentWeb Public 58100 Home Page anonymous read officeuser read officeadmin read administrators full control lucent full control 1 of 3
361. orted to INADS If the system is unable to report the alarm to INADS the LED flashes thus signaling the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm The system calls INADS automatically if it uses a modem Other circuit packs Upon power up some LEDs may be lit on the other circuit packs Under normal operation LEDs on these circuit packs should not light with the following exception a solid green LED on any circuit pack indicates that diagnostic tests are being executed on that circuit pack Circuit packs status LEDs Each circuit pack has 3 LEDs on the front panel visible at the front of the carrier On every circuit pack except the 650A power unit the LEDs indicate Red alarm If the circuit pack is communicating with the system the system has detected a fault in this circuit pack An on board alarm for this circuit pack is displayed in the Alarm Log The circuit pack also lights this LED when either the circuit pack has not yet initialized communication with the system or when the circuit pack loses contact with the system and stops functioning circuit pack is said to be in reset In these cases there may not be an alarm in the Alarm Log To determine if the red LED is lit because the circuit pack is not in contact with the system issue the list configuration board PCSS command where PCSS refers to the slot containing this circuit pack If the system does not detect the circuit pack this command returns Identifie
362. ory default settings NOTE You may use a locally obtained type approved external modem 33 6 kbps or higher and V 34 protocol Contact your Avaya representative for more information A WARNING If you use a modem other than the US Robotics modem it must be configured in Windows 8100 Installation and Upgrades 99 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for G600 1 Securely mount the external modem at the left of the modem utility shelf or another secure surface 2 Routethe modem cable P2 from the Processor Interface cable to the modem and attach it to the modem port 3 Plugthe modem power cord into the same power source as the G600 s preferably the UPS 4 Connect the modem to a standard analog line using RJ45 cord Modem s configuration and administration on page 276 describes information about modem setup administration settings and testing Install equipment room hardware for G600 See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 for more information Cross connect the cabinet to the patch panels 1 Cross connect the port circuit packs to the G600 patch panels or other standard 110A cross connect equipment See Figure 42 Example cross connect field s patch panel connections on page 107 Allowed circuit packs Table 5 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 100 lists the circuit packs that ca
363. ot have a user ID and password for the ART database select Administer my ART user ID and password and follow the instructions to create a new ID and password 1 Select Administer an S8x00 Server product for an install script 2 Enteryour ART user ID and password Record the ART session ID 4 Enterthe RFA System ID and the RFA Module ID if applicable If you do not have these ID numbers enter the FL Number 5 For Session Type check the Install Script for 58 00 Products 6 For Product Type select the ECLIPS IP600 7 Click the Start IP Address Administration button 180 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 10 12 13 System initialization Obtain the installation script file In the list of products table click the product number in the column labeled corresponding to the product that you are creating the install script for Typically there is only one row in the table and the product number is 1 NOTE If the Product Alarm ID and or RAS IP Address is listed as N A in the table these parameters are added automatically when the install script is created Check the following parameters and update if necessary Communication Manager Release number Product Nick Name Alarm Origination set to yes only if the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya Dial up destination number for alarm reporting for example INADS number SRA IP address only
364. oup members 2 Tocreate a PRI trunk Enter ADD DSI circuit pack location at the SAT terminal session b Enter the required information on the DS1 form Create a signaling group using the ADD SIG NEXT command If you are using FAS signaling use the 24 channel on your DS1 circuit pack as D channel for your signaling group If you are using NFAS signaling enter N in the associated signaling field List the trunk circuit pack location in the Trunk Board field d Create a trunk group by using the ADD TRUNK NEXT command 1 Complete the required information on the Trunk Group form s pages 2 Enter the port locations of the trunk members on the Trunk Group Member page Enter the correct signaling group number E1 international standard 1 Use a TN464F circuit pack Ensure that the dip switch on the circuit pack is set for 30 channels E 1 If you are using Facility Associated Signaling FAS 29 channels are available to be used as trunk group members Channel 16 must be used to create a signaling group for the trunk groups If you are using Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS it is possible to use all 30 channels for trunk group members in some instances 2 Tocreate a trunk group do the following Determine the slot assignment of the circuit packs to be added Install the DS1 Interface circuit pack in the assigned carrier slot Enter ADD DSI circuit pack location at the SAT terminal session Enter the require
365. out the test refer to the user s guide that comes with the unit 124 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Connect the cables Every port on the front of the 1152A1 PDU is configured as a data route through port for every data wire pins 1 2 3 and 6 10 2 4 50 50 950 O 2H BQ 5 UO 7 amp 6 20 Use a standard CATS CAT6 or CAT6e straight through Ethernet cable not supplied including all 8 wires 4 pairs as shown in Connecting cables to telephones and other end devices on page 125 Figure 54 Connecting telephones and other end devices to the 1152A1 PDU Ethernet 1152A1 Power Distribution Unit Switch Hub HJ 45 IN RJ 45 OUT End Device o5 E a For Data In ports connect the Ethernet cable leading from the Ethernet Switch Hub to the Data port For Data amp Power Out ports connect the Ethernet cable leading to the telephone or other end device to the corresponding Data amp Power port NOTE Be certain to connect correspondingly numbered Data and Data amp Power ports Connecting cables to telephones and other end devices Due to an 1152A1 PDU s line sensing capabilities this PDU only powers end devices designed to receive power from the LAN When connected to an 1152A1 PDU such a device termed Power over LAN Enabled receives both i
366. p s PCMCIA Ethernet card to an RJ45 coupler b Connecta cross over flip cable from the coupler to the RJ45 service jack on the front of the TN2314 Processor board 21 LT IE Connect to the TN2314 processor Open Internet Explorer on the laptop type 192 11 13 6 in the with Internet Explorer URL address bar and press Enter 22 LT IE Open the S8100 s desktop Click Administer System and login using lucent3 Note Terminal server client and terminal i legim amdi p meee A diomain ig not Pus services Active X must be installed on the E laptop The easiest way to do this is to b Select Login to lt xxx gt under Remote Control upgrade your Windows 95 laptop s browser Terminal Services where xxx is the host name used to Internet Explorer 5 5 for this system Ifa VBScript error message appears click OK Click the Connect button leave the Server field blank e Ifa VBScript message appears click OK you can resize the Terminal Services screen to full size by pressing ctlr alt Pause A login window will open f Login using lucent3 After login the S8100 s Windows 2000 desktop is displayed 23 SDT On the S8100 s desktop The time display is in the tool tray at the lower right of the double click the time display and set the desktop time time zone date and Daylight Savings 24 SDT Disable modem compression Click Start Settings Control Panel b Double click Phone and Mod
367. p to the 58100 system or have established some other type of connection as described in Physical connections on page 153 e Set up the network parameters as described in Physical connections on page 153 e Establish access to the 58100 system as described in Access methods on page 165 174 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Configure DHCP and TFTP servers Configure DHCP and TFTP servers The 58100 system is shipped with DHCP and TFTP servers installed on the TN2314 Processor circuit pack These servers can be used if the customer does not already have DHCP and or TFTP servers on their network To use the embedded DHCP and or TFTP servers they must be configured as described in this section DHCP server IP addresses for IP telephones and other IP devices can be assigned manually Alternatively IP addresses can be assigned automatically using a DHCP server Customers can use the DHCP server provided with the 8100 system or use a DHCP server already on their network v CAUTION The 58100 DHCP server and another network DHCP server should not both be configured to support the same IP devices at the same time Enable the DHCP server To enable the DHCP server 8100 1 From a Terminal Server session click Start Programs If you receive error messages when starting a Terminal Server session click OK for each error message Double click Administrative Tools Double click Services
368. packs to the CMC1 MDF See Figure 96 Example MDF connections on page 394 Allowed circuit packs Table 61 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 386 lists the circuit packs that can be used with CMC1 Table 62 Disallowed circuit packs and circuit modules on page 389 lists the circuit packs that cannot be used with CMC1 Table 61 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules 1 of 3 Apparatus code Name Allowed 650A AC power unit Yes NAAI Fiber Optic Cable Adapter circuit pack Yes TN417 Auxiliary Trunk Yes TN429 B C D Analog Direct Inward Outward Dialing DIOD Central Yes Office Trunk TN429C Analog Central Office Trunk Yes TN429D Analog DIOD Trunk Analog Loop Start Yes TN433 Speech Synthesizer Yes TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN437B Tie Trunk Australia future availability Yes TN438B Central Office Trunk Yes TN439 Tie Trunk Yes 1of3 386 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Table 61 Allowed circuit packs and circuit modules 2 of 3 Apparatus code Name Allowed TN447 Central Office Trunk Yes TN457 Speech Synthesizer Yes TN459B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Yes TN464GP DS1 Interface T1 24 Channel E1 32 Channel Yes TN465B C Central Office Trunk Yes TN467
369. pgrades April 2004 Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step Details 51 LT IE Backup the translations and other data Click Administer System to the PCMCIA card or to a network location b Click Backup amp Restore under System Maintenance Click Immediate Backup Under Choose Items for Immediate Backup select everything that is installed e SetDestination to PCMCIA or click Other Location to backup to a network location f Click the Backup button Note If the medium you are backing up to runs out of space a message will appear noting the files that didn t get backed up 52 Close Internet Explorer on the S8100 s desktop and on the laptop A SECURITY ALERT When you are finished with the update procedures you should restore your laptop to its original configuration 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 37 Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Replacing an 8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 This Job Aid provides the steps for upgrading an R9 5 DEFINITY ONE IP600 system to an 58100 system with the current release of Communication Manager This update replaces the TN795 with the TN2314 processor circuit pack The hard drive on the new circuit pack contains the new software Access keys The access method for each step is
370. phones and other end devices to the 1152A1 PDU 1 Connectan Ethernet cable to the telephone using an external splitter or directly if the device is Power over LAN Enabled 2 Connect the opposite end of the same cable to the RJ45 wall outlet Onthe front panel of the 1152A1 PDU monitor the response of the corresponding port LED If it lights up GREEN the unit has identified your telephone as a Power over LAN 126 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections NOTE The AUX connector is part of the Processor Interface cable assembly J1 When the wiring and administration are complete give these wiring records to the Customer System Administrator for troubleshooting purposes Alarm input Alarms can be generated on adjunct equipment sent to the 58100 system and recorded and reported as external alarms v CAUTION Pins 26 and 1 on the AUX connector are dedicated to the UPS alarm input Using these pins for other alarm inputs will cause the 58100 system to reset 1 Connect 1 major alarm input wire pair and 1 minor alarm input wire pair to the auxiliary field from the AUX connector J1 on Processor Interface cable See Table 14 Alarm inputs at AUX connector on page 127 and Figure 56 UPS connection to G600 or on page 128 Table 14 Alarm inputs at AUX connector
371. phones and other equipment Telephone connection examples Connect adjunct power Station wiring examples Analog tie trunk example Digital tie trunk example Cable examples for tie trunk connectivity DS1 tie trunks between collocated systems 3 and 4 pair modularity Adjunct power connections Auxiliary power Install attendant console optional Hard wire bridging Dual wiring of 2 wire and 4 wire endpoints Install 26B1 selector console optional 1152A1 Mid Span power distribution unit Important safety instructions Using the 1152A1 PDU Connect the 1152A1 PDU Connect the cables Connect external alarms and auxiliary connections Alarm input Alarm output UPS alarm connection Emergency transfer and auxiliary power Telephone pin designations 100 100 100 103 105 105 107 108 111 113 113 113 114 115 117 117 118 119 119 120 122 122 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 125 127 187 127 128 129 129 58100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install the BRI terminating resistor Terminating resistor adapter Closet mounted 110RA1 12 Install multipoint adapters BR851 B adapter T adapter 367A adapter Basic multipoint installation distances Install off premises station wiring Install off premises or out of building stations Analog off premises stations Circuit protectors Digital out of building telephones Install emergency transfer panel and associated telephones Install the emer
372. pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Table 40 Lead and color designations 2 of 2 Cross connect Amphenol pin Color pin Backplane pin 25 BK G 38 302 26 G BK 13 202 27 BK BR 39 303 28 BR BK 14 203 29 BK SL 40 304 30 SL BK 15 204 31 Y BL 41 305 32 BL Y 16 205 33 Y O 42 306 34 O Y 17 206 35 Y G 43 307 36 G Y 18 207 37 Y BR 44 308 38 BR Y 19 208 39 Y SL 45 309 40 SL Y 20 209 41 V BL 46 310 42 BL V 21 210 43 47 311 44 O V 22 211 45 V G 48 312 46 G V 23 212 47 V BR 49 313 48 BR V 24 213 49 V SL 50 300 50 SL V 25 200 2 of 2 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 285 Cable pinouts Connector and cable diagrams pinout charts Pinout for Processor s external cable Table 41 Pinout for Processor s external cable 1 of 3 Processor P1 amphenol AUX Modem Signal name connector J1 P2 Mouse Keyboard USB VGA Ethernet ACC48A 12 19 1 alarm in 2 26 AP2 alarm in 27 27 EXTALMA 4 48 EXTALMB 3 23 XFER48 38 36 GROUND 25 1 MOD CTS 21 5 MOD DCD 46 8 MOD DSR 8 6 MOD DTR 7 20 MOD GRD 20 1 amp 7 MOD RTS 34 4 MOD RXD 33 3 MOD TXD 45 2 MOUSE DAT 18 1 MOUSE GRD 31 3 MOUSE VCC 6 4 MOUSE CLK 5 5 KYBD DAT 30 1 KYBD GRD 17 3 KYBD VCC 16 4 KYBD CLK 29 5 USB VCC 15 1 USB DAT 40 2 1 of 3 286 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Table 41 Pinout f
373. placing the hard drive and for R10 or later new software on a CD ROM An experienced technician can use a Job Aid as stand alone documentation Chapter 1 Use this chapter to initially install and cable an 58100 with G600 Chapter 2 This chapter describes the procedures for connecting to and accessing an S8100 server Chapter 3 This chapter describes the procedures for initializing the 58100 system including the installation of the license file password file and installation script file and other system services Chapter 4 Use this chapter to administer INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Chapter 5 Use this chapter along with the job aids to upgrade or repair an S8100 system Chapter 6 Use this chapter to add or upgrade a circuit pack s hardware and software or to administer the features provided by a new circuit pack Chapter 7 Use this chapter to set up Avaya Site Administration Chapter 8 Use this chapter to install Message Manager Chapter 9 This chapter provides some troubleshooting information for problems that may occur during installation of an S8100 server or an external modem Chapter 10 This chapter briefly describes the copy protection aspects of an S8100 media server s software Appendix A This appendix lists pinout information for the essential circuit packs and cables Appendix B Refer to this appendix when setting up a customer s login
374. play Format AAR ARS Internal Call Prefix AAR ARS Internal Call Total Length Command 4 Make note of the local node number first digit The local node number can only be changed through the web interface 5 Press F1 to cancel the command Check hunt groups 1 Atthe SAT or Avaya Site Administration window type list hunt group The Hunt Groups form displays list hunt group group HUNT GROUPS Grp Grp No Name Grp RCD Que No Cou Notif Dom Message Ext Tupe MEAS Uec MCH Siz Mem Path Ctg Adj Ctrl Center 1 monroe uoice hunt 2000 ucd mia n n 8 8 n A 2 paradox voice hunt 2600 ucd mia n n 8 8 n n rockuille voice hunt 2650 ucd mia n n none 6 8 n n Command successfullu completed Command 2 Note the following information about the INTUITY AUDIX hunt group Grp No e Grp Name Ext 3 Press F1 to cancel the command 200 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Check class of service 1 At the SAT or Avaya Site Administration window type disp cos The Class of Service form displays Ruto Callback Call Fwd All Calls Data Privacy Priority Calling Console Permissions Off hook Alert Client Room Restrict Call Fwd Off Net Call Forwarding Busy DA Extended Forwarding All Extended Forwarding B DA Personal Station Access PSA Trk to Trk Transfer Override QSIG Call Offer Originations Command CLASS OF SERVICE g 4 2 3 5 o A
375. ple switch at the remote site for connections made between remote stations as well as between remote stations and local access trunks It receives incoming PSTN dialed data calls and terminates them on the correct data modem Using a standard 25 pair cable you can connect Avaya R300 to a 110 punch down wall field Avaya R300 connects to a set of harmonica adapters by way of a cable that adapts between the connection on the circuit pack and the harmonica adapter and uses phantom power to power every analog and DCP telephone For information about installing and administering Avaya R300 Communicator see Getting Started with the Avaya R300 Remote Office 555 233 769 and MAX 3000 Installation and Basic Configuration Guide 555 233 768 Add C LAN functionality IP Softphone is available with 58100 In addition corresident C LAN functionality can be optionally purchased The 58100 WIndows 2000 LAN interface may be used in place of the C LAN circuit pack for those cases where DS1 capability through the C LAN is not required DCS using DS1 will still be supported via a separate C LAN The Windows LAN interface corresident C LAN will also be used to connect CMS BCMS Vu and CentreVu CT See the Overview for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 231 Add a TN799DP C LAN circuit pack NOTE The TN799DP version of C LAN is required for the use of IP Softphones To add a TN799DP C LAN circuit pack complet
376. plication from Windows at the start button To start an Avaya Site Administration session 1 Open an Internet browser 2 http IP address gt in the address area of the web browser The S8100 home page displays 3 Navigate to the 58100 System Administration page as in the previous section 4 Click INTUITY AUDIX on machine name in the right pane Avaya Site Administration is launched 5 Setup daily automatic backups of INTUITY AUDIX Backups can be to the LAN PCMCIA card or preferably to a directory on your server See From the backup and restore main menu you can on page 321 Administer SNMP The SNMP agent is installed with 58100 By default SNMP is enabled See Enable and disable SNMP on page 192 for more information about enabling and disabling SNMP You can configure SNMP trap destinations configure community strings and start and stop the SNMP subagent process After the SNMP agent is configured and with Network Management System Interface NMSTI software installed a network manager can monitor 8100 devices The NMSI software can automatically discover the S8100 devices in the network and display icons for them in an NMS IP map S8100 Installation and Upgrades 213 April 2004 System initialization Administer SNMP Configure SNMP trap destinations To configure SNMP trap destinations 1 From the 58100 System Administration page click SNMP Agent Administration The following page displays
377. plications as possible Not enough disk space on target drive to copy the files Free disk space on target drive Unable to open the input file Ensure that the source file has a valid file name and that the source file and target directory exist Unable to copy the requested file Escalate Target file is read only Remove read only attribute from target file and try again 274 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Troubleshooting Platform s troubleshooting commands Error message Possible explanation remedy A self registering file did not register Escalate successfully Unknown error Escalate Unable to copy file X Escalate Unable to get directory name Escalate Unable to parse directory Escalate Unable to create Substring section list Escalate Unable to open file X Escalate Unable to merge X into the Registry Escalate Translation ID interval expiration Login INADS Reset Translation ID Save Translation The following warnings insignificant errors may be generated by the installconfig wizard Attempt to manually resolve these Note them in the log book and continue They are Unable to get the INTUITY AUDIX extension length Unable to add Avaya Site Administration shortcut to Start Menu Unable to reset INTUITY AUDIX extension length to xxxx Unable to get file size Unable to get the product version f
378. ppendix B Set up customer logins for information about setting up customer logins 8100 Installation and Upgrades 187 April 2004 System initialization Administer S8100 Enable INTUITY AUDIX logins See Set up login accounts on page 304 Appendix B also includes information about the INTUITY AUDIX logins sa vm and browse the uses of each login and the INTUITY AUDIX commands accessible to each login Enable customer s web logins When the system leaves the factory the only login that has access to the web interface is the login NTadmin The customer may wish to create additional logins for example to download the Message manager See Windows logins for customers on page 300 Enable 58100 Logins See Communication Manager logins for customers on page 305 Administer 58100 This section describes the initial administration procedures 58100 commands 8100 bash commands are useful for administration and installation tasks These commands are allowed for the Avaya services login See Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands on page 343 and Maintenance for the Avaya S8100 with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 149 for information about these commands Set system date and time The system date and time can be set using the 58100 Windows 2000 desktop to set daylight savings rules and the time zone as well as the date and time Alternatively you can use the bash command systime t
379. pril 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check AC power and ground for G600 Figure 33 Single cabinet G600 grounding C50 9 O jooh fex Fe e e O 1 h i hot MY cadpgnd1 LJK 102500 i Figure notes 1 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to 2 6AWG 40 16 mm ground wire from coupled bonding conductor CBC single point ground block to the approved building ground 90 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Check AC power and ground for G600 Figure 34 2 cabinet G600 grounding E _ ke 1 E JO E a tal A A A lo E MI lil hod kot how ho aa J e Jo e e E JD em b E e mBammmmmmmmm E MU MU MU j C3 9 o E 6 0 Figure notes 10 AWG 25 6 mm wire to 2 coupled bonding conductor CBC 1 6 AWG 40 16 ground wire from single point
380. proxy server radio button and click OK to close the popup windows 3 Connect the laptop to the R9 5 Processor Connect a cable from the laptop s PCMCIA Ethernet board TN795 card to an RJ45 coupler b Connect a cross over flip cable from the coupler to the PCMCIA network interface card in the TN795 s PCMCIA slot 4 LT Connect to the TN795 processor Click Start Run and enter telnet 192 11 13 6 b Login using lucent3 The LAC prompt displays 5 LAC Open a bash shell by typing bash at Type bash at the LAC prompt the LAC prompt 6 BS Important Display and record the From the bash shell execute the following three customer s network and product commands setip productid oss information 5 54H A F b Write down all of this information exactly as it appears on the screen You will need to re enter this information later 7 BS Shutdown AUDIX Type shutdown audix When the BASH prompt returns the Audix shutdown takes a few minutes type statapp to verify that AUDIX has shutdown 8 BS Exit the bash shell and return to the Type exit LAC prompt 9 LAC Open a SAT window Type definity to open a SAT window The terminal type is NTT W2KTT 10 SAT Save the DEFINITY translations to Execute save translations the hard drive and logott the SASDNTBOONE b When the save translations operation is finished S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 execute logoff to
381. pt the standard 5 pin plug in 4C3S 75 protector However this may not be cost effective in some cases for these installations the ITW Linx protector may be installed For example if screw type carbon block protectors or other comparable plug incompatible types are in place it may be too costly to re terminate the outside cable on a 5 pin mounting block for only a few out of building terminals The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector may be installed in series with existing primary protection Note the 4C3S 75 protector cannot be installed in series with other types of primary protection but must be installed as the only protection on the line entering the building For the 4C3S 75 protector various 25 50 and 100 pair protector panels are equipped with 110 type connecting blocks and or RJ21X connectors The ITW Linx Enhanced Protector mounts directly on connecting blocks and requires a separate ground bar The maximum range for out of building digital voice terminals is e 3400 feet 1036 m when using 24 AWG 0 26 mm wire e 2200 feet 670 m when using 26 AWG 0 14 mm wire With the use of a data link protector an isolating transformer used to remove phantom power on the system side and re introduce it on the terminal side the range can extend to e 5000 feet 1524 m using 24 AWG 0 26 mm wire e 4000 feet 1219 m using 26 AWG 0 14 mm wire When using a protector the voice terminal must be locally powered by an external power supply or
382. r Tracks performance and capacity of trunk groups Processor Occupancy and Call Traffic Charting Tracks processor performance and traffic handling Alarm Monitor Provides an alerting and reporting mechanism for alarms and errors status Hardware Manager Allows users to graphically display cabinet information and current alarm status Data Polling Schedule Lets users easily schedule repeated tasks Generic Device Supports terminal emulation access to other system types with IP or serial connectivity Communication Manager PC Time Synchronization Lets users set up tasks to synchronize their 58100 system clock to the PC s time on a regular basis System Capacity Report Determines utilization of options and reports them in a consistent manner Manager Audits Determines if redundant or missing data is administered on a switch Export Import and Find and Replace Export Import and Find and Replace functions support INTUITY AUDIX subscribers data Button Label Printing Enhancements Lets users print a label from a station template specify custom button label text and print bounding boxes with printed labels on plain paper Call Accounting Filtering Provides advanced filtering capabilities for call accounting export LDAP Export Exports to an LDAP directory from supported Communication Manager or INTUITY AUDIX export objects Data Export Supports more objects than version 1 0 including
383. r meters to the point where the protector ground wire connects A metallic underground water pipe must be supplemented by the metal frame of the building a concrete encased ground or a ground ring If these grounds are not available the water pipe ground can be supplemented by 1 of the following types of grounds e Other local metal underground systems or structures Local underground structures such as tanks and piping systems e Rod and pipe electrodes A 5 8 inch 1 6 cm solid rod 3 4 inch 2 cm conduit or pipe electrode driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet 2 4 m Plate electrodes Must have a minimum of 2 ft 0 185 m of metallic surface exposed to the exterior soil Concrete Encased Ground An electrode encased by at least 2 inches 5 1 cm of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth The electrode must be at least 20 feet 6 1 m of 1 or more steel reinforcing bars or rods 1 2 inch 1 3 cm in diameter or at least 20 feet 6 1 m of bare solid copper 4 AWG 26 mm wire Ground Ring A buried ground that encircles a building or structure at a depth of at least 2 5 feet 0 76 m below the earth s surface The ground ring must be at least 20 feet 6 1 m of 2 AWG 35 mm bare copper wire Approved floor grounds WARNING If the approved ground is inside a dedicated equipment room these connections must be made by a qualif
384. r not assigned or no board S8100 Installation and Upgrades 339 April 2004 Status LEDs Other circuit packs 340 If the circuit pack has just been inserted the system may still be initializing the circuit pack If after 5 minutes the circuit pack still has not initialized communications with the system check the MO for any special instructions If the MO does not provide the needed information perform the following steps 1 Check the Error Log for TONE BD and TDM BUS errors Follow appropriate sections for any TONE BD and TDM BUS errors 2 Reseatthe suspected circuit pack A WARNING Reseating a TN2314 can be very destructive This should be done only if its green Complete Shutdown LED is lit Otherwise you must shut down before reseating 3 wWait5 minutes Then issue the list configuration board PCSS command If the result indicates that the system still has not registered the circuit pack go to next step 4 Ifthe system seems to be functioning correctly but the circuit pack does not start communicating with the system replace the circuit pack Green test the system is running tests on this circuit pack e Yellow busy indicates that the circuit pack is in use NOTE A port circuit pack also lights its red LED when it performs initialization tests for example when the circuit pack is initially inserted into the system If every initialization test passes the red LED is turned off If not the red
385. r responsibility for system administration Generally every administration function is performed from the Management Terminal The switch requires a special login referred to as the system administrator login to gain access to system administration capabilities System record RFA record for each licensed S8100 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol S8100 Installation and Upgrades 413 April 2004 Glossary 414 troubleshooting license License created when troubleshooting requires some features to be activated or deactivated This is only accessible by Avaya s Tier 3 and 4 personnel UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc update A modification to a release of software such as applying patches to an 58100 system upgrade Replacement of an existing system software release with a later release URL uniform resource locator Virtual Fabric Manager VFM A module that allows Communication Manager s code to operate in a different hardware environment from its native environment One side of the VFM talks to Communication Manager in protocols it understands and changes these into methods and messages to perform needed operations in the 58100 environment Watchdog A component of the Global Sanity Keeper GSK that is responsible for starting up the 58100 application software including the downloading of the MPC860 application firmware Watchdog is the first S8100 process to run S8100 Installation and
386. re to access the S8100 Map CD ROM for an 58100 upgrade This appendix provides the steps to map the S8100 s server to your laptop s CD ROM drive so that the server can copy files from a CD ROM in the laptop Prepare to access the S8100 1 Loginto your laptop Activate the Guest account Check the Guest account s current setting 1 At the Windows desktop right click the My Computer icon and select Manage in the help menu The Computer Management console displays 2 Expand Local Users and Groups by clicking its sign and then click the Users folder NOTE A red X in the Guest user s icon indicates that this user is currently disabled Computer Management C x Action view ftm Ea eA Tree agenti browse Computer Management Local ED System Tools Bl gall Event Viewer lj System Information El E Performance Lags and Alerts Internet Guest Account WAM _DEFONE Launch 15 Process Accour Bl Shared Folders lucent lucenti ame Device Manager Buen lucent2 E Local Users and Groups G lucent lucent3 DN Users 9 NTadmin E Groups G rasaccess rasaccess H Storage w Services and Applications Teinhamnatl esr leat of 58100 Installation and Upgrades 353 April 2004 Map CD ROM for an S8100 upgrade Prepare to access the S8100 Enable the Guest account 1 Click St
387. re version has been updated Minimize the window for later use Step 16 Load the RFA license file RFA Authentication file and ART installscript sh file You will need the location on your laptop where you saved the RFA license file the RFA Authentication file and the ART installscript file before you begin this section 1 On your laptop click Start gt Run In the Open field type ftp 192 11 13 6 then click OK A ftp window opens 2 Inthe ftp window type anonymous for the login Press the enter key without entering a password You get a message saying Anonymous user logged in 3 Atthe ftp prompt type bin You switch to binary mode and get a message that says that the type is set to 1 4 Atthe ftp prompt type put followed by the complete path name of the file You will need to execute the put command for each file RFA license file RFA Authentication file and ART installscript file For example If you saved the installscript file on your C drive under a directory called patches you would type put C patches installscript sh 5 After all you transfer all the files type bye 6 Maximize the telnet window you minimized in step 21 7 Atthe bash prompt in the telnet window type cd D LucentPub ftproot pwd to verify that you are in the D LucentPub ftproot directory 8100 Installation and Upgrades 21 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 8 Typels and press the retu
388. remote subscribers that are on a subscriber s mailing list 6 Press F3 to save the changes The cursor returns to the command line and the system displays the following message Command Successfully Completed 7 Enter exit or another administrative command S8100 Installation and Upgrades 237 April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Change local machine s information View remote extensions To verify that the local machine database updated the remote subscriber information view the remote extensions 1 Start at the AUDIX command prompt screen 2 Enter list remote extensions machine name at the enter command prompt where the machine name is the local machine of the remote subscribers The system displays the List Remote Extensions screen Press F7 to display additional pages of the list 4 Press F1 to return the cursor to the command line 5 Enterexit or another administrative command 238 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Upgrade and repair procedures Replace a TN795 Processor circuit pack 5 Upgrade and repair procedures This chapter provides an overview of the procedures to upgrade and repair the 58100 system See the Job Aid sections in Checklist and Job Aids Overview at the beginning of this document for the steps to perform the upgrade procedures The repair procedures involving the replacement of the processor hard drive or circuit pack are the same as the corresponding upgrade procedures
389. representation of information by continuously variable physical quantities such as amplitude frequency and phase See also digital on page 407 analog data Data that is transmitted over a digital facility in analog PCM form The data must pass through a modem either at both ends or at a modem pool at the distant end analog telephone A telephone that receives acoustic voice signals and sends analog electrical signals along the telephone line Analog telephones are usually served by a single wire pair tip and ring The model 2500 telephone set is a typical example of an analog telephone ARS See Automatic Route Selection ARS on page 406 ART Automatic Registration tool Tool used by services personnel to complete registration of an S8100 by requesting that alarming be turned on and tested ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange The standard code for representing characters in digital form Each character is represented by an 8 bit code including parity bit Access Security Gateway ASG A security management server that provides secure remote access to Avaya products installed at customer sites Audio Information Exchange AUDIX A fully integrated voice mail system Can be used with a variety of communications systems to provide call history data such as subscriber identification and reason for redirection AUDIX See Audio Information Exchange AUDIX on page 405 Automatic Alternate Routing
390. res that every authorized Avaya application is executing on an 58100 server It contains two major components a watchdog process and a license server Glue application module An S8100 application that integrates functionality for most or all other 8100 applications Examples include Watchdog Lucent Access Control LAC Global Alarm Module GAM Global Administration Subsystem GAS and Backup Restore graphical user interface GUI The use of pictures rather than just words to represent the input and output of a program A program with a GUI runs under some windowing system for example X Window System Microsoft Windows Acorn RISC OS and NeXTstep The program displays certain icons buttons dialogs etc in its windows on the screen and the user controls it mainly by moving a pointer on the screen typically controlled by a mouse and selecting certain objects by pressing buttons on the mouse while the pointer is pointing at them Group Authorization ID Numbers assigned to a company or parts of a company They are used to determine access permission to system records S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Glossary Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A public or private network that provides end to end digital communications for every service to which users have access by a limited set of standard multipurpose user network interfaces defined by the CCITT Through internationally accepted standard interfaces ISDN provi
391. rmation With nonfacility associated signaling NFAS ISDN PRI can include 24 B channels and no D channel See also Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN and Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Interface ISDN BRI INTUITY AUDIX The INTUITY AUDIX application resides on 8100 with the CornerStone platform to provide subscribers with messaging capabilities including call answering and voice mailbox services IINTUITY Message Manager A Windows based software product that allows INTUITY AUDIX users to receive store and send their voice fax messages from a PC The software also enables users to create and send multimedia messages that include voice fax text and file attachment components ISDN See Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN LAC See Lucent Access Control LAC on page 410 LED See light emitting diode LED on page 410 license file Encrypted file that contains software category release feature and capacity RTUs and the hardware serial number the license is tied to for a specific 58100 License Normal mode in DEFINITY A license is properly installed and contains the correct serial number that matches the processor with purchased features RTUS S8100 Installation and Upgrades 409 April 2004 Glossary 410 License Error mode in DEFINITY Call processing is supported a major alarm has been declared and a 6 day shut off timer is running You must determine the cause of the inco
392. rn key You see the files you copied with the ftp command in step 4 of this section 9 Toexecute the file that contains the RAS IP address the product IDs etc type installscript sh You see informational messages on your screen When the command completes you see a message that says that the command was successful 10 loadlicense lt yourfilename lic gt Substitute the name of the license file for yourfilename lic A message appears that tells you the command succeeded 11 Typeloadpwd lt yourauthenticationfilename pwd gt Substitute the name of your Authentication file for yourauthenticationfilename pwd A message appears that tells you the command succeeded Step 17 Reboot the system At the bash prompt in the telnet window type reboot nice to reboot the system This will take approximately 4 minutes After the system reboots you will receive the ASG challenge when you login Step 18 Restore the customer translations Perform the following steps to restore the customer translations 1 Make sure the PCMCIA card with the most current translations is in the PCMCIA slot of he TN2314 If the PCMCIA card is not in the PCMCIA slot insert it at this time 2 Openatelnet window on your laptop by clicking Start Run In the Open field type 192 11 13 6 and click OK Login using lucent3 and the response to the ASG challenge At the LAC prompt type bash From the bash prompt type d1restore pcmcia deftran defann vmnamms
393. rom the last install Unable to create directory Platform s troubleshooting commands For a complete list of commands see Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands on page 343 Detailed strategic analysis of each command is found in 5700 Maintenance for the Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 149 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 275 April 2004 Troubleshooting Modem s configuration and administration Modem s configuration and administration The following procedures describe how to check settings and test the external modem Verify INADS modem settings on page 276 e Verify external modem option settings on page 276 External modem not used on page 277 Configure the installed modem on page 278 e Test the external modem on page 278 NOTE The modem US Robotics model is preconfigured to work correctly Verify INADS modem settings No external modem installed If an external modem is not connected to INADS no INADS Alarm Origination proceed as follows 1 Enter display system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Verify that the Alarm Origination Activated to OSS Numbers field is set to n and press Enter 3 Verify that Cleared Alarm Notification and Restart Notification are set to n 4 Test remote access port to n External modem installed 1 Enter display system parameters maintenance and press Enter 2 Verify that the Alar
394. rs separated by spaces do not enter commas 29 BS Telnet into the LAC window from the Execute telnet 127 1 and login using lucent3 bash 30 LAC Install the new license and password For details see Chapter 3 in Installation and Upgrades for the file from the LAC window using the Avaya 8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and the lucent3 login Avaya 1 Media Gateways 555 233 146 31 LAC Exit the LAC window and bash Typeexit and close the telnet window b Type exit to close the bash window 32 SDT Open Internet Explorer on the Double click the IE icon on the S8100 s desktop ee b Click Administer System Login using lucent3 d Click Continue on the Notice page 33 SDT IE Restore the translations and other a Click Administer System backed up data to the hard drive b Click Backup amp Restore Note The Windows logins of vm sa EC e Click Restore browse and NTadmin are reset to their s ban factory defaults The customer should reset d Select the Source for the restore The Destination or these passwords and reinstall other Other location you entered for the backup in Step 12 Windows accounts they may have created e Click the Continue button Under These items will be restored from every item that was backed up to the location specified in Step d will be selected f Click the Restore button Note If you backed up AUDIX announcements in Step 12 yo
395. rs 185 Alerts notifications 186 Test alarm call out 186 Communication Manager alarm test 187 INTUITY alarm test 187 Windows 2000 server alarm test 187 Resolve alarms 187 Check system s status 187 Enable customer logins 187 Enable INTUITY AUDIX logins 188 Enable customer s web logins 188 Enable S8100 Logins 188 Administer S8100 188 8100 commands 188 Set system date and time 188 Using Windows 2000 188 Using systime 189 Using a local command line interface CLI 189 Remote dial in 189 Set up country specific call progress tones 190 Enable and disable SNMP 192 Check customer option screen 192 Set country options 193 Check system s status 194 Set up your system 194 Set country options 194 Administer the attendant console 195 Add translations 195 Administer telephone features 196 Place a test call 196 Test INADS callout 196 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 51 April 2004 Contents 4 52 Setup call detail recording CDR Share CDR data Map a shared CDR directory Set call collection interface Verify call record collection Call accounting Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization Check the dial plan Check hunt groups Check class of service Check class of restriction Change the dial plan Add AUDIX ports Make a hunt group Change coverage path Add test phones Save translations INTUITY AUDIX administration INTUITY AUDIX commands Adding an INTUI
396. s Backup via the web interface The following are web interface procedures 1 Open Internet Explorer 2 Enter http lt IP address in the address area of the web browser The 58100 Home page displays Home Administer System User Services 3 Click Administer System 8100 Installation and Upgrades 319 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface 4 Enter your login ID and password The login ID must have the correct backup permissions and be a member of the S8100 Administrator s login group The following Notice screen displays NOTICE By use of this system you accept the terms and conditions of the license agreements for all third party software included with this product Failure to comply with these Home agreements could result in legal action by the third party vendor s This product is designed for the use of authorized Avaya Inc products only Use of this system for any other third party applications is strictly prohibited and will result in the nullification of Avaya Inc warranty and post warranty obligations Administer System User nar This system is restricted to authorized users for legitimate business purposes D y b Unauthorized access is a criminal violation ofthe law Copyright c 1992 Avaya Inc Unpublished amp Not for Publication Software Don t show this message again Continue 5 Click Continue The following screen displa
397. s 1 list configuration Page 1 LIST CONFIGURATION Configuration Option Audix Application DCS Fax High speed digital ports Low speed digital ports Max Number of IMAPI Sessions Multilingual SCSI Disk Mirroring TCPIP digital ports Text to Speech Sessions Trusted Seruers hours of speech uoice ports Press NextPage PreuPage or Cancel Contact your Avaya representative if you need more than the enabled number of ports or if you want to add TCP IP networking Change number of administered remote users The number of administered remote users must be 2 the number of mailboxes on every remote system networked with this local system To change the number of administered remote users 1 Start at the AUDIX command prompt screen 2 Enter change system parameters limits at the enter command prompt The System Parameters Limits screen displays Alarms MmwA change system parameters limits SYSTEM PARAMETERS LIMITS MESSAGE LIMITS Message Lengths Maximum seconds 1200 Minimum tenths of seconds 10 Messages Total In All Mailboxes 50000 Awaiting Delivery 5000 ADMINISTRATION LIMITS Subscribers Local 15000 Administered Remote 1000 Lists Total Entries 200000 Lists Subscriber 100 Recipients List 250 enter command change system parameters limits 224 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Administer networking channels Enter the number of remote users in t
398. s as described in the following table Physical connection IP address Local monitor mouse keyboard 127 1 Laptop PCMCIA network 192 11 13 6 connection PC or laptop with RAS modem dial 10 21 0 X X is customer dependent up Avaya assigned PC or laptop on customer s LAN Customer dependent default login value of 192 11 13 9 Once you are physically connected there are several ways to access S8100 as shown in the next table Access method Telnet ip addr gt Start gt Run Avaya Site Administration using appropriate ip addrs Web browser http lt ip addr gt Terminal server use Terminal Services client The following table shows login information for Avaya personnel Logins to enter Logins to enter Logins to enter system Communication Manager INTUITY AUDIX lucentl dinit atsc lucent2 dinads acraft lucent3 dcraft acraft e Each row of logins has the same password For example the lucent1 dinit and atsc logins all have the same password The lucent logins are used to access the web browser and terminal server Every login can be used for Telnet access e Thed and a logins columns 2 and 3 are used for Avaya Site Administration access S8100 Installation and Upgrades 351 April 2004 Installation connectivity quick reference 352 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Map CD ROM for an S8100 upgrade Prepa
399. s connect the cabinet to the MDF Allowed circuit packs Disallowed circuit packs Circuit pack installation Circuit pack slot loading Off premises circuit protection Install sneak fuse panels Label the main distribution frame Setringing option for CMC1 K Identify a hard disk for PCN1413b Glossary Index S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 371 371 372 372 373 373 374 374 378 378 381 381 382 382 383 384 384 384 385 386 386 386 389 391 391 394 395 397 399 401 405 415 Contents 59 Contents 60 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 About this book Overview About this book Overview This document provides procedures to install upgrade or add to an Avaya 58100 Media Server with an Avaya G600 Media Gateway formerly called IP600 This document also provides procedures to replace upgrade or add to an Avaya S8100 Media Server with an Avaya CMC1 Media Gateway formerly called DEFINITY ONE Within both physical platforms the 58100 media server resides on a TN2314 circuit pack The current offer S8100 with G600 is a high functionality system for customers needing from 20 to 450 stations which can be any combination of IP DCP ISDN and analog stations and up to 300 trunks A G600 fits well in a communications environment with converged IP data and voice over IP VoIP data This offer provides Avaya Communication Manager and INTUITYTM AUDIX messaging on a
400. s on the CWY board eliminates the need for the TN750 circuit pack thus freeing the slot occupied by the TN750 circuit pack CWY1 announcements can be stored on the 8100 hard drive and backed up and restored to a LAN drive To install CWY1 announcements you use the 8100 user interface to upload the announcements file from a server directory to the announcements directory The file is moved to the appropriate announcements directory and converted from WAV format to speech format CWY 1 announcements can also be recorded in the same manner as the TN750C The virtual port location is 1413 for CWY S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Hardware additions Multiple integrated recorded announcements Installing CWY1 announcements To install CWY1 announcements 1 From the 58100 home page click Administer System The System Administration page displays 2 Click Announcement Admin The Announcements Administration page displays 3 Click Upload File The Upload File page displays ANNOUNCEMENT ADMINISTRATION Upload File Select File Instructions To upload a file click fhe browse and select a file click upload Administer Browse To go fo the announcement administration System page click the link af the bottom Upload Home User Services Download Software Announcement Administration 4 Enter the name of the announcements file that you want to upload and click the Upload button After th
401. s or when installing Avaya Site Manager or Message Manager Appendix This appendix contains procedures for several installation and maintenance tasks not covered elsewhere in the book Appendix D Use this appendix when performing shutdown and reset reboot procedures Appendix E This appendix describes the TN2314 processor s LED boot sequence and LED states Appendix F This appendix provides information about an 58100 system s status LEDs Appendix G 62 This appendix summarizes the Bash and LAC commands S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Appendix H About this book Using this book This appendix briefly summarizes the various connections and access methods to an 58100 system Appendix I Use this appendix to map a laptop s CD ROM drive for an 8100 upgrade Appendix J Use this appendix to initially install and cable an 8100 with CMCI Appendix K S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Use this appendix to identify the correct hard disks to be replaced under PCN1413b 63 About this book Conventions Conventions This section describes the conventions used in this book Physical dimensions e Each physical dimension is in English units followed by parentheses with the equivalent metric dimension Each wire gauge is in AWG American wire guage followed by parentheses with the area of the wire s metallic cross section in square millimeters
402. s the S8100 s desktop Connect to the 58100 Map to the laptop s CD ROM drive J Install and cable a CMC1 cabinet Check customer s order Correct shipping errors Unpack and inspect Install an 58100 with a CMC1 system cabinet Verify the carrier address ID on CMC1 cabinets Floor mount the CMC1 cabinet Wall mount the CMC1 cabinets Install plywood backing on wall Install wall mounted cabinet Install three vertically mounted cabinets Install two cabinets vertically and one horizontally Install left and right panels wall mount 58 347 347 347 348 348 348 348 349 351 353 353 353 353 354 354 354 355 355 355 356 357 357 358 358 362 362 364 364 365 366 368 369 370 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Check AC power and ground for CMC1 Check AC power Approved grounds Approved floor grounds Uninterruptible power supply Cabinet s power switch Connect cabinet s grounds and other grounds Install the ground block and ground wire on cabinets Install coupled bonding conductor Connect and route the power cords Cable a CMC1 system Install Processor Interface cable and TDM LAN bus terminators Cable 3 cabinet CMC1 system Vertically mounted system Vertically and horizontally mounted system Install CMC1 main distribution frame MDF and external modem Install the MDF on CMC1 Bottom mounted MDF with modem Install the external modem Install equipment room hardware for CMC1 Cros
403. scellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface To view contents click Contents of backup location The following screen displays a Restore Home Administer System User Services Download Software 1 Immediate Backup s Scheduled Backups s Last scheduled backup results a Contents of backup location Display current backup contents in pcmcia z Scroll to the location of backup contents and click Display or click Other locations The following screen displays z Immediate Backup a Scheduled Backups a Restore Home Administer System User Services Download Software NOTE a Last scheduled backup results a Contents of backup location Current Contents of Backup in pemcia Name Size Created The backup feature can be disabled and later enabled to allow you to perform another function If disabled the current schedules remain intact 326 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Perform restore 1 Click Restore The following screen displays Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface Home Administer System User Services Download Software a Immediate Backup a Scheduled Backups a Restore a Last scheduled backup results a Contents of backup location Please select the source location from which the restore will take place Source pcmcia x 2 Select the restore source and click continue Continue 3 Other source locations H
404. se the Back button to make corrections if necessary and click the Test button to test the connection When the connection is successfully tested click Next and then Finish Add S8100 voice mail administration item 1 2 For a new voice mail administration item click File gt New Voice Mail System The Add Voice Mail System screen displays Enter a name in the System name field For technicians who are configuring Avaya Site Administration on their laptops use a generic name as you will be able to use this connection item for every S8100 machine connected over the PCMCIA physical connection The remainder of the procedure to add a voice mail item is the same as adding a switch item See Add an 58100 switch administration item on page 267 Enter the connection information for the voice mail system Start a switch administration session 268 To launch a GEDI session 1 2 3 4 Click the tree tab of the Avaya Site Administration window Right click the newly created switch item 58100 switch in our example Click General Click Start GEDI Once the connection has completed a login screen displays S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Configure Avaya Site Administration 5 Enter the login ID and password Manual Login x Enter your login and password or challenge response at the prompts When you have entered the login and password or response press
405. serv bash command 348 FX trunk adding 250 418 G 9600 installation 72 AC power and ground 86 cabinet s power switches 88 cabinets cross connecting to MDF 100 circuit packs allowed 100 disallowed 103 connect power cords 92 coupled bonding conductors 92 disallowed circuit packs 103 equipment room hardware 100 off premises circuit protection 107 setting ringing option 111 system cabinet 79 GAS commands 343 GEDI launching sessions 268 ground blocks installation to right panel 375 installing 374 ground rings 87 372 ground wiring AC 89 374 grounds approved 87 89 372 374 approved floor 88 372 building steel 87 372 checking 86 371 concrete encased 87 372 connecting 89 374 single point 89 374 water pipes 87 372 H hard disks identifying for QP1413b 401 replacing 240 hardware additions 243 circuit packs 243 CO FX WATS and PCOL 250 code calling 253 DID trunks 250 IP trunk 244 speech synthesizer circuit pack 253 tie trunks 251 TN750C circuit pack 253 configuration for Avaya Site Administration 262 help online for Avaya Site Administration 265 horizontally mounted cabinets 365 m hunt groups 200 205 58100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 identifying hard disks for QP1413b 401 impedance setting 283 INADS modem 276 initializing the system 173 installation BRI terminating resistor 130 circuit packs 105 391 coupled bo
406. set up for the first INTUITY AUDIX port The Duplicate Station form displays MES station 2001 Page 2 Gf 4 ls STATION Ext Port Name Security Code Room Jack Cable 1001 01A1201 NE x 13 Add the 7 remaining stations for example Ext 2002 to Port 01A1202 Ext 2003 to Port 01A1203 etc This allows you to add every station at the same time on the same form Make a hunt group 1 At the SAT or Avaya Site Administration window type add hunt next The Hunt Group form displays f hunt group next Page 1 of 10N HUNT GROUP Group Number 1 ACD n Group Name Queue n Group Extension Vector n Group Type ucd mia Coverage Path TN 1 Night Service Destination COR 1 MM Early Answer n Security Code ISDN Caller Display S 2 2 the Group Number 3 Typeaname in the Group Name field 4 the Group Extension 5 Ensurethat Group Type is set to ucd mia 6 Ensure that Queue is y and Queue Length is 8 8100 Installation and Upgrades 205 April 2004 System initialization Administer Communication Manager for INTUITY AUDIX initialization 7 Press F7 to go to the next page of the form The Hunt Group form displays f hunt group next Page 2 of 10N HUNT GROUP Message Center audix Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX n LWC Reception none Se 8 Ensure that Message Center is set to audix 9 Press Tab The Calling Party Number to INTUITY A
407. single hardware platform The legacy offer 58100 with CMC1 is a high functionality communications system for customers with similar line requirements and growth potential 20 40 stations with growth potential to 240 stations and up to 300 trunks This legacy offer also provides Communication Manager and INTUITY AUDIX messaging on a single hardware platform Audience The primary audience for this book is trained field installation and maintenance personnel performing initial installations migrations and upgrades of the S8100 media server with the G600 or CMC1 media gateways Installation technicians are assumed to have training in Windows 2000 and local area networks LANs Secondary audiences include the Technical Service Center TSC personnel S8100 Installation and Upgrades 61 April 2004 About this book Using this book Using this book This book provides step by step procedures for installing or upgrading S8100 systems that implement the Communication Manager features Checklists The initial checklists summarize the steps for several common installation procedures installing and initializing an 58100 system and for administering INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Each step provides a link to more detailed information later in the book Job Aids The following Job Aids summarize the steps for several common upgrade procedures for pre R10 systems replacing the processor board for R10 or later re
408. ssor circuit packs 336 local machines changing information 226 login groups 300 login names 300 logins for customer 187 as m administrator 300 super user 306 to INTUITY AUDIX 188 301 Web 188 302 Windows 300 Windows NT 304 versus command permissions in INTUITY AUDIX 301 setting up 306 Lucent access controller LAC commands 343 machine name setting in Windows 346 main distribution frames installing external modem 384 labeling 397 major alarm contact 127 mapping drives during upgrades 313 Map Network Drive wizard 356 58100 to laptop s CD ROM 158 shared CDR directory 197 material stocking location MSL see National Parts MDF cross connecting cabinet 100 386 mounting 384 measurements security 306 Message Manager downloading 271 installing 211 introduction 271 modem administration 276 external switch settings 99 149 385 INADS 276 installing external 99 385 setup 276 modularity 3 pair 119 4 pair 119 mounting MDFs 384 mu Law companding 195 419 Index multiple cabinets cabling 71 357 installing 71 357 multipoint adapters figure 135 installation 133 N name setting machine name in Windows 346 National Electrical Code NEC grounding rules 86 371 National Parts 73 358 neon voltage versus ring ping 150 net user bash command 304 349 NETBUI and mapping drives 313 networking channels digital networking 225 no license emergency num
409. stall and cable a G600 cabinet Install off premises station wiring Install off premises station wiring The local telephone company provides the cabling for off premises stations These stations can appear on any of the RJ21X network interfaces provided for the CO trunks A WARNING Use only an FCC approved or equivalent analog telephone for example 2500 series set as an off premises station The TN746B and TN2183 Analog Line circuit packs can be connected to off premises stations 1 Install an A25D cable between the RJ21X network interface and a sneak fuse panel At the MDF connect jumper wires between 1 row connecting block in the green field and up to 3 rows connecting blocks in the purple field to concentrate the analog line pairs Connectan A25D cable between the sneak fuse panel and the terminal block connector associated with the green row in Step 2 4 Install a green label on the terminal block to identify the remote location 5 Administer per Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Install off premises or out of building stations Out of building campus stations are telephones not physically located in the same building as the equipment room yet located on the same property Analog off premises stations Figure 63 Connections for one to eight out of building analog telephones on page 137 shows the connections for 1 to 8 off premises analog telephones Only analog telephones conne
410. stem 1 Communication Manager warm start Reset System 2 Communication Manager cold start Reset System 3 Communication Manager reboot Reset System 4 Communication Manager reboot Reset System 5 system reboot E LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor circuit pack TN2314 Processor circuit pack s LEDs after booting LED states F Status LEDs Attendant console s LEDs Other circuit packs Circuit packs status LEDs Power supply s LEDs G GAS commands in bash Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands LAC commands setip command Display current settings Set the machine name in Windows Set RAS IP address S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 325 325 327 328 328 329 329 331 331 333 334 334 334 334 334 335 335 335 336 338 339 339 339 339 341 343 343 345 346 346 346 347 Contents 57 Contents Set the customer s LAN DNS and WINS information Set LAN address Set DNS addresses and host name Set WINS addresses Other commands ftpserv command statapp command net user commands H Installation connectivity quick reference Map CD ROM for an S8100 upgrade Prepare to access the S8100 Activate the Guest account Check the Guest account s current setting Enable the Guest account Verify the Guest account s new setting Share the laptop s CD ROM drive Connect to and access the S8100 Prepare to acces
411. stered These procedures are provided in Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Telephone connection examples The 302C1 attendant console AC describes a typical telephone connection This information is typical of the 603E 84xx 4 wire and 94xx telephones The AC always requires auxiliary adjunct power 48 VDC See Figure 46 Wiring 302C1 to a Digital Line circuit pack on page 114 Only 1 console can be powered by the system through the auxiliary AUX connector The primary console should be powered from the system so it has the same power failure backup as the system The maximum cabling distance for a cabinet powered console is 350 feet 100 meters using 24 AWG 5 0 26 mm wire The general steps to connect a telephone are 1 Choose a device to connect such as a 302C1 attendant console 2 Choose the port circuit pack its carrier and slot number such as TN754C Carrier A Slot 06 Choose a port circuit on the port circuit pack such as Port 05 4 Install cross connect jumpers to wire the terminal to the port circuit pack See Figure 46 Wiring 302C1 to a Digital Line circuit pack on page 114 This pinout is for a 4 wire Digital Line circuit pack S8100 Installation and Upgrades 113 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment 114 Figure 46 Wiring 302C1 to a Digital Line circuit pack 9 9 TXT 1 4 amp
412. system reboot with immediate entry from a application without a guaranteed reboot time of a bash session waiting for INTUITY few minutes This action does AUDIX users to log off not wait for INTUITY AUDIX The system restarts users to be logged off from automatically INTUITY AUDIX 1 of 3 8100 Installation and Upgrades 331 April 2004 Recovery 58100 system level shutdown and restart Table 52 Shutdown and restart actions 2 of 3 Action Entry Originated by Action Notes shutdown command line technician Shuts down application Used for system upgrade The all entry from a software while leaving campon option may cause an campon bash session Windows 2000 up An unacceptable wait time The optional start all command can be option may be used to used to restart the application wait for INTUITY software AUDIX users to log off shutdown command line technician Shuts down INTUITY Used to shut down INTUITY Audix entry from a AUDIX while leaving AUDIX if the machine name is campon bash session Communication Manager changed The start Audix and Windows 2000 up command can be used to An optional campon restart INTUITY AUDIX The option may be used to campon option may cause an wait for INTUITY unacceptable wait time AUDIX users to log off shutdown command line technician Shuts down the system Used to shut down the system system entry from a without res
413. system side and the station side of the station distribution field on the MDF Connect modem to telephone network l Cross connect the network jack on the modem to the network interface via a 103A or modular wall jack See Table 22 Pinout of network jack on page 148 for the pinout Table 22 Pinout of network jack Pin number Signal 1 Unused 2 Tip 3 Ring 4 Unused 148 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Connect modem Figure 68 Network jack on US Robotics modem Sportster ay 33 6 Faxmodem LJ LJ D OS modmcabl KLC 110397 Figure notes 1 Pin 1 of network jack 2 Modem Connect modem The US Robotics external modem is the recommended external modem A locally obtained type approved external modem may be used Contact your Avaya representative for information If any other modem is installed see the setup instructions provided with that modem Option settings for external modem Use Table 23 Switch settings for US Robotics external modem on page 149 to check or set the 8 option switches on the US Robotics modem Table 23 Switch settings for US Robotics external modem 1 of 2 Switch Setting Function 1 OFF up DTR Data Terminal Ready override 2 OFF up Verbal result codes text formatted feedback characters such as connected or no carrier
414. t type copybef F34 User input User input is in bold type whether you must type the input select the input from a menu or click a button or similar element on a screen or a web page Examples Type exit and then press Enter On the File menu click Save On the Network Gateway page click Configure Hardware System output and field names System output and field names on the screen are in nonospaced type Related documents The following documents provide supplemental information when installing an 58100 with G600 or CMCI system Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3 Main Distribution Field Design 555 230 630 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server and System 75 and System 85 Terminals and Adjuncts Reference 555 015 201 Installation Upgrades and Additions for Avaya CMC1 Media Gateways 555 233 118 Installation for Adjuncts and Peripherals for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 116 Administrator 5 Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 e Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 504 Maintenance for DEFINITY Server CSI 555 233 119 DEFINITY ONE Communications System AUDIX Administration Command Line Quick Reference Card 555 233 737 Maintenance for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and CMCI Media Gateways 555 233 149 Overv
415. t TDM LAN bus pin field in Cabinet A 7 Install the upper connector of the TDM LAN bus cable on the right TDM LAN bus pin field in Cabinet B 96 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Cable a G600 system 8 Flip over the routing slot plates and reinstall both Once the plates are reinstalled the ends of the routing slots are covered 9 Reinstall the fan assemblies and bottom panel Figure 39 TDM LAN bus cable routed from Cabinet A to Cabinet B cadptdm4 102600 Figure notes 1 Cabinet B s routing slot plate reversed 2 Cabinet A s routing slot plate reversed 3 TDM LAN bus cable S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 97 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install G600 patch panels and external modem Cable a 3 cabinet G600 system The procedure to connect the TDM LAN bus cable for three cabinets is essentially the same as described in the previous section Cable a 2 cabinet G600 system on page 94 For three cabinets A B and C mount Cabinet A at the bottom Cabinet B in the middle above A and Cabinet C at the top above B Between A and B connect the TDM LAN bus cable to the right pin field on both cabinets Between B and C connect the TDM bus cable to the left pin fi
416. t of this screen 12 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step 9 Save the Communication Manager translations 1 Inthe SAT window type save translations to save Communication Manager translations onto the hard drive 2 When save translation is finished type logoff When asked if you want to proceed with the logoff type y for yes followed by the Enter key You will have to press Enter again to get the LAC prompt Step 10 Open a bash shell At the LAC prompt type bash Step 11 Record the customer network and product information 1 From the bash shell execute the following commands 1 distat distat is used to display the health of the system Record the status on any process that is DOWN or PARTIALLY UP Disregard the state of the W2000console The following figure shows an example of the d1stat command Figure 3 distat 13 180 UP 1 1 UP W2666TermServ 1 7 1 UP W266Gconsole IN USE CoResServ UP ConnunicaMgr UP SNMP PARTIALLY UP PARTIALLY UP DOUN DOWN UP 2 alarmstat alarmstat is used to view the active alarms on the 58100 Verify if the system has any active alarms If there are active alarms stop and go no further All active alarms must be resolved before preceding If you cannot resolve the active alarm s call the TSC or COE for assistance The following figure shows an example of the alarmstat command Figure 4 alar
417. tarting it An in preparation for removing campon bash session optional campon AC power or removing the options may by used to TN2314 Processor circuit wait for INTUITY pack The campon option may AUDIX users to log off cause an unacceptable wait The system does not time The system can be restart automatically restarted only by removing and restoring power or reseating the TN2314 delayed Web page technician Wait for INTUITY Used to shut down the system shutdown from a web customer AUDIX users tolog off in preparation for removing button browser before starting a system AC power or removing the shutdown Depending TN2314 Processor circuit pack a restart option the system may restart automatically immediate Web page technician Do not wait for Used to shut down the system shutdown from a web customer INTUITY AUDIX users in preparation for removing button browser to log off before starting AC power or removing the a system shutdown TN2314 Processor circuit pack Depending on a restart option the system may restart automatically 2 of 3 332 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Table 52 Shutdown and restart actions 3 of 3 Recovery Communication Manager software reset recovery Alarm lead on the TN2314 Action Entry Originated by Action Notes Shut down Faceplate of technician Shut down the system Used to shut down the system switchonthe the TN2314 customer after clos
418. tations connections on page 116 Figure 48 Typical station wiring connections Analog or 2 wire DCP amp 4 wire DCP widmjck1 KLC 092700 8100 Installation and Upgrades 115 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment 116 Table 9 Wiring color code Station type Wire color tip ring Analog yellow blue 2 wire DCP white orange 4 wire DCP red blue red orange Hybrid white blue white orange white green Power white red Table 10 Stations connections Station type Connector Analog or 2 wire DCP T 1 R 26 BRI T 1 R 26 T123 R1 28 4 wire DCP T 2 R 27 1 3 1 28 Hybrid T 1 R 26 1 2 R1227 T2 3 R2 28 Power 4 29 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Analog tie trunk example Figure 49 Analog tie trunk cross connect 9 9 T1 26 lt lt 29 T2 1 0 4 R2 T11 27 4 Y 30 T12 R11 2 4 gt gt 5 R12 E1 e M 31 E2 Mi 3 lt gt gt 6 M2 tie wire 040596 Figure notes 1 External trunk or adapter 2 Tie Trunk circuit pack 1 Before installing the Tie Trunk circuit pack set the option switches as described in TN760E option switch settings and administration on pag
419. te LED Safe to pull board when 4 Amber LED green LED is on 8 Shut down switch Gracefully shuts down system 112 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Section II Install telephones and make auxiliary connections Section II Install telephones and make auxiliary connections This section describes procedures for installing and wiring telephones and making auxiliary connections Install and wire telephones and other equipment NOTE Only 1 pair of wires is available for emergency transfer and pair of wires is available for attendant console power The wiring procedures are similar for most Avaya telephones and other equipment This section provides wiring examples for similar installation procedures Actual wiring procedures may vary at each site The system can connect to any DTE terminal The system can have RS 232 or EIA 232 or DCP interfaces As necessary following sections of this chapter provide wiring pinouts for various port circuit packs Also Table 47 Leads for circuit packs and auxiliary equipment pinout charts on page 295 has pinout information for every port circuit pack Punch down information for common circuit packs is in Figure 96 Example MDF connections on page 394 This figure shows the colors of the punch downs and is best viewed from CD ROM or on line After installing the hardware the data for the system and telephone features can be admini
420. telnet ports for direct access to embedded AUDIX and INTUITY AUDIX If the Telnet session is established to TCP port 22 and the login has privileges to access Communication Manager a connection is made directly to SAT without a LAC prompt If the caller logs off the Telnet session is terminated If the Telnet session is established to TCP port 24 and the login has privileges to access INTUITY AUDIX a connection is made directly to an INTUITY AUDIX Forms Controller administration screen without a LAC prompt If the caller logs off the Telnet session is terminated The same logins are used with ports 22 and 24 as well as 23 The difference is that a direct connection is made to the appropriate application without a LAC prompt or having to use an alias login See Access methods on page 165 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 299 April 2004 Set up customer logins Windows logins for customers Windows logins for customers Several Windows login groups and associated logins are preinstalled for customer use from the factory See Table 48 Windows 2000 logins on page 300 The login IDs in the last 2 columns of Table 48 Windows 2000 logins on page 300 are for customer use The following describes use and administration of these logins Table 48 Windows 2000 logins Logins for customer use Windows login Default group User name password Administrators NTadmin NTadmin1 Guest
421. the CWY 1 circuit pack 1A12 before you change the companding mode 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Set up your system change sustem parameters country options Page 1 of 21 SPE A SYSTEM PARAMETERS COUNTRY OPTIONS Companding Mode Mu Law Base Tone Generator Set 440Hz PBX dial Tone 440Hz Secondary dial Tone Digital Loss Plan Analog Ringing Cadence Analog Line Transmission Set Layer 1 timer 1 to 30 seconds Enhanced 84xx Display Character Set I2 15 TONE DETECTION PRRRMETERS Tone Detection Mode Interdigit Pause short In 2 default United States companding mode is u Law If the country uses A Law companding type A Law Press Enter when finished Administer the attendant console 1 Enter display system parameters country options Verify the system s companding mode for its local stations usually A Law for Europe and u Law for North America and Japan 2 Ifnecessary enter change terminal parameters 603 302B1 to change the default system level parameters and audio levels for these terminals NOTE For information about changing the default parameters and audio levels refer to DEFINITY Application Notes available through the International Technical Assistance Center ITAC 3 Administer other forms listed under Attendant Console in DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 7 Administrator s Guide 555 233 502 Add translations Ref
422. the Software Downloads link d Clicking the S8100 Media Server Hard Drive Verification utility S8100 Installation and Upgrades 401 April 2004 Identify a hard disk for PCN1413b The following figure shows a portion of this web page NOTE For this specific activity neither the hard drive s TN number nor serial number are relevant The following description is only intended as a guide 8100 Media Server Hard Drive Verification Utility Description 2 issue has been identified with the hard drive used with some 58100 systems manufactured from December 2002 through May 2003 Systems containing affected hard drives need to have the hard drive replaced to increase the long term reliability of the system Systems manufactured during this period can be identified by the serial number of the TN2314 circuit pack Potentially affected units have serial numbers from 0212124X44XXX and 03J205XXXXXX where the first two digits e g 02 is the two digit year 12 signifies the manufacturing facility and the next two digits e g 712 for December are the month of manufacture inclusive If your 58100 unit has serial number in the potentially affected range first read the Read Me file and then download and execute the diskcheck script to determine if the hard drive needs to be replaced See QPPCN i4138 re information 6 Download the diskcheck file to your laptop Right click the highlighted item diskcheck script b From the h
423. the status of administration tasks Organizing systems and task shortcuts in the browser tree Components of Avaya Site Administration Avaya Site Administration provides a central window that allows access to switches and INTUITY AUDIX systems Figure 72 Avaya Site Administration window with tasks pane and status viewer or history pane on page 264 shows the main Avaya Site Administration screen S8100 Installation and Upgrades 263 April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Components of Avaya Site Administration Figure 72 Avaya Site Administration window with tasks pane and status viewer or history pane Avaya Site Administration OF x File Edit View System Action Tools Window Help alala e Haee Ala Bl oo AX As a default setting the left pane shows the task wizards that Avaya Site Administration offers for performing frequent tasks Users can use task wizards to create common tasks and schedule those tasks to run on the system and or save the tasks to the Avaya Site Administration browser tree Users can create the following tasks with the task pane 264 Start GEDI Any administration activity that can be accomplished with the Graphically Enhanced DEFINITY interface including almost all 58100 administration User Administration Add phones remove phones and change a phone user s name 58100 and INTUITY AUDIX Find and Replace Change find
424. ther Location to send the backup to a network location g Click the Backup button 12 SDT IE Record AUDIX extension length Note You will need to verify the extension length later Click the Back icon on the IE tool bar twice to return to the Administer System page b From the explorer window click Default AUDIX Settings Note whether AUDIX is enabled If so click AUDIX Extension Length and record the extension length 13 SDT IE Close Internet Explorer on the S8100 s desktop 14 SDT Open a bash shell window if not already open S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Click Start Run bash 33 Replacing an S8100 Media Server s hard drive Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Step Details 15 BS Important Display and record the customer s network and product information a b From the bash shell execute the following three commands setip productid oss Write down all of this information exactly as it appears on the screen You will need to re enter this information later 16 BS From the bash shell execute shutdown System 17 The green Complete LED on the S8100 s faceplate will be flashing during the shutdown process Wait until this LED is on steady Then power down the system 18 Disconnect the cross over cable from the Processor board and remove the board from the
425. ther a full or a dot release update What you need before you start Obtain the following items before you go out on the customer site 1 Anupdated license file and Authentication file from RFA A CAUTION ASG Site Manager with the current customer information must be loaded on your laptop before you go to RFA for a new license file 2 Theupdate CD gt NOTE Refer to the PCN for the CD comcode A cross over cable A laptop with a network card and a CD ROM drive A keyboard monitor and mouse are strongly recommended but not required oO U Obtain and record any customer created or modified logins and passwords Obtaining the license file and Authentication file from Remote Feature Activation RFA Before you begin Before you go to RFA to obtain the files you will need the following e The ASG Site Manager on your laptop The SAP order number 6 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Obtaining the license file and Authentication file from Remote Feature Activation RFA High level steps Use the following steps to create a license file for the Product Correction Notices PCN update It is assumed that you have already passed the RFA test and that you have an SSO login 1 2 AN d WN U Type http rfa avaya com in the browser window The SSO login screen opens Login using your SSO login ID and password Click Login The RFA I
426. tions to shared directories disabled The connections are restored following a restart Click No when asked whether to restart your computer now 9 Right click Network Neighborhood and select Properties to return to the Network dialog 10 Select TCP IP Xircom CreditCard Ethernet Adapter 10 100 11 Click Properties The TCP IP Properties dialog displays TCP IP Properties NOTE Before continuing record the current settings from each of the TCP IP Properties tabs This information is needed to restore the laptop after work is finished with S8100 with a G600 or S8100 Installation and Upgrades 157 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Physical connections 158 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 On the IP Address tab ensure that Specify an IP address is selected Type 192 11 13 5 as the IP Address and 255 255 255 252 as the Subnet Mask Click the DNS configuration tab Click the Disable DNS radio button Click the WINS configuration tab Click the Disable WINS Resolution radio button Click the Gateway tab If a gateway is shown record the gateway number Highlight the gateway and select Remove Click OK here and in the following windows If asked click Yes to restart your computer or click Start gt Shutdown Restart the computer When the laptop reboots verify that it is now connected to the 58100 system Start a DOS shell on the laptop by clicking Start Programs gt MS DOS f
427. to return to the LAC prompt S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 System initialization Install the password file license file and installation scripts Install the password license and installation script file As a result of the previous procedure the license and authentication files licensefile lic and password bin should be in the d LucentPub ftproot directory NOTE Business partners who login with a Windows administrator login such as ntadmin can execute the loadpwd and loadlicense commands from the bash shell 1 Install the password file At the LAC prompt enter the command loadpwd password bin 2 Install the license file At the LAC prompt enter the command loadlicense licensefile lic Enter bash at the LAC prompt 4 Enter cd d LucentPub ftproot If using an installation script install it by entering the following at the BASH prompt 8100 lucent3 lt filename gt where filename is the name of the installation script s file for example installscript sh NOTE You need to use an installation script only if the customer has a maintenance contract with Avaya This script assigns product ids sets alarm origination and the alarm detection telephone numbers and the RAS IP address The system prompts you to reboot for the changes to take effect If you were unable to successfully install the installation script in this step you can set the customer related parameters manually as d
428. to the accessed equipment Theft such as of intellectual property financial assets or toll facility access Eavesdropping privacy invasions to humans Mischief troubling but apparently innocuous tampering Harm such as harmful tampering data loss or alteration regardless of motive or intent Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system and or its networked equipment Also realize that if such an intrusion should occur it could result in a variety of losses to your company including but not limited to human data privacy intellectual property material assets financial resources labor costs and or legal costs Responsibility for Your Company s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you Avaya s customer system administrator your telecommunications peers and your managers Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to Installation documents System administration documents Security documents Hardware software based security tools Shared information between you and your peers Telecommunications security experts To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment you and your peers should carefully program and configure Your Avaya provided telecommunications systems and t
429. tocols and standard application programming interfaces including TAPI TSAPI and JTAPI Several new corresident applications free up slots in the cabinet including C LAN functionality announcements and DEFINITY LAN Gateway In most cases with these applications corresident separate C LAN and Announcement circuit packs are not required and MAP D is not required for DEFINITY LAN Gateway Also BCMS Vu and CentreVu CT reside on a separate server which is LAN connected and enables 58100 to interface with these applications NOTE The C LAN TN799DP is still required for IP phones C LAN can be used instead of or in addition to the processor Ethernet interface for DEFINITY LAN Gateway connectivity S8100 Installation and Upgrades 247 April 2004 Hardware additions Add TN464GP TN2464BP with echo cancellation Add TN464GP TN2464BP with echo cancellation 248 The TN464GP TN2464BP circuit packs with echo cancellation are intended for S8100 G600 CMC1 customers who are likely to encounter echo over circuits connected to the Direct Distance Dialing DDD network These circuit packs are intended for channels supporting voice therefore they support the following trunks CAS CO DID DIOD DMI FX Tie WATS They do not support any data trunk groups NOTE The P suffix designation means the circuit pack is programmable new firmware can be downloaded directly to the circuit pack The TN464GP and TN2464BP circuit packs are bac
430. ts power and data via the Ethernet cable To safeguard devices that are not enabled an 1152A1 PDU can detect these devices and send them data via the Ethernet cable without transmitting power An end device that cannot receive power directly may receive its power and data through an external splitter The splitter separates the power and data before connecting to the end device see Connecting an IP telephone with an external splitter on page 126 S8100 Installation and Upgrades 125 April 2004 Install and cable a G600 cabinet Install and wire telephones and other equipment Figure 55 Connecting an IP telephone with an external splitter RJ 45 Male Connector RJ 45 Female Socket Data IP Phone Connection to Power over LAN Hub Power DC Power Connector Before connecting telephones or other end devices to the 1152A1 PDU determine if e Itis Power over LAN Enabled or not If not you may safely connect the telephone however the port supplies no power and functions as a normal Ethernet data port e It requires an external splitter or whether it requires only a single RJ45 connection If an external splitter is needed be certain to use a splitter with the correct connector and polarity It s power requirements are consistent with the 1152A1 PDU voltage and power ratings Refer to Appendix B in the user s guide that comes with the unit for voltage and power ratings To connect tele
431. tware to defragment the disk NOTE Do not schedule defragmentation to occur during scheduled maintenance Open a SAT session and type display system parameters maintenance and press Enter Note the scheduled maintenance times Diskeeper software automatically defragments the disk The C drive is defragmented once every Sunday at 3 00 a m and the D drive once every day between 2 00 a m and 4 00 a m You can change these times Change the default times on Diskeeper 1 From the 58100 desktop click Start Programs Executive Software Diskeeper The Diskeeper menu displays 2 Select Action Set It and Forget It 3 Select Partition Scheduler 4 Select Set It and Forget It Partition Scheduling window displays 5 Setnew times for automatic defragging This changes the default times 6 Click Start 7 Click Close S8100 Installation and Upgrades 329 April 2004 Miscellaneous procedures Access Diskeeper software to defragment the disk 330 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Recovery 58100 system level shutdown and restart D Recovery This chapter provides information about system recovery for S8100 This chapter is organized as follows e 58100 system level shutdown and restart on page 331 Communication Manager software reset recovery on page 333 Reset System 1 Communication Manager warm start on page 334 Reset System 2 Communication Manager cold start on page 334 Reset S
432. tworking Change local machine s information Perform a full remote update If you have the system set to perform automatic daily updates you only need to perform the full remote update to update the system after making changes to remote machine connections or to verify changes of data you just entered To update the remote user information immediately 1 Start at the AUDIX command prompt screen Enter get remote update machine_name at the enter command prompt where machine_name is the name of the remote machine The system displays the Remote Update Request confirmation screen Press F3 Enter to continue The cursor returns to the command line and the system displays the following message Command Successfully Completed Enter exit or another administrative command at the enter command prompt Reset automatic deletion of nonadministered remote users To conserve server space by automatically deleting nonadministered remote users 1 Start at the AUDIX command prompt screen Enter change system parameters features at the enter command prompt The system displays the System Parameters Features page 1 screen 3 Press F73 times to display the System Parameters Features Page 4 screen 4 Inthe Days without Activity field type the number of days Type 0 if you do not want to automatically delete nonadministered remote subscribers 5 Inthe Even If on a Mailing List field type n to retain information for nonadministered
433. u are using the NTadmin login type unrestrict at the bash prompt Type shutdown all to shutdown the applications on the 58100 When the shutdown is complete you will get the prompt back At the prompt type exit On the 58100 desktop click Start gt Run In the Open field type 192 11 13 5 followed by the letter of the CD ROM drive on your computer For example if the CD ROM letter you recorded from Step 4 Share the CD ROM and activate the guest account on your laptop on page 11 was D you would type 192 11 13 5 D You are now accessing the CD ROM drive on your laptop from the desktop of the 58100 Login as guest with the Guest 123 password Open the folder that reads Windows Updates Then click on the file named W2Ksp4 en exe After clicking W2Ksp4 en exe the service pack 4 upgrade extracts files After the files are extracted the following window opens S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Update the 58100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Figure 10 Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard x Welcome to the Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Setup Wizard Before you install this update we recommend that vou Update your system repair disk Back up your system Close all open programs To complete this installation Windows might require restarting after you finish this wizard Back Cancel Help 14 Click Next on the Windows 2000 S
434. u must do two restores After the first restore repeat the steps above using the location of the backed up AUDIX announcements for the Source in Step d 34 SDT IE When the restore finishes close Internet Explorer 35 SDT Open a bash shell Click Start Run bash 36 BS Shutdown every application Execute shutdown all 42 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Step Replacing an S8100 Media Server to update its software from R9 5 Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD Details 37 BS After the shutdown finishes restart every application Execute start all 38 BS Monitor the startup s progress Execute statapp 39 Verify that call processing comes into service 40 Verify that voice messaging comes into service 41 BS Telnet into the LAC window from Execute telnet 127 1 and logon using lucent3 bash 42 LAC Open a SAT window Type multivantage to open a SAT window The terminal type is W2KTT 43 SAT Verify that there is no translation If there are corrupted translations a message will appear corruption when the SAT window opens 44 SAT Verify that no major or minor Run display alarms alarms are present 45 SAT Verify outgoing alarm reports link Run test inads link to INADS 46 SAT Verify no license emergency Type change system parameters features numbers See Administer No License Emergency Numbers in
435. ublic coin phone service provided by the telephone company Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information This equipment if it uses a telephone receiver is hearing aid compatible Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment Declarations of Conformity United States FCC Part 68 Supplier s Declaration of Conformity SDoC Avaya Inc in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB 168 label identification number complies with the FCC s Rules and Regulations 47 CFR Part 68 and the Administrative Council on Terminal Attachments ACTA adopted technical criteria Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Par
436. urrent list of scheduled backup jobs page click Add new schedule The following page displays Home Administer System User Services Download Software z Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results a Scheduled Backups a Contents of backup location a Restore Backup these items Every At T MultiVantage announcements Mon 12 o0 fam T MultiVantage translation files Tue Wed Thu Clear Fri Sat Submit Sun Destination pcmcia x Bl Other locations AVAYA perpe enm Select backup destination either to a LAN address or a PCMCIA Flash Disk Select items for scheduled backup Select a day and time for the backup Click Submit S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking Initial administration tasks 4 INTUITY AUDIX digital networking This chapter provides information to administer digital networking after the S8100 s initial system administration is finished For further information see INTUITY AUDIX Administration This chapter is organized as follows Initial administration tasks on page 221 View the Feature Options window on page 223 Change number of administered remote users on page 224 Administer networking channels on page 225 Change local machine s information on page 226 Add a remote machine on page 230 Perform a full remote update on page 237 Reset automatic deletion of nonad
437. us none officeuser none officeadmin execute administrators execute lucent full control c LucentWeb AdminAl html Restricted html pages e g anonymous none activate Terminal Server officeuser none officeadmin none administrators full control ucent full control c LucentWeb AdminAll cgi Restricted html pages e g anonymous none activate Terminal Server officeuser none officeadmin none administrators full control lucent full control 3 of 3 Enabling Windows 2000 customer logins Only the Administrator can enable customer logins Set up login accounts 1 2 304 Start the Windows 2000 user manager the 58100 desktop Click Start Programs gt Administrative Tools Computer Management Local Users amp Groups Change the password for the NTadmin account Activate and set passwords for the browse vm and sa accounts This also can be done via the command line tool net user See Avaya Lucent access controller bash commands on page 343 Create 3 Windows accounts in the Officeadmin group for 3 application administrators These accounts are used to download Avaya Site Administration software The account names can be chosen as desired For this example they are called Dluserl Dluser2 and Dluser3 S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Set up customer logins Communication Manager logins for customers 5 Create 1 Windows account in the Officeuser group for download of the INTUITY Messa
438. use Avaya Site Administration for problem resolution The Avaya Site Administration Help system contains software embedded documentation to help install and troubleshoot the system including e Avaya Site Administration task oriented online help e Avaya Site Administration online help reference Installation wizard e Avaya Site Administration connectivity troubleshooting help topics Communication Manager task based help topics Communication Manager reference topics using the Administrators Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 Interactions with switches and voice mail systems 262 Avaya Site Administration is not client server based It communicates directly with switches and INTUITY AUDIX systems as follows Through a direct hardware connection within an 58100 computer e OveraLAN e With a modem or data module 58100 as shipped allows installation personnel to connect to switches and voice mail systems through the direct hardware connection in the S8100 computer To optimize the efficiency of S8100 and Avaya Site Administration and because administrators may not want to work directly on the 58100 computer install Avaya Site Administration software on a separate computer and connect to the switch in any of the other 3 ways listed above S8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Components of Avaya Site Administration If installation personnel choose to install Avaya Site
439. ut for TN793 Analog Line circuit pack 2 of 2 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Port Signal Cross connect pin Color Amphenol pin Backplane pin 12 T 12 23 BK O 37 113 R 12 24 O BK 12 013 13 T 13 25 BK G 38 302 R 13 26 G BK 13 202 14 T 14 27 BK BR 39 303 R 14 28 BR BK 14 203 15 T 15 29 BK SL 40 304 R 15 30 SL BK 15 204 16 T 16 31 Y BL 41 305 R 16 32 BL Y 16 205 17 T 17 33 Y O 42 306 R 17 34 O Y 17 206 18 T 18 35 Y G 43 307 R 18 36 G Y 18 207 19 T 19 37 Y BR 44 308 R 19 38 BR Y 19 208 20 T 20 39 Y SL 45 309 R 20 40 SL Y 20 209 21 T 21 41 V BL 46 310 R 21 42 BL V 21 210 22 T 22 43 47 311 R 22 44 O V 22 211 23 T 23 45 V G 48 312 R 23 46 G V 23 212 24 T 24 47 V BR 49 313 R 24 48 BR V 24 213 25 49 V SL 50 314 50 50 SL V 25 214 2 of 2 293 vrooz idy v6c pue uonejeisu 00185 Table 46 Classifications of circuit packs and auxiliary equipment 2 Wire Digital amp Analog Line Data Line amp Digital 16 Line 4 and 24 wire TN2149 TN432 TN2135 TN411B TN448 TN742 TN746 TN769 TN746B Analog Line 8 TN467 1 MET Multibutton Electronic Telep Digital Line 2 wire 24 port TN2224 hone TN762 TN762B MET Line TN735 2 DID DIOD Direct Inward Dialing Direct Inward Outward Dialing 3 DIOD Direct Inward Outward Dial
440. utes for the TN750 or TN750B If a circuit pack already has announcements in its flash memory the yellow LED flashes as the announcements copy to the voice RAM Add TN750C circuit pack Follow this procedure to add a circuit pack 1 Insert the TN750C into a vacant slot in a carrier 2 Administer new announcements to the TN750C s slot by executing the change announcements lt location gt command Record the announcements as described in Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 4 Wait until the announcements copy from voice RAM to the on board flash memory the yellow LED on the TN750C starts and then stops flashing This takes about 10 minutes Move a single announcement to another Announcement circuit pack Follow this procedure to move a single announcement to another Announcement circuit pack 1 Enterthe change announcements command to change the circuit pack locations of a particular announcement You may also change the compression rate at this time 2 Re record the announcement as described in Administrator s Guide for Avaya Communication Manager 555 233 506 CWY1 announcements 254 With CWY1 announcements customers can produce and use professional quality announcements and store them on the 58100 hard drive Voice processing of the announcements is handled on the CWY 1 board The CWY board is resident as a component of the TN2314 Processor circuit pack Handling announcement
441. vector authorization codes COR and INTUITY AUDIX subscribers Emulation enhancements Allows customers to define send break copy paste change text color and change font S8100 Installation and Upgrades 261 April 2004 Avaya Site Administration Interactions with switches and voice mail systems Enhancements to Reporting Prints or exports to a file a screen capture of any switch command Importing Enhancements Imports from a file into the data import grid Port Browser Enhancements Includes the board s description such as digital line 24 port 2 wire DCP port You might encounter either version 1 0 or 1 5 at customer sites Although customers are responsible for using Avaya Site Administration to add devices upgrade Avaya Site Administration and administer the switch voice technicians and maintenance teams must know how to successfully install and test Avaya Site Administration which includes Knowledge of Microsoft Windows environment especially Windows 2000 How to install the Avaya Site Administration product e How to test for example test a login access a switch print a button label cut through to legacy switch or INTUITY AUDIX How to ensure customer acceptance e High level knowledge of contents of available documentation including on line documents In addition Field Technicians will be responsible for analyzing and correcting problems reported by the customer and must know how to
442. ws operating system and environments are beyond the scope of this document Please refer to your Microsoft documentation for details concerning the Windows operating systems Physical connections Use any of the following methods to create a physical connection to S8100 system Direct connection via RJ45 jack on the TN2314 faceplate Direct connection via local monitor mouse keyboard Customer LAN e RAS modem dial up e DEFINITY LAN gateway DLG S8100 Installation and Upgrades 153 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an 58100 system Physical connections Direct connection to the RJ45 service jack 154 Cabling to the RJ45 service jack on the 58100 server s TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate is the preferred method of connecting directly to an S8100 system Connect the laptop to 58100 system The technician s laptop computer connects directly to the 58100 system A media coupler cable is connected from the laptop s PCMCIA Ethernet card to a cross over cable which is connected to the RJ45 jack on the TN2314 circuit pack s faceplate The laptop computer requires the following equipment Table 25 Technician s required laptop equipment Part number Description Quantity Laptop computer running Windows 2000 or Windows 95 with a PCMCIA Ethernet card 1 PCMCIA Ethernet card 848477634 Cable assembly to connect to RJ45 Media coupler cable and or RJ45 coupler to connect the PCMCIA card t
443. you are calling then click Next Click Finish The new icon appears in the Dial Up Networking dialog Right click the new icon to enable the associated properties window Click the Server Types tab of the associated properties window Select TCP IP Click the TCP IP Settings button The TCP IP Settings dialog displays TCP IP Settings 121 Specify an IP address P address Bu EDS EH Server assigned name server addresses Specify name server addresses Primary DNS CE ECE um 0 e e Secondary DNS Eiman WINS HI Seconday wins Use IP header compression Use default gateway on remote network OK Cancel Select Server assigned IP address Select Server assigned name server addresses Select Use IP header compression and ensure that the Use default gateway on remote network is not checked Click OK The user name on this dialog must be rasaccess with the appropriate password The password is the same for each 8100 system being contacted Click Connect 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Access methods 17 A dialog similar to the following displays Connect Enter user name and password with accers the remote network domain User name Jrasaccess Password Domain Save password A network password is not needed unless disks will be mounted
444. ys System Administration a MultiVantage on 135 s The first two links will work only a Intuity AUDIX on 135 if you have already installed Hn a Default AUDIX Settings Avaya Site Administration a UDIX Networking on your computer Administer SNMP Agent Admin System a Announcement Admin Click on the s Download Software link T TETTE System Maintenance at the left to install SORIA a Backup amp Restore Avaya Site Administration a Shutdown or Restart 135 Download Software Remote Control Terminal Services a Login to 135 320 8100 Installation and Upgrades April 2004 6 Miscellaneous procedures Backup via the web interface Click Backup and Restore to open the main backup menu a Immediate Backup a Last scheduled backup results 1 Scheduled Backups Contents of backup location a Restore Home Protect Your Valuable Translations Administer Avaya recommends that you read and understand the following before using the System Backup program User Services Schedule your translation backups to more than one destination A different destination for each day of the week is ideal For example create one schedule to backup your translations to PCMCIA disk and another schedule to backup to a remote hard disk drive Download Software Backup a complete set of translations onto a separate PCMCIA disk Store this disk in a safe place AVAYA From the backup and restore main menu you can Perfor
445. ystem 3 Communication Manager reboot on page 334 Reset System 4 Communication Manager reboot on page 334 Reset System 5 system reboot When the system is initially powered up or when an existing system experiences a catastrophic fault that interrupts its basic functions the system reboots 8100 system level shutdown and restart Table 52 Shutdown and restart actions on page 331 presents system level shutdown and restart actions that can be initiated by the system technician the customer and by hardware The state of the shutdown and restart actions is indicated by the state of the LEDs on the TN2314 Processor circuit pack See Appendix E LED boot sequence TN2314 Processor More details about the use of the user commands can be found in Maintenance for the Avaya S8100 Media Server with the Avaya G600 and Media Gateways 555 233 149 Table 52 Shutdown and restart actions 1 of 3 Action Entry Originated by Action Notes reboot nice command line technician Shuts down every Used for a system reboot after campon entry from a application with campon changing a Windows 2000 bash session to wait for INTUITY level parameter that requires a AUDIX users to logoff system reboot This may take The system restarts an unacceptably long time due automatically to campon of INTUITY AUDIX logons reboot command line technician Shuts down every Used for a
446. zed access is a criminal violation of the law Copyright c 1992 Avaya Inc Unpublished amp Not for Publication Don t show this message again AVAYA 7 Read the page and click Continue Once permissions are granted the software allows you to navigate through the system 8 Click Administer System The Administration page displays System Administration MultiVantage on 135 The first two links will work only a Intuity AUDIX on 135 if you have already installed a Default AUDIX Settings Avaya Site Administration a AUDIX Networking on your computer Administer SNMP Agent Admin System Announcement Admin Click on the d Download Software link System Maintenance at the left to install User Services Backup amp Restore Avaya Site Administration a Shutdown or Restart 135 Download Software Remote Control Terminal Services a Login to 135 8100 Installation and Upgrades 169 April 2004 Connectivity and access to an S8100 system Access methods Logging into the S8100 Windows 2000 desktop 1 a RU N On the Web Interface home page click Administer System and login using lucent3 for login and password A domain is not required Select continue at license agreement window Click Login to 192 under Remote Control Terminal Services If a VBScript error message appears click OK Click the Connect button leave the Server field blank If a VBScript message a
447. zone the time and re administer the customers logins and passwords You can access the TN2314 desktop using a keyboard monitor and mouse or you can use your laptop If you have a keyboard monitor and mouse refer to Set the timezone and time using a keyboard monitor and mouse on page 28 for instructions If you are using your laptop refer to Set the timezone and time through your laptop on page 23 for instructions Set the timezone and time through your laptop 1 Open Internet Explorer on your laptop 2 192 11 13 6 in the URL address field and press Enter The Web interface screen opens as shown in the following example Figure 17 Web Interface s AVAYA communication System User Services 8100 Installation and Upgrades 23 April 2004 Update the S8100 Using a CD Procedure to Update the 58100 with a CD 3 Click Administer System on the navigation pane The Enter Network Password screen opens as shown in the following example Figure 18 Enter Network Password screen gt Please type your user name and password Site 135 122 54 50 Realm 135 122 54 50 User Name Password Save this password in your password list OK Cancel 4 Login using the lucent3 login 5 Inthe Administer System window click Login to 192 under Remote Control Terminal Services 6 Ifa VBScript error appears click OK In the Remote Desktop Web Connection screen click Connect 7 Ifa VBScript

Avaya Communication Manager Installation and Upgrades S8100

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents